WO2017175550A1 - Composition, method for producing composition, cured film, color filter, light-blocking film, solid-state imaging element, and image display device - Google Patents

Composition, method for producing composition, cured film, color filter, light-blocking film, solid-state imaging element, and image display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2017175550A1
WO2017175550A1 PCT/JP2017/010256 JP2017010256W WO2017175550A1 WO 2017175550 A1 WO2017175550 A1 WO 2017175550A1 JP 2017010256 W JP2017010256 W JP 2017010256W WO 2017175550 A1 WO2017175550 A1 WO 2017175550A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
group
composition
metal nitride
containing particles
mass
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2017/010256
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
久保田 誠
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=60001079&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=WO2017175550(A1) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Priority to JP2018510284A priority Critical patent/JP6571275B2/en
Priority to KR1020187028416A priority patent/KR102210003B1/en
Priority to KR1020217002285A priority patent/KR20210011080A/en
Publication of WO2017175550A1 publication Critical patent/WO2017175550A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C01INORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C01BNON-METALLIC ELEMENTS; COMPOUNDS THEREOF; METALLOIDS OR COMPOUNDS THEREOF NOT COVERED BY SUBCLASS C01C
    • C01B21/00Nitrogen; Compounds thereof
    • C01B21/06Binary compounds of nitrogen with metals, with silicon, or with boron, or with carbon, i.e. nitrides; Compounds of nitrogen with more than one metal, silicon or boron
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09DCOATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D7/00Features of coating compositions, not provided for in group C09D5/00; Processes for incorporating ingredients in coating compositions
    • C09D7/40Additives
    • C09D7/60Additives non-macromolecular
    • C09D7/61Additives non-macromolecular inorganic
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L33/00Compositions of homopolymers or copolymers of compounds having one or more unsaturated aliphatic radicals, each having only one carbon-to-carbon double bond, and only one being terminated by only one carboxyl radical, or of salts, anhydrides, esters, amides, imides or nitriles thereof; Compositions of derivatives of such polymers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L67/00Compositions of polyesters obtained by reactions forming a carboxylic ester link in the main chain; Compositions of derivatives of such polymers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09CTREATMENT OF INORGANIC MATERIALS, OTHER THAN FIBROUS FILLERS, TO ENHANCE THEIR PIGMENTING OR FILLING PROPERTIES ; PREPARATION OF CARBON BLACK  ; PREPARATION OF INORGANIC MATERIALS WHICH ARE NO SINGLE CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS AND WHICH ARE MAINLY USED AS PIGMENTS OR FILLERS
    • C09C1/00Treatment of specific inorganic materials other than fibrous fillers; Preparation of carbon black
    • C09C1/22Compounds of iron
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09CTREATMENT OF INORGANIC MATERIALS, OTHER THAN FIBROUS FILLERS, TO ENHANCE THEIR PIGMENTING OR FILLING PROPERTIES ; PREPARATION OF CARBON BLACK  ; PREPARATION OF INORGANIC MATERIALS WHICH ARE NO SINGLE CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS AND WHICH ARE MAINLY USED AS PIGMENTS OR FILLERS
    • C09C3/00Treatment in general of inorganic materials, other than fibrous fillers, to enhance their pigmenting or filling properties
    • C09C3/06Treatment with inorganic compounds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09CTREATMENT OF INORGANIC MATERIALS, OTHER THAN FIBROUS FILLERS, TO ENHANCE THEIR PIGMENTING OR FILLING PROPERTIES ; PREPARATION OF CARBON BLACK  ; PREPARATION OF INORGANIC MATERIALS WHICH ARE NO SINGLE CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS AND WHICH ARE MAINLY USED AS PIGMENTS OR FILLERS
    • C09C3/00Treatment in general of inorganic materials, other than fibrous fillers, to enhance their pigmenting or filling properties
    • C09C3/10Treatment with macromolecular organic compounds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09DCOATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D17/00Pigment pastes, e.g. for mixing in paints
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09DCOATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D17/00Pigment pastes, e.g. for mixing in paints
    • C09D17/004Pigment pastes, e.g. for mixing in paints containing an inorganic pigment
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09DCOATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D201/00Coating compositions based on unspecified macromolecular compounds
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09DCOATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D7/00Features of coating compositions, not provided for in group C09D5/00; Processes for incorporating ingredients in coating compositions
    • C09D7/40Additives
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C09DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • C09DCOATING COMPOSITIONS, e.g. PAINTS, VARNISHES OR LACQUERS; FILLING PASTES; CHEMICAL PAINT OR INK REMOVERS; INKS; CORRECTING FLUIDS; WOODSTAINS; PASTES OR SOLIDS FOR COLOURING OR PRINTING; USE OF MATERIALS THEREFOR
    • C09D7/00Features of coating compositions, not provided for in group C09D5/00; Processes for incorporating ingredients in coating compositions
    • C09D7/40Additives
    • C09D7/60Additives non-macromolecular
    • C09D7/61Additives non-macromolecular inorganic
    • C09D7/62Additives non-macromolecular inorganic modified by treatment with other compounds
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a composition, a method for producing the composition, a cured film, a color filter, a light shielding film, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device.
  • compositions containing titanium nitride have been used in various applications, for example, in the production of light-shielding films provided in liquid crystal display devices and solid-state imaging devices.
  • a color filter used in a liquid crystal display device includes a light shielding film called a black matrix for the purpose of shielding light between colored pixels and improving contrast.
  • a light shielding film is provided for the purpose of preventing noise and improving image quality.
  • portable terminals of electronic devices such as mobile phones and PDAs (Personal Digital Assistants) are equipped with small and thin imaging units.
  • Such an imaging unit generally includes a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) image sensor and a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor) image sensor, a lens for forming a subject image on the solid-state imaging device, It has.
  • a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) image sensor and a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor) image sensor, a lens for forming a subject image on the solid-state imaging device, It has.
  • Patent Document 1 states that “a black powder composed of one or two oxynitrides of vanadium or niobium, an oxygen content of 16 wt% or less, a nitrogen content of 10 wt% or more, and a dispersion having a powder concentration of 50 ppm. "Blue shielding black powder characterized in that the transmittance X at 450 nm in the transmission spectrum is 10.0% or less.”
  • the blue shielding black powder described in Patent Document 1 has excellent properties as a black pigment having high light shielding properties.
  • the composition containing the black pigment as described above is used to form a cured film processed into a pattern on a substrate on which an electrode pattern is formed.
  • the present inventors have found that there is room for further improvement in terms of improving resolution and suppressing deterioration (corrosion) of electrode patterns. Note that the resolution is that the desired pattern is approximated by the desired pattern, specifically, the obtained pattern is not thicker than the desired shape. And not intended to be thin.
  • the present inventor is a composition containing metal nitride-containing particles containing a predetermined atom, wherein the metal nitride-containing particles are made of a group 3-11 transition metal.
  • a composition containing a transition metal nitride other than titanium and having an electronegativity of 1.22 to 2.36 can solve the above problems.
  • a composition containing metal nitride-containing particles containing atom A wherein the metal nitride-containing particles are transition metals excluding titanium among the group 3-11 transition metals, and It contains a transition metal nitride having an electronegativity of 1.22 to 2.36, and atom A is an element different from the transition metal constituting the transition metal nitride, and includes boron, aluminum, silicon,
  • a composition which is at least one selected from the group consisting of manganese, iron, nickel and silver, and the content of atom A in the metal nitride-containing particles is 0.00005 to 10% by mass.
  • composition according to [1] wherein the conductivity of the metal nitride-containing particles is 100 ⁇ 10 4 to 600 ⁇ 10 4 S / m.
  • the composition according to [4], wherein the mass ratio of the binder resin to the metal nitride-containing particles is 0.3 or less.
  • transition metal according to any one of [1] to [5], wherein the transition metal is at least one selected from the group consisting of V, Cr, Y, Zr, Nb, Hf, Ta, W, and Re. Composition.
  • the composition according to any one of [1] to [9] further containing a solvent and having a solid content of 10 to 40% by mass.
  • composition according to [10] wherein the solvent contains water and the water content is 0.1 to 1% by mass relative to the total mass of the composition.
  • a dispersant is further contained, and the dispersant contains at least one structure selected from the group consisting of polymethyl acrylate, polymethyl methacrylate, and cyclic or chain polyester.
  • mass ratio of the dispersant to the metal nitride-containing particles is 0.05 to 0.30.
  • [15] The composition according to any one of [1] to [14], wherein the metal nitride-containing particles are metal nitride-containing particles coated with an inorganic compound containing aluminum hydroxide.
  • [17] A cured film obtained using the composition according to any one of [1] to [15].
  • [18] A color filter containing the cured film according to [17].
  • [19] A light-shielding film containing the cured film according to [17].
  • [20] A solid-state imaging device containing the cured film according to [17].
  • An image display device comprising the cured film according to [17].
  • a composition capable of producing a cured film having excellent light shielding properties, excellent resolution, and excellent electrode anticorrosive properties (hereinafter also referred to as “having the effect of the present invention”).
  • the manufacturing method of a composition, a cured film, a color filter, a light shielding film, a solid-state image sensor, and an image display apparatus can be provided.
  • a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
  • group (atomic group) in this specification the description which does not describe substitution and non-substitution includes what does not contain a substituent and what contains a substituent.
  • the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group not containing a substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group containing a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
  • active light or “radiation” means, for example, the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, deep ultraviolet light represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet lithography (EUV), X-ray, and Means an electron beam.
  • light means actinic rays and radiation.
  • exposure in the present specification includes not only exposure with an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp and far ultraviolet rays such as an excimer laser, X-rays and EUV light, but also an electron beam and an ion beam, etc. Also includes drawing with particle beams.
  • (meth) acrylate represents an acrylate and a methacrylate.
  • (meth) acryl represents acryl and methacryl.
  • (meth) acryloyl represents acryloyl and methacryloyl.
  • (meth) acrylamide represents acrylamide and methacrylamide.
  • “monomer” and “monomer” are synonymous.
  • a monomer is distinguished from an oligomer and a polymer, and refers to a compound having a weight average molecular weight of 2,000 or less.
  • the polymerizable compound means a compound containing a polymerizable group, and may be a monomer or a polymer.
  • the polymerizable group refers to a group that participates in a polymerization reaction.
  • composition is a composition containing metal nitride-containing particles containing atoms A, and the metal nitride-containing particles are transition metals excluding titanium among the group 3-11 transition metals, And a transition metal nitride having an electronegativity of 1.22 to 2.36, and the atom A is an element different from the transition metal, and is boron, aluminum, silicon, manganese, iron, nickel And a composition in which the content of atom A in the metal nitride-containing particles is 0.00005 to 10% by mass.
  • the reason why the above composition has the effect of the present invention is not necessarily clear, but the present inventor presumes as follows.
  • the mechanism by which the said composition exhibits the effect of this invention by the following assumptions is not limited.
  • the above composition contains particles containing transition metal nitrides which are transition metals excluding titanium among the transition metals of Group 3 to 11 and have an electronegativity of 1.22 to 2.36.
  • transition metal nitrides which are transition metals excluding titanium among the transition metals of Group 3 to 11 and have an electronegativity of 1.22 to 2.36.
  • the nitride has a valence band composed of 2p orbitals of nitrogen, the valence band is on the more negative side than the oxide. Further, since the nitride is made of a transition metal having a predetermined electronegativity as described above, the band gap between the valence band and the conduction band becomes smaller. As a result, it is presumed that the transition metal nitride absorbs light in a wider wavelength range (higher light shielding properties).
  • the electronegativity in this specification intends the electronegativity according to the definition of Pauling.
  • the composition contains atom A.
  • a wavelength for example, i-line: 365 nm
  • the composition has excellent resolution.
  • the composition has an excellent anticorrosive property of the electrode because the content of the atom A is in a predetermined range.
  • the metal nitride-containing particles are metal nitride-containing particles containing atoms A.
  • the aspect in which the metal nitride-containing particles contain the atom A is not particularly limited, and ions, metal compounds (including complex compounds), intermetallic compounds, alloys, oxides, complex oxides, nitrides, oxynitrides It may be contained in any form such as a product, sulfide and oxysulfide.
  • the atoms A contained in the metal nitride-containing particles may exist as an impurity at a position between crystal lattices, or may exist as an impurity in an amorphous state at a crystal grain boundary.
  • Atom A is contained in the metal nitride-containing particles.
  • the atom A is an element different from the transition metal described below, and is at least one selected from the group consisting of boron, aluminum, silicon, manganese, iron, nickel, and silver.
  • at least one selected from the group consisting of aluminum, silicon, iron, nickel and silver is preferable in that the composition has more excellent effects of the present invention, and selected from the group consisting of iron, silicon and nickel. More preferred is at least one selected from the group consisting of The atom A may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together.
  • the content of atom A in the metal nitride-containing particles is 0.00005 to 10% by mass.
  • the content of atom A is less than the lower limit, the resolution of the cured film obtained from the composition is inferior.
  • the content of the atom A exceeds the upper limit value, the light shielding property of the cured film obtained from the composition and the anticorrosion property of the electrode are inferior.
  • the content of the atom A is preferably 0.00005% by mass or more and less than 1%, more preferably 0.00005% by mass or more and 0% or more, in that the cured film obtained from the composition has more excellent corrosion resistance of the electrode. Less than 1% is more preferable.
  • the cured film obtained by the said composition has more excellent light-shielding property.
  • the content of atom A in the metal nitride-containing particles is measured by ICP (Inductively Coupled Plasma) emission spectroscopic analysis.
  • the metal nitride-containing particle contains a transition metal nitride that is a transition metal excluding titanium among the group 3-11 transition metals and has an electronegativity of 1.22 to 2.36. .
  • the transition metal electrospray
  • Sc (1.36) Dy (1.22), Ho (1.23), Er (1.24), Tm (group 3 transition elements) 1.25), Lu (1.27), Th (1.3), Pa (1.5), U (1.38), Np (1.36), Pu (1.28), Am (1 .3), Cm (1.3), Bk (1.3), Cf (1.3), Es (1.3), Fm (1.3), Md (1.3), No (1.
  • Hf, Ta, W, Re, Os, Ir, or Pt Sc, V, Cr, Co, Cu, Y, Zr, Mo, Tc, Ru, Rh, Pd, Hf, Ta, W, Re, Os, Ir, or Pt is more preferable, V, Cr, Y, Zr, Nb, Hf, Ta, W, or Re is more preferable, V, Cr, Y, Nb, Ta, W, or Re is particularly preferable, V or Nb is particularly more preferable, and Nb is most preferable.
  • the content of the “transition metal constituting the transition metal nitride” in the metal nitride-containing particles is preferably 10 to 85% by mass, and preferably 15 to 75% by mass with respect to the total mass of the metal nitride-containing particles. More preferred is 20 to 70% by mass.
  • the content of “transition metal constituting transition metal nitride” in the metal nitride-containing particles can be analyzed by ICP (Inductively Coupled Plasma) emission spectroscopy.
  • the content of nitrogen atoms (N atoms) in the metal nitride-containing particles is preferably 3 to 60% by mass, more preferably 5 to 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the metal nitride-containing particles. More preferred is mass%.
  • the nitrogen atom content can be analyzed by an inert gas melting-thermal conductivity method.
  • the metal nitride-containing particles contain metal nitride as a main component and may partially contain oxygen atoms due to oxidation of the particle surface. For example, the oxidation of the particle surface becomes more prominent when oxygen is mixed in the synthesis of the metal nitride or when the particle diameter is small.
  • the content of oxygen atoms in the metal nitride-containing particles is preferably 1 to 40% by mass, more preferably 1 to 35% by mass, and further preferably 5 to 30% by mass with respect to the total mass of the metal nitride-containing particles. preferable.
  • the oxygen atom content can be analyzed by an inert gas melting-infrared absorption method.
  • the specific surface area is preferably 5 m 2 / g or more 100 m 2 / g or less of a metal nitride-containing particles, 10 m 2 / g or more 60 m 2 / g or less is more preferable.
  • the specific surface area can be determined by the BET (Brunauer, Emmett, Teller) method.
  • the metal nitride-containing particles may be composite fine particles composed of metal nitride-containing particles and metal fine particles.
  • the composite fine particles are particles in which metal nitride-containing particles and metal fine particles are complexed or in a highly dispersed state.
  • “composite” means that particles are composed of both metal nitride and metal components
  • “highly dispersed state” means metal nitride-containing particles and metal particles. Means that the small amount of particles are uniformly and uniformly dispersed without aggregation.
  • the metal fine particles are not particularly limited.
  • At least one selected from alloys can be mentioned.
  • at least one selected from copper, gold, platinum, palladium, tin, cobalt, rhodium and iridium, and alloys thereof is preferable, and at least selected from copper, gold, platinum, tin, and alloys thereof It is more preferable that it is 1 type.
  • the content of the metal fine particles in the metal nitride-containing particles is preferably 5 to 50% by mass and more preferably 10 to 30% by mass with respect to the total mass of the metal nitride-containing particles.
  • a gas phase reaction method is usually used, and specific examples include an electric furnace method and a thermal plasma method.
  • the thermal plasma method is preferable because it is less contaminated with impurities, has a uniform particle diameter, and has high productivity.
  • a specific method for producing metal nitride-containing particles by the thermal plasma method includes, for example, a method using a metal fine particle production apparatus.
  • the metal fine particle manufacturing apparatus includes, for example, a plasma torch that generates thermal plasma, a material supply device that supplies metal raw material powder into the plasma torch, a chamber that includes a cooling function, and a cyclone that classifies the generated metal fine particles. And a recovery unit for recovering the metal fine particles.
  • the metal fine particles mean particles having a primary particle diameter of 20 nm to 40 ⁇ m containing a metal element.
  • the method for producing metal nitride-containing particles using a metal fine particle production apparatus includes the following steps in that the yield of metal nitride-containing particles having the following predetermined average primary particle diameter is increased. preferable.
  • Step A A step of supplying a thermal plasma flame by supplying an inert gas containing no nitrogen gas as a plasma gas in the plasma torch.
  • Step B A step of supplying a metal raw material powder containing a transition metal to a thermal plasma flame in a plasma torch and evaporating the metal raw material powder to obtain a gas phase raw material metal.
  • Step C Step of cooling the gas phase raw material metal to obtain fine metal particles containing a transition metal.
  • Step D A step of supplying a thermal plasma flame by supplying an inert gas containing nitrogen gas as a plasma gas in the plasma torch.
  • Step E A step of supplying metal fine particles containing a transition metal to a thermal plasma flame in a plasma torch and evaporating the metal fine particles to obtain a gas phase raw material metal.
  • Step F Step of cooling the gas phase raw metal to obtain metal nitride-containing particles.
  • grains may contain the following process G depending on necessity after the said process C and / or the process F.
  • FIG. Step G A step of classifying the obtained particles.
  • Step A2 A step of mixing atoms A into a metal raw material powder containing a transition metal. Further, before the step A2, the following steps A3-1 to A3-3 may be included.
  • Step A3-1 An inert gas not containing nitrogen gas is supplied as a plasma gas in the plasma torch, and a thermal plasma flame is generated.
  • Step A3-2 Atom A is contained in the thermal plasma flame in the plasma torch.
  • the atomized atom A means a particle having an atom A-containing primary particle diameter of 20 nm to 40 ⁇ m.
  • grains contains the following process H further after the process F (When the process G is included, after the process G after the process F).
  • Step H A step of exposing the metal nitride-containing particles obtained in Step F (or Step G) to a mixed atmosphere of water vapor and nitrogen gas to perform nitriding treatment.
  • grains may contain the process G further after the process H if desired. Below, the suitable aspect of each process is explained in full detail.
  • Step A is a step of generating a thermal plasma flame by supplying an inert gas containing no nitrogen gas as a plasma gas in the plasma torch.
  • the generation method of the thermal plasma flame is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a direct current arc discharge method, a multiphase arc discharge method, a high frequency plasma method, a hybrid plasma method, and the like. Is preferred.
  • the method of generating a thermal plasma flame by the high frequency plasma method is not particularly limited. For example, a plasma gas is supplied into a plasma torch containing a high frequency oscillation coil and a quartz tube, and a high frequency current is applied to the high frequency oscillation coil. The method of obtaining a thermal plasma flame by doing is mentioned.
  • an inert gas not containing nitrogen gas is used as the plasma gas in step A.
  • the inert gas not containing nitrogen gas include argon gas and hydrogen gas.
  • the inert gas which does not contain nitrogen gas may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together.
  • Step A2 is a step of mixing atoms A into a metal raw material powder containing a transition metal.
  • the method for mixing the raw metal powder and the atom A is not particularly limited, and a known method can be used.
  • the material supply device for supplying the metal raw material powder into the plasma torch may contain a mixing and dispersing function.
  • the material supply apparatus described in paragraphs [0047] to [0058] of International Publication No. 2010/147098 can be used, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the method for producing metal nitride-containing particles may further include the following steps A3-1 to A3-3 before step A2.
  • Step B is a step of supplying a metal raw material powder containing a transition metal to a thermal plasma flame in the plasma torch and evaporating the metal raw material powder to obtain a gas phase raw material metal.
  • the method for supplying the metal raw material powder to the thermal plasma flame in the plasma torch is not particularly limited, but the obtained gas phase raw material metal may be sprayed using a carrier gas in a more uniform state. preferable.
  • the aspect of the inert gas not containing nitrogen gas is as described above.
  • the method for producing metal nitride-containing particles includes the step A2, the metal raw material powder is maintained in a uniform dispersed state until the metal raw material powder is supplied into the plasma torch. It is preferable.
  • Step C is a step of cooling the gas phase raw material metal to obtain fine metal particles containing a transition metal.
  • the cooling method is not particularly limited, but it is preferable to use a chamber containing a cooling function.
  • metal fine particles having the following desired particle diameter can be generated.
  • the generated metal fine particles are recovered by, for example, the recovery unit.
  • the atmosphere in the chamber is preferably an inert gas that does not contain nitrogen gas.
  • the aspect of the inert gas not containing nitrogen gas is as described above.
  • Step D is a step of generating a thermal plasma flame by supplying an inert gas containing nitrogen gas as a plasma gas in the plasma torch.
  • the inert gas containing nitrogen include nitrogen gas and nitrogen gas containing an inert gas.
  • the inert gas include argon gas and hydrogen gas.
  • the nitrogen gas contained in the inert gas is not particularly limited, but the nitrogen gas content is usually about 10 to 90 mol%, preferably about 30 to 60 mol%. Other aspects are the same as in step A.
  • Step E is a step of supplying metal fine particles containing a transition metal to the thermal plasma flame in the plasma torch and evaporating the metal fine particles to obtain a gas phase raw material metal.
  • the method for supplying the metal fine particles to the thermal plasma flame in the plasma torch is as described above, but the carrier gas is preferably an inert gas containing nitrogen.
  • the aspect of the inert gas containing nitrogen is as described above.
  • Step E the raw material metal that has become fine metal particles in Steps A to C is supplied to the thermal plasma flame, so that it is easy to obtain a vapor phase raw material metal, and the state of the vapor phase raw material metal becomes more uniform. Cheap.
  • Step F is a step of cooling the gas phase raw material metal to obtain metal nitride-containing particles containing a transition metal nitride.
  • the suitable aspect of the cooling method is as above-mentioned, as the atmosphere in a chamber, the inert gas containing nitrogen gas is preferable.
  • the suitable aspect of the inert gas containing nitrogen gas is as above-mentioned.
  • Step G is a step of classifying the obtained metal fine particles and / or metal nitride-containing particles.
  • the classification method is not particularly limited, and for example, a cyclone can be used.
  • the cyclone has a container on a cone, and generates a swirling flow in the container and has a function of classifying particles using centrifugal force.
  • the classification is preferably performed in an inert gas atmosphere. The aspect of the inert gas is as described above.
  • Step H is a step in which the metal nitride-containing particles are exposed to a mixed atmosphere of water vapor and nitrogen gas to perform nitriding treatment. Through this step, the metal nitride content in the metal nitride-containing particles can be increased.
  • the method for exposing the metal nitride-containing particles to a mixed atmosphere of water vapor and nitrogen gas is not particularly limited.
  • the metal nitride-containing particles are introduced into a thermostatic bath filled with a gas mixed with water vapor and nitrogen gas.
  • There may be mentioned a method of standing or stirring for a predetermined time There may be mentioned a method of standing or stirring for a predetermined time, and it is more preferred that the metal nitride-containing particles are allowed to stand for stabilization of the surface and crystal boundaries.
  • the mixing ratio of water vapor and nitrogen gas is preferably such that the relative humidity is 25 to 95% in the atmosphere.
  • the time for standing or stirring is preferably 0.5 to 72 hours, and the temperature at that
  • steps A3-1 to A3-3 an inert gas not containing nitrogen gas is supplied as a plasma gas in the plasma torch to generate a thermal plasma flame (A3-1), and a thermal plasma flame in the plasma torch is used.
  • each process is the above-mentioned process A, process B (instead of a metal raw material powder containing a transition metal, using a raw material powder containing an atom A), and process C (substituting metal fine particles containing a transition metal)
  • process A instead of a metal raw material powder containing a transition metal, using a raw material powder containing an atom A
  • process C substituted metal fine particles containing a transition metal
  • atomized atom A is obtained.
  • the atom A is made into fine particles, and the atom A is easily evaporated in the process E.
  • the impurities (metal components other than the atom A) contained in the raw material powder containing the atom A can be removed through the above steps.
  • Step A A step of supplying an inert gas not containing nitrogen gas as a plasma gas in the plasma torch to generate a thermal plasma flame.
  • Step B A step of supplying a metal raw material powder containing a transition metal to a thermal plasma flame in the plasma torch and evaporating the raw material metal powder to obtain a gas phase raw material metal.
  • Step C A step of cooling the gas phase raw material metal to obtain fine metal particles containing a transition metal.
  • -Process G The process of classifying the obtained particle
  • Step A3-1 A step of supplying an inert gas containing no nitrogen gas into the plasma torch as a plasma gas to generate a thermal plasma flame.
  • Step A3-2 Atom A is added to the thermal plasma flame in the plasma torch.
  • Step A2 A step of mixing atoms A (in this case, atomized atoms A) with a metal raw material powder (in this case, metal fine particles) containing a transition metal.
  • Step D A step of supplying an inert gas containing nitrogen gas into the plasma torch as a plasma gas to generate a thermal plasma flame.
  • Step E A step of supplying metal fine particles containing a transition metal to a thermal plasma flame in a plasma torch and evaporating the metal fine particles to obtain a gas phase raw material metal.
  • Step F Step of cooling the gas phase raw material metal to obtain metal nitride-containing particles.
  • -Process G The process of classifying the obtained particle
  • Step H Step of exposing the metal nitride-containing particles obtained in Step G to a mixed atmosphere of water vapor and nitrogen gas to perform nitriding treatment.
  • steps A to C and steps A3-1 to A3-3 may be changed. That is, steps A to C may be performed after steps A3-1 to A3-3.
  • the metal raw material powder and the metal nitride that can remove impurities contained in the raw material particles and have a desired average primary particle diameter Containing particles can be produced.
  • the mechanism by which impurities are removed is not necessarily clear, but the present inventor speculates as follows. That is, the transition metal and / or atom A is ionized by plasma treatment, and when the ions are cooled, the transition metal, atom A, and impurities are presumed to be finely divided to reflect their melting points. The At this time, the atomization with a low melting point is fast, and the atomization with a high melting point is slow.
  • the fine particles (steps B and C and steps A3-2 and A3-3) once plasma-treated are likely to become a single component (single crystal).
  • the impurity particles can be removed depending on the density and / or particle size difference between the transition metal particles and / or the atom A particles and the impurity particles.
  • the said classification can be performed by setting a classification condition suitably using a cyclone etc., for example.
  • metal raw material powder containing transition metal hereinafter simply referred to as “metal raw material powder”
  • raw material powder containing atom A hereinafter simply referred to as “raw material powder”
  • metal raw material powder As the metal raw material powder containing transition metal (hereinafter simply referred to as “metal raw material powder”) and the raw material powder containing atom A (hereinafter simply referred to as “raw material powder”) that can be used in the above-mentioned step B, although it does not restrict
  • the content of the transition metal in the metal raw material powder is not particularly limited, but is preferably 99.99% or more, and more preferably 99.999% or more. The same applies to the content of atom A in the raw material powder.
  • the metal raw material powder and / or the raw material powder may contain a desired transition metal and / or an atom other than the atom A as an impurity.
  • impurities contained in the metal raw material powder include boron, aluminum, silicon, manganese, iron, nickel, and silver.
  • a metal element etc. are mentioned as an impurity contained in raw material powder.
  • the composition exhibits the effects of the present invention by setting the content of atom A in the metal nitride-containing particles to 0.00005 to 10% by mass. For this reason, if the metal raw material powder and / or the raw material powder includes the unintended impurities, it is difficult to control the content of the atoms A within a predetermined range, and thus it is difficult to obtain the effects of the present invention. Therefore, the method for producing metal nitride-containing particles may further include the following step A0 before step B (when step A2 is included, before step A2). Step A0: A step of removing impurities from the metal raw material powder and / or the raw material powder.
  • step A0 the raw metal powder and / or the method for removing impurities from the raw material powder (separation and purification method) is not particularly limited. A method similar to this can be used for other raw metal powders and / or raw material powders.
  • the metal nitride-containing particles may be metal nitride-containing particles coated with an inorganic compound. That is, it may be a coated metal nitride-containing particle having metal nitride-containing particles and a coating layer formed using an inorganic compound that coats the metal nitride-containing particles.
  • the composition containing metal nitride-containing particles coated with an inorganic compound has better dispersion stability.
  • the inorganic compound is not particularly limited, and is an oxide such as SiO 2 , ZrO 2 , TiO 2 , GeO 2 , Al 2 O 3 , Y 2 O 3 , and P 2 O 5 , aluminum hydroxide, and zirconium hydroxide. And the like.
  • aluminum hydroxide is preferable in that it can easily form a thinner film and can easily form a film having a higher coverage.
  • silicon oxide is preferable as the low refractive index film
  • zirconium hydroxide is preferable as the high refractive index film.
  • the method for coating the metal nitride-containing particles with the inorganic compound is not particularly limited, but the method for producing the metal nitride-containing particles preferably includes the following inorganic compound coating step.
  • An inorganic compound coating process is a process of coat
  • the metal nitride-containing particles are mixed with water to prepare a slurry.
  • the slurry is reacted with a water-soluble compound (for example, sodium silicate) containing at least one selected from the group consisting of Si, Zr, Ti, Ge, Al, Y, and P, and an excess amount.
  • a water-soluble compound for example, sodium silicate
  • alkali ions are removed by decantation and / or ion exchange resin or the like, the slurry is dried to obtain metal nitride-containing particles coated with oxide.
  • the above metal nitride-containing particles are mixed with an organic solvent such as alcohol to prepare a slurry.
  • an organometallic compound such as an alkoxide containing at least one selected from the group consisting of Si, Zr, Ti, Ge, Al, Y, and P is generated in the slurry, and the slurry is heated at a high temperature. Bake. When the slurry is fired at a high temperature, a sol-gel reaction proceeds, and metal nitride-containing particles coated with an oxide are obtained.
  • a slurry containing an ionic liquid is formed using urea and aluminum chloride in the presence of metal nitride-containing particles.
  • the metal nitride-containing particles are taken out from the slurry and dried, and then the metal nitride-containing particles are fired to obtain metal nitride-containing particles coated with a hydroxide containing aluminum hydroxide.
  • the conductivity of the metal nitride-containing particles is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 ⁇ 10 4 to 600 ⁇ 10 4 S / m, more preferably 165 ⁇ 10 4 to 340 ⁇ 10 4 S / m, and 165 ⁇ 10 4 S / m to 220 ⁇ 10 4 S / m is more preferable, and 170 to 190 ⁇ 10 4 S / m is particularly preferable.
  • the composition containing the metal nitride-containing particles is obtained.
  • the cured film to be obtained has a better light-shielding property and an excellent electrode anticorrosive property.
  • the term “conductivity” means the conductivity measured by the following method using a powder resistance measurement system MCP-PD51 manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Analytech.
  • the average primary particle diameter of the metal nitride-containing particles is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 to 50 nm, more preferably 10 to 30 nm, and still more preferably 10 to 27 nm.
  • the average primary particle size is 27 nm or less, in the composition containing the metal nitride-containing particles, the metal nitride-containing particles are less likely to settle, and as a result, the composition has better temporal stability.
  • the average primary particle diameter intends the average particle diameter of primary particles, and the average primary particle diameter intends the average primary particle diameter measured by the following method.
  • a dispersion (25% by mass of metal nitride-containing particles, 7.5% by mass of dispersant, PGMEA; 67.5% by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate solvent) was prepared by the method described in the following examples, and obtained.
  • the dispersion obtained was diluted 100 times with PGMEA and then dropped on a carbon foil and dried.
  • a dispersant that can disperse the metal nitride-containing particles to the extent that the primary particles of the metal nitride-containing particles can be recognized in an image obtained by the following method is used.
  • Specific examples of the dispersant include the dispersants described in Examples.
  • the primary particles are independent particles without aggregation.
  • the sample is observed at a magnification of 20,000 using a transmission electron microscope (TEM) to obtain an image.
  • Primary particles are selected from the metal nitride-containing particles in the obtained image, and the area of the primary particles is calculated by image processing. Next, the diameter when the obtained area is converted into a circle is calculated. This operation is performed for a total of 400 primary particles of metal nitride-containing particles for 4 fields of view, and the evaluated circle-equivalent diameter is arithmetically averaged to obtain the average primary particle size of the metal nitride-containing particles.
  • the composition preferably contains a solvent.
  • the solvent include water and organic solvents.
  • the said composition contains the organic solvent.
  • Organic solvent is not particularly limited.
  • acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexane, ethylene dichloride, tetrahydrofuran, toluene ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether.
  • Acetylacetone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, diacetone alcohol ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol ethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monoisopropyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, 3-methoxypropanol, methoxymethoxyethanol, diethyleneglycol Monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxypropyl acetate, N, N-dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, ⁇ -butyrolactone, acetic acid Examples include ethyl, butyl acetate, methyl lactate, and ethyl lactate.
  • the composition may contain one kind of organic solvent or two or more kinds of organic solvents, but the particle size variation of the metal nitride-containing particles may be changed during the preparation of the composition. From the viewpoint that it can be suppressed, it is preferable to contain two or more organic solvents.
  • the above-mentioned methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, -It is preferably composed of two or more selected from the group consisting of heptanone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate.
  • the content of the organic solvent is preferably 10 to 90% by mass, more preferably 60 to 90% by mass with respect to the total mass of the composition.
  • the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • the composition may contain water. Water may be intentionally added, or may be inevitably contained in the composition by adding each component contained in the composition.
  • the water content is preferably 0.01% by mass or more, more preferably 0.05% by mass or more, and further preferably 0.1% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the composition. Preferably, it is 1% by mass or less, more preferably 0.8% by mass or less, and further preferably 0.7% by mass or less.
  • the solid content of the composition is preferably 10 to 40% by mass.
  • the number of particles contained in the composition tends to be smaller.
  • the solid content of the composition is not less than the lower limit value, the composition has more excellent coating properties.
  • the content of the metal nitride-containing particles is preferably 20 to 70% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
  • the content of the metal nitride-containing particles is at least the lower limit value, the composition has more excellent temporal stability.
  • the content of the metal nitride-containing particles is not more than the upper limit value, the number of particles contained in the composition is likely to be smaller, and a composition capable of producing a cured film having more excellent resolution Is obtained.
  • the composition preferably contains a dispersant.
  • a dispersing agent contributes to the improvement of dispersibility of black pigments, such as the above-mentioned metal nitride content particles.
  • the dispersant and the binder resin described later are different components.
  • the dispersant for example, a known pigment dispersant can be appropriately selected and used. Of these, polymer compounds are preferable.
  • dispersant examples include polymer dispersants [for example, polyamidoamine and its salt, polycarboxylic acid and its salt, high molecular weight unsaturated acid ester, modified polyurethane, modified polyester, modified poly (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic type Copolymer, naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin condensate], polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate ester, polyoxyethylene alkyl amine, and pigment derivatives.
  • the polymer compounds can be further classified into linear polymers, terminal-modified polymers, graft polymers, and block polymers based on their structures.
  • the polymer compound is adsorbed on the surface of a dispersion of a black pigment, which is a preferred embodiment of the metal nitride-containing particles, and a pigment or the like to be used in combination (hereinafter also simply referred to as “black pigment etc.”). It acts to prevent re-aggregation. Therefore, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, and a block polymer containing an anchor site to the pigment surface are preferable. On the other hand, the adsorptivity of the polymer compound to the metal nitride-containing particles can be promoted by modifying the surface of the metal nitride-containing particles.
  • the polymer compound preferably contains a structural unit containing a graft chain.
  • structural unit is synonymous with “repeating unit”. Since the polymer compound containing a structural unit containing such a graft chain has an affinity for a solvent by the graft chain, the dispersibility of a colored pigment such as a black pigment, and the dispersion stability after aging ( It has excellent stability over time. Further, due to the presence of the graft chain, the polymer compound containing the structural unit containing the graft chain has an affinity with a polymerizable compound or other resin that can be used in combination. As a result, it becomes difficult to produce a residue by alkali development.
  • the graft chain When the graft chain becomes longer, the steric repulsion effect becomes higher and the dispersibility of the black pigment and the like is improved. On the other hand, if the graft chain is too long, the adsorptive power to colored pigments such as black pigments is lowered, and the dispersibility of black pigments and the like tends to be lowered.
  • the graft chain preferably has 40 to 10,000 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms, more preferably 50 to 2000 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms, and the number of atoms excluding hydrogen atoms. More preferred is 60-500.
  • the graft chain means from the base of the main chain of the copolymer (the atom bonded to the main chain in a group branched from the main chain) to the end of the group branched from the main chain.
  • the graft chain preferably contains a polymer structure.
  • a polymer structure include a poly (meth) acrylate structure (for example, a poly (meth) acrylic structure), a polyester structure, a polyurethane structure, a polyurea structure, and a polyamide.
  • examples thereof include a structure and a polyether structure.
  • the graft chain was selected from the group consisting of a polyester structure, a polyether structure and a poly (meth) acrylate structure in order to improve the interaction between the graft chain and the solvent, thereby increasing the dispersibility of the black pigment and the like.
  • a graft chain containing at least one kind is preferred, and a graft chain containing at least one of a polyester structure or a polyether structure is more preferred.
  • the macromonomer containing such a graft chain is not particularly limited, but a macromonomer containing a reactive double bond group can be preferably used.
  • AA-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AA-10 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AB-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AS-6 ( Trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AN-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), Bremer PME-4000 (trade name, manufactured by NOF Corporation) and the like are used.
  • the dispersing agent preferably contains at least one structure selected from the group consisting of polymethyl acrylate, polymethyl methacrylate, and cyclic or chain polyester. More preferably, the dispersant contains at least one structure selected from the group consisting of polymethyl acrylate, polymethyl methacrylate, and chain polyester. More preferably, the dispersant contains at least one structure selected from the group consisting of polymethyl acrylate, polymethyl methacrylate, polycaprolactone, and polyvalerolactone.
  • the dispersing agent may contain the above structure alone in one dispersing agent, or may contain a plurality of these structures in one dispersing agent.
  • the polycaprolactone structure means a structure containing a ring-opened structure of ⁇ -caprolactone as a repeating unit.
  • the polyvalerolactone structure means a structure containing a ring-opened structure of ⁇ -valerolactone as a repeating unit.
  • Specific examples of the dispersant containing a polycaprolactone structure include those in which j and k are 5 in the following formula (1) and the following formula (2).
  • Specific examples of the dispersant containing a polyvalerolactone structure include those in which j and k in the following formula (1) and the following formula (2) are 4.
  • dispersant containing a polymethyl acrylate structure examples include those in which X 5 in the following formula (4) is a hydrogen atom and R 4 is a methyl group. Further, specific examples of the dispersant containing a polymethyl methacrylate structure include those in which X 5 in the following formula (4) is a methyl group and R 4 is a methyl group.
  • the polymer compound preferably contains a structural unit represented by any one of the following formulas (1) to (4) as a structural unit containing a graft chain. ), A structural unit represented by any one of the following formula (3A), the following formula (3B), and the following (4).
  • W 1 , W 2 , W 3 , and W 4 each independently represent an oxygen atom or NH.
  • W 1 , W 2 , W 3 , and W 4 are preferably oxygen atoms.
  • X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , X 4 , and X 5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
  • X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , X 4 , and X 5 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms (the number of carbon atoms) from the viewpoint of synthesis constraints.
  • Y 1 , Y 2 , Y 3 , and Y 4 each independently represent a divalent linking group, and the linking group is not particularly limited in structure.
  • Specific examples of the divalent linking group represented by Y 1 , Y 2 , Y 3 , and Y 4 include the following (Y-1) to (Y-21) linking groups. .
  • a and B each represent a binding site. Of the structures shown below, (Y-2) or (Y-13) is more preferable from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis.
  • Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , and Z 4 each independently represent a monovalent organic group.
  • the structure of the organic group is not particularly limited. Specifically, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, a heteroarylthioether group, an amino group, and the like Is mentioned.
  • the organic group represented by Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , and Z 4 those containing a steric repulsion effect are particularly preferable from the viewpoint of improving dispersibility, and each independently has 5 carbon atoms.
  • a 24 alkyl group or an alkoxy group is preferable, and among them, a branched alkyl group having 5 to 24 carbon atoms, a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 24 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 5 to 24 carbon atoms is particularly preferable.
  • the alkyl group contained in the alkoxy group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
  • n, m, p, and q are each independently an integer of 1 to 500.
  • j and k each independently represent an integer of 2 to 8.
  • J and k in the formulas (1) and (2) are preferably integers of 4 to 6, and most preferably 5, from the viewpoint of the temporal stability and developability of the composition.
  • R 3 represents a branched or straight chain alkylene group, preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms. When p is 2 to 500, a plurality of R 3 may be the same or different from each other.
  • R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and the monovalent organic group is not particularly limited in terms of structure.
  • R 4 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • the alkyl group is preferably a linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms, A linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a linear alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is still more preferable.
  • a plurality of X 5 and R 4 present in the graft copolymer may be the same or different from each other.
  • the polymer compound can contain structural units containing graft chains that differ in two or more structures. That is, the polymer compound molecule may contain structural units represented by formulas (1) to (4) having different structures, and n, m in formulas (1) to (4). , P, and q each represent an integer of 2 or more, in formula (1) and formula (2), j and k may contain structures different from each other in the side chain. In the formula (4), a plurality of R 3 , R 4 and X 5 present in the molecule may be the same or different from each other.
  • the structural unit represented by the formula (1) is more preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula (1A) from the viewpoint of temporal stability and developability of the composition.
  • a structural unit represented by Formula (2) it is more preferable that it is a structural unit represented by following formula (2A) from a viewpoint of temporal stability of a composition and developability.
  • X 1, Y 1, Z 1 and n are as defined X 1, Y 1, Z 1 and n in Formula (1), and preferred ranges are also the same.
  • X 2, Y 2, Z 2 and m are as defined X 2, Y 2, Z 2 and m in the formula (2), and preferred ranges are also the same.
  • the structural unit represented by the formula (3) is more preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula (3A) or formula (3B) from the viewpoint of the temporal stability and developability of the composition. .
  • X 3, Y 3, Z 3 and p are as defined X 3, Y 3, Z 3 and p in formula (3), and preferred ranges are also the same.
  • the polymer compound contains a structural unit represented by the formula (1A) as a structural unit containing a graft chain.
  • the structural unit containing a graft chain (for example, the structural unit represented by the above formulas (1) to (4)) is 2 to 90% in terms of mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer compound. Preferably, it is contained in the range of 5 to 30%.
  • the structural unit containing a graft chain is included within this range, the dispersibility of the black pigment is high, and the developability when forming a cured film is good.
  • the polymer compound preferably contains a hydrophobic structural unit that is different from the structural unit containing the graft chain (that is, does not correspond to the structural unit containing the graft chain).
  • a hydrophobic structural unit is a structural unit which does not have an acid group (for example, a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, etc.).
  • the hydrophobic structural unit is preferably a structural unit derived from (corresponding to) a compound (monomer) having a ClogP value of 1.2 or more, more preferably derived from a compound having a ClogP value of 1.2 to 8. A structural unit. Thereby, the effect of this invention can be expressed more reliably.
  • ClogP values are available from Daylight Chemical Information System, Inc. It is a value calculated by the program “CLOGP” available from This program provides the value of “computation logP” calculated by Hansch, Leo's fragment approach (see below). The fragment approach is based on the chemical structure of a compound, which divides the chemical structure into substructures (fragments) and estimates the logP value of the compound by summing the logP contributions assigned to that fragment. Details thereof are described in the following documents. In the present invention, the ClogP value calculated by the program CLOGP v4.82 is used. A. J. et al. Leo, Comprehensive Medicinal Chemistry, Vol. 4, C.I. Hansch, P.A. G. Sammunens, J. et al. B.
  • log P means the common logarithm of the partition coefficient P (Partition Coefficient), and quantitatively determines how an organic compound is distributed in the equilibrium of a two-phase system of oil (generally 1-octanol) and water. It is a physical property value expressed as a numerical value, and is represented by the following formula.
  • logP log (Coil / Cwater)
  • Coil represents the molar concentration of the compound in the oil phase
  • Cwater represents the molar concentration of the compound in the aqueous phase.
  • the polymer compound preferably contains one or more structural units selected from structural units derived from monomers represented by the following general formulas (i) to (iii) as hydrophobic structural units.
  • R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, etc.), or a carbon number of 1 Represents an alkyl group of ⁇ 6 (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, etc.).
  • R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • R 2 and R 3 are more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • X represents an oxygen atom (—O—) or an imino group (—NH—), and is preferably an oxygen atom.
  • L is a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • a divalent aliphatic group for example, alkylene group, substituted alkylene group, alkenylene group, substituted alkenylene group, alkynylene group, substituted alkynylene group
  • divalent aromatic group for example, arylene group
  • Substituted arylene group divalent heterocyclic group, oxygen atom (—O—), sulfur atom (—S—), imino group (—NH—), substituted imino group (—NR 31 —, where R 31 Includes an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or a heterocyclic group), a carbonyl group (—CO—), and combinations thereof.
  • the divalent aliphatic group may have a cyclic structure or a branched structure.
  • the aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the aliphatic group may be an unsaturated aliphatic group or a saturated aliphatic group, but is preferably a saturated aliphatic group.
  • the aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aromatic group and a heterocyclic group.
  • the carbon number of the divalent aromatic group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 15, and still more preferably 6 to 10.
  • the aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the divalent heterocyclic group preferably contains a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring as the heterocyclic ring.
  • Another heterocyclic ring, an aliphatic ring or an aromatic ring may be condensed with the heterocyclic ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of substituents include halogen atoms, hydroxy groups, oxo groups ( ⁇ O), thioxo groups ( ⁇ S), imino groups ( ⁇ NH), substituted imino groups ( ⁇ N—R 32 , where R 32 is a fatty acid Aromatic group, aromatic group or heterocyclic group), aliphatic group, aromatic group, or heterocyclic group.
  • L is preferably a single bond, an alkylene group or a divalent linking group containing an oxyalkylene structure.
  • the oxyalkylene structure is more preferably an oxyethylene structure or an oxypropylene structure.
  • L may also contain a polyoxyalkylene structure containing two or more oxyalkylene structures.
  • the polyoxyalkylene structure is preferably a polyoxyethylene structure or a polyoxypropylene structure.
  • the polyoxyethylene structure is represented by — (OCH 2 CH 2 ) n—, where n is preferably an integer of 2 or more, and more preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
  • Z is an aliphatic group (eg, alkyl group, substituted alkyl group, unsaturated alkyl group, substituted unsaturated alkyl group), aromatic group (eg, aryl group, substituted aryl group, arylene group, substituted arylene group). , A heterocyclic group, or a combination thereof. These groups include an oxygen atom (—O—), a sulfur atom (—S—), an imino group (—NH—), a substituted imino group (—NR 31 —, wherein R 31 is an aliphatic group, an aromatic group Group or heterocyclic group) or a carbonyl group (—CO—) may be contained.
  • the aliphatic group may have a cyclic structure or a branched structure.
  • the aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the aliphatic group further includes a ring assembly hydrocarbon group and a bridged cyclic hydrocarbon group. Examples of the ring assembly hydrocarbon group include a bicyclohexyl group, a perhydronaphthalenyl group, a biphenyl group, and 4-cyclohexyl. A phenyl group and the like are included.
  • bridged cyclic hydrocarbon ring examples include 2 such as pinane, bornane, norpinane, norbornane, bicyclooctane ring (bicyclo [2.2.2] octane ring, bicyclo [3.2.1] octane ring, etc.).
  • Tricyclic hydrocarbon rings such as cyclic hydrocarbon rings, homobredan, adamantane, tricyclo [5.2.1.0 2,6 ] decane, and tricyclo [4.3.1.1 2,5 ] undecane rings , And tetracyclo [4.4.0.1 2,5 .
  • the bridged cyclic hydrocarbon ring includes a condensed cyclic hydrocarbon ring, such as perhydronaphthalene (decalin), perhydroanthracene, perhydrophenanthrene, perhydroacenaphthene, perhydrofluorene, perhydroindene, and A condensed ring in which a plurality of 5- to 8-membered cycloalkane rings are condensed, such as a perhydrophenalene ring, is also included.
  • a condensed cyclic hydrocarbon ring such as perhydronaphthalene (decalin), perhydroanthracene, perhydrophenanthrene, perhydroacenaphthene, perhydrofluorene, perhydroindene, and A condensed ring in which a plurality of 5- to 8-membered cycloalkane rings are condensed, such as a perhydrophenalene ring, is also included.
  • the aliphatic group is preferably a saturated aliphatic group rather than an unsaturated aliphatic group. Further, the aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group. However, the aliphatic group does not have an acid group as a substituent.
  • the carbon number of the aromatic group is preferably 6-20, more preferably 6-15, and still more preferably 6-10.
  • the aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group. However, the aromatic group does not have an acid group as a substituent.
  • a heterocyclic group contains a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring as a heterocyclic ring.
  • Another heterocyclic ring, an aliphatic ring or an aromatic ring may be condensed with the heterocyclic ring.
  • the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of substituents include halogen atoms, hydroxy groups, oxo groups ( ⁇ O), thioxo groups ( ⁇ S), imino groups ( ⁇ NH), substituted imino groups ( ⁇ N—R 32 , where R 32 is a fatty acid Aromatic group, aromatic group or heterocyclic group), aliphatic group, aromatic group and heterocyclic group.
  • the heterocyclic group does not have an acid group as a substituent.
  • R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (eg, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, etc.), or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
  • a halogen atom eg, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, etc.
  • an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms for example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, etc.
  • Z or LZ.
  • L and Z are as defined above.
  • R 4 , R 5 and R 6 are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and L is a single bond or an alkylene group or an oxyalkylene structure.
  • a compound in which X is an oxygen atom or an imino group, and Z is an aliphatic group, a heterocyclic group or an aromatic group is preferable.
  • R 1 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • L is an alkylene group
  • Z is an aliphatic group, a heterocyclic group or an aromatic group. Is preferred.
  • R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and Z is an aliphatic group, a heterocyclic group, or an aromatic group. Certain compounds are preferred.
  • Examples of typical compounds represented by formulas (i) to (iii) include radically polymerizable compounds selected from acrylic acid esters, methacrylic acid esters, styrenes, and the like.
  • Examples of typical compounds represented by formulas (i) to (iii) compounds described in paragraphs 0089 to 0093 of JP2013-249417A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are described in the present specification. Incorporated into.
  • the hydrophobic structural unit is preferably contained in a range of 10 to 90%, more preferably in a range of 20 to 80% with respect to the total mass of the polymer compound in terms of mass. When the content is in the above range, sufficient pattern formation can be obtained.
  • the polymer compound can introduce a functional group capable of forming an interaction with a colored pigment such as a black pigment.
  • the polymer compound preferably further contains a structural unit containing a functional group capable of interacting with a colored pigment such as a black pigment.
  • the functional group capable of forming an interaction with the colored pigment such as the black pigment include an acid group, a basic group, a coordination group, and a reactive functional group.
  • the polymer compound contains an acid group, a basic group, a coordination group, or a reactive functional group, the structural unit containing an acid group, the structural unit containing a basic group, and a coordination group, respectively.
  • a structural unit containing a coordinate group or a structural unit having reactivity it is preferable to contain a structural unit containing a coordinate group or a structural unit having reactivity.
  • the polymer compound further contains an alkali-soluble group such as a carboxylic acid group as the acid group, developability for pattern formation by alkali development can be imparted to the polymer compound. That is, by introducing an alkali-soluble group into the polymer compound, in the composition, the polymer compound as a dispersant that contributes to the dispersion of a colored pigment such as a black pigment contains alkali-solubility.
  • a composition containing such a polymer compound has excellent light-shielding properties in the exposed area, and the alkali developability in the unexposed area is improved.
  • a high molecular compound contains the structural unit containing an acid group
  • a high molecular compound becomes easy to become compatible with a solvent, and there exists a tendency for applicability
  • the acid group in the structural unit containing an acid group easily interacts with a colored pigment such as a black pigment, and the polymer compound stably disperses the colored pigment such as a black pigment, and the colored pigment such as a black pigment. It is presumed that the viscosity of the polymer compound in which the polymer is dispersed is low, and the polymer compound itself is easily dispersed stably.
  • the structural unit containing an alkali-soluble group as an acid group may be the same structural unit as the structural unit containing the graft chain or a different structural unit.
  • the structural unit containing a soluble group is a structural unit different from the hydrophobic structural unit described above (that is, does not correspond to the hydrophobic structural unit described above).
  • the acid group that is a functional group capable of forming an interaction with a colored pigment such as a black pigment include a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, or a phenolic hydroxyl group, and preferably a carboxylic acid Group, sulfonic acid group, and at least one of phosphoric acid groups, and more preferable is that the adsorptive power to a colored pigment such as a black pigment is good and the dispersibility of the colored pigment is high, Carboxylic acid group. That is, the polymer compound preferably further contains a structural unit containing at least one of a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group.
  • the polymer compound may have one or more structural units containing an acid group.
  • the polymer compound may or may not contain a structural unit containing an acid group. However, when it is contained, the content of the structural unit containing an acid group is calculated by mass conversion to the total mass of the polymer compound. On the other hand, it is preferably 5 to 80%, and more preferably 10 to 60% from the viewpoint of suppressing damage of image strength due to alkali development.
  • Examples of the basic group that is a functional group capable of forming an interaction with a colored pigment such as a black pigment include a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, a tertiary amino group, and a heterocyclic ring containing an N atom. And an amide group, and the preferred is a tertiary amino group from the viewpoint of good adsorbing power to a colored pigment such as a black pigment and high dispersibility of the colored pigment.
  • the polymer compound can contain one or more of these basic groups.
  • the polymer compound may or may not contain a structural unit containing a basic group, but when it is contained, the content of the structural unit containing a basic group is the total amount of the polymer compound in terms of mass. Preferably it is 0.01% or more and 50% or less with respect to mass, More preferably, it is 0.01% or more and 30% or less from a viewpoint of developability inhibition suppression.
  • a coordinating group that is a functional group capable of forming an interaction with a colored pigment such as a black pigment, and a functional group having reactivity
  • a acetylacetoxy group for example, an acetylacetoxy group, a trialkoxysilyl group, an isocyanate group, an acid anhydride, And acid chloride etc. are mentioned.
  • a preferable one is an acetylacetoxy group in terms of good adsorbing power to a colored pigment such as a black pigment and high dispersibility of the colored pigment.
  • the polymer compound may have one or more of these groups.
  • the polymer compound may or may not contain a structural unit containing a coordinating group or a structural unit containing a reactive functional group, but if it contains, the content of these structural units Is preferably 10% or more and 80% or less, and more preferably 20% or more and 60% or less, in terms of mass, in terms of suppression of developability inhibition.
  • the polymer compound contains a functional group capable of interacting with a colored pigment such as a black pigment in addition to the graft chain
  • the functional group capable of interacting with a colored pigment such as the various black pigments described above.
  • the polymer compound is a monomer represented by the following general formulas (iv) to (vi). It is preferable to contain one or more structural units selected from the derived structural units.
  • R 11 , R 12 , and R 13 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (eg, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, etc.), or a carbon number Represents an alkyl group of 1 to 6 (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, etc.).
  • R 11 , R 12 and R 13 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, more preferably Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • R 12 and R 13 are each particularly preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • X 1 in the general formula (iv) represents an oxygen atom (—O—) or an imino group (—NH—), and is preferably an oxygen atom.
  • Y in the general formula (v) represents a methine group or a nitrogen atom.
  • L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include a divalent aliphatic group (for example, an alkylene group, a substituted alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a substituted alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, and a substituted alkynylene group), a divalent aromatic group (for example, , Arylene groups and substituted arylene groups), divalent heterocyclic groups, oxygen atoms (—O—), sulfur atoms (—S—), imino groups (—NH—), substituted imino bonds (—NR 31 ′ —
  • R 31 ′ includes an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or a heterocyclic group), a carbonyl bond (—CO—), and combinations thereof.
  • the divalent aliphatic group may have a cyclic structure or a branched structure.
  • the aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the aliphatic group is preferably a saturated aliphatic group rather than an unsaturated aliphatic group.
  • the aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the carbon number of the divalent aromatic group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 15, and still more preferably 6 to 10.
  • the aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the divalent heterocyclic group preferably contains a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring as the heterocyclic ring.
  • One or more heterocycles, aliphatic rings or aromatic rings may be condensed with the heterocycle.
  • the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of substituents include halogen atoms, hydroxy groups, oxo groups ( ⁇ O), thioxo groups ( ⁇ S), imino groups ( ⁇ NH), substituted imino groups ( ⁇ N—R 32 , where R 32 is a fatty acid Aromatic group, aromatic group or heterocyclic group), aliphatic group, aromatic group and heterocyclic group.
  • L 1 is preferably a single bond, an alkylene group or a divalent linking group containing an oxyalkylene structure.
  • the oxyalkylene structure is more preferably an oxyethylene structure or an oxypropylene structure.
  • L 1 may contain a polyoxyalkylene structure containing two or more oxyalkylene structures.
  • the polyoxyalkylene structure is preferably a polyoxyethylene structure or a polyoxypropylene structure.
  • the polyoxyethylene structure is represented by — (OCH 2 CH 2 ) n—, where n is preferably an integer of 2 or more, and more preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
  • Z 1 represents a functional group capable of forming an interaction with a colored pigment such as a black pigment in addition to the graft chain, and includes a carboxylic acid group and a tertiary amino group. It is preferable that it is a carboxylic acid group.
  • R 14 , R 15 , and R 16 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (eg, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, etc.), or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, etc.), - Z 1, or an L 1 -Z 1.
  • L 1 and Z 1 are the same meaning as L 1 and Z 1 in the above, it is the preferable examples.
  • R 14 , R 15 and R 16 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • R 11 , R 12 , and R 13 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and L 1 contains an alkylene group or an oxyalkylene structure.
  • a compound in which X 1 is an oxygen atom or an imino group and Z 1 is a carboxylic acid group is preferable.
  • R 11 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • L 1 is an alkylene group
  • Z 1 is a carboxylic acid group
  • Y is methine. Compounds that are groups are preferred.
  • R 14 , R 15 , and R 16 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and L 1 is a single bond or an alkylene group, A compound in which Z 1 is a carboxylic acid group is preferred.
  • monomers represented by general formula (iv) to general formula (vi).
  • monomers include methacrylic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, a reaction containing a compound having an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule (for example, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate) and succinic anhydride.
  • reaction product a reaction product of a compound containing an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule with phthalic anhydride, a compound containing an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule and tetrahydroxyphthalic anhydride Reaction product, a reaction product of a compound containing an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule with trimellitic anhydride, a compound containing an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule and pyromellitic anhydride Reaction products with acrylic acid, acrylic acid dimer, acrylic acid oligomer, maleic acid, itaconic acid, fumaric acid, 4-vinylbenzoic acid, vinylphenol, and 4 Hydroxyphenyl methacrylamide.
  • the content of the structural unit containing a functional group capable of forming an interaction with a colored pigment such as a black pigment is from the viewpoint of interaction with the colored pigment such as a black pigment, stability over time, and permeability to a developer.
  • the amount is preferably 0.05% by mass to 90% by mass, more preferably 1.0% by mass to 80% by mass, and still more preferably 10% by mass to 70% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer compound.
  • the polymer compound is a coloring unit such as a structural unit containing a graft chain, a hydrophobic structural unit, and a black pigment, for the purpose of improving various performances such as image strength, as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
  • a coloring unit such as a structural unit containing a graft chain, a hydrophobic structural unit, and a black pigment
  • Different from structural units containing functional groups capable of forming interactions with other structural units having various functions for example, structures containing functional groups having affinity with the dispersion medium used in the dispersion) (Unit) may further be included.
  • Examples of such other structural units include structural units derived from radically polymerizable compounds selected from acrylonitriles, methacrylonitriles, and the like.
  • the polymer compound may use one or more of these other structural units, and the content thereof is preferably 0% or more and 80% or less in terms of mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer compound. Especially preferably, it is 10% or more and 60% or less. When the content is in the above range, sufficient pattern formability is maintained.
  • the acid value of the polymer compound is preferably in the range of 0 mgKOH / g to 160 mgKOH / g, more preferably in the range of 10 mgKOH / g to 140 mgKOH / g, and still more preferably in the range of 20 mgKOH / g to 120 mgKOH / g.
  • the range is as follows. When the acid value of the polymer compound is 160 mgKOH / g or less, pattern peeling during development when forming a cured film is more effectively suppressed. Moreover, if the acid value of a high molecular compound is 10 mgKOH / g or more, alkali developability will become more favorable.
  • the acid value of the polymer compound is 20 mgKOH / g or more, precipitation of colored pigments such as black pigments can be further suppressed, the number of coarse particles can be reduced, and the temporal stability of the composition is further improved. it can.
  • the acid value of the polymer compound can be calculated, for example, from the average content of acid groups in the polymer compound. Moreover, the resin which has a desired acid value can be obtained by changing content of the structural unit containing the acid group which is a structural component of a high molecular compound.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer compound is 4 in terms of polystyrene converted by GPC (Gel Permeation Chromatography) method from the viewpoint of pattern peeling inhibition during development and developability. It is preferably 000 or more and 300,000 or less, more preferably 5,000 or more and 200,000 or less, further preferably 6,000 or more and 100,000 or less, and 10,000 or more and 50,000 or less.
  • the GPC method is based on a method using HLC-8020GPC (manufactured by Tosoh), TSKgel SuperHZM-H, TSKgel SuperHZ4000, TSKgel SuperHZ2000 (manufactured by Tosoh, 4.6 mm ID ⁇ 15 cm) as a column and THF (tetrahydrofuran) as an eluent. .
  • the polymer compound can be synthesized based on a known method, and examples of the solvent used when synthesizing the polymer compound include ethylene dichloride, cyclohexanone, methyl ethyl ketone, acetone, methanol, ethanol, propanol, butanol, and ethylene glycol monomethyl.
  • Ether ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, 2-methoxyethyl acetate, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, toluene,
  • Examples include ethyl acetate, methyl lactate, and ethyl lactate. These solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • polymer compound examples include “DA-7301” manufactured by Kashiwagi Kasei Co., Ltd., “Disperbyk-101 (polyamideamine phosphate), 107 (carboxylic acid ester)” manufactured by BYK Chemie, and 110 (copolymers containing acid groups).
  • Acrybase FFS-6752, Acrybase FFS-187, Acrycure-RD-F8, and Cyclomer P can be used.
  • Commercially available amphoteric resins include, for example, DISPERBYK-130, DISPERBYK-140, DISPERBYK-142, DISPERBYK-145, DISPERBYK-180, DISPERBYK-187, DISPERBYK-191, DISPERBYK-2001, DISPERB manufactured by BYK Chemie. 2010, DISPERBYK-2012, DISPERBYK-2025, BYK-9976, Ajisper PB821, Azisper PB822, Azisper PB881, etc. manufactured by Ajinomoto Fine Techno Co., Ltd. These polymer compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • polymer compound As specific examples of the polymer compound, reference can be made to the polymer compounds described in paragraphs 0127 to 0129 of JP2013-249417A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • graft copolymers described in JP-A 2010-106268, paragraphs 0037 to 0115 (corresponding to columns 0075 to 0133 in US2011 / 0124824) can be used. Is incorporated herein by reference. In addition to the above, it contains a side chain structure in which acidic groups in paragraphs 0028 to 0084 of JP 2011-153283 A (corresponding to paragraphs 0075 to 0133 of US2011 / 0279759) are bonded via a linking group. High molecular compounds containing the constituents to be used can be used, the contents of which can be incorporated and incorporated herein.
  • the content of the dispersant is preferably from 0.1 to 50% by mass, more preferably from 0.5 to 30% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
  • a dispersing agent may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used together 2 or more types. When using 2 or more types together, it is preferable that a total amount becomes the said range.
  • the mass ratio of the dispersant to the metal nitride-containing particles is preferably 0.05 to 0.30, more preferably 0.10 to 0.30, and still more preferably 0.12 to 0.30.
  • the D / P is 0.30 or less, the cured film formed from the composition has more excellent resolution.
  • the D / P is 0.05 or more, the composition has more excellent temporal stability.
  • the lower limit value of the mass ratio of the dispersant to the atom A (that is, (content of dispersant in the composition) / (content of Fe atom in the composition)) is 0.8.
  • the above is preferable, 1.0 or more is more preferable, and 1.5 or more is more preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 270 or less, more preferably 150 or less, and even more preferably 50 or less.
  • the said composition has the effect of this invention more excellent because the mass ratio of the dispersing agent with respect to the atom A exists in the said range. In particular, when the mass ratio is in the range of 1.5 to 50, the composition has a further excellent effect of the present invention. The reason for this is not clear, but it is considered that the atom A in the composition and the dispersing agent interact with each other and affect patterning properties (curability and resolution).
  • the lower limit of the mass ratio of the following polymerizable compound to the atom A (that is, (content of polymerizable compound in the composition) / (content of atom A in the composition)) is 0. 0.7 or more, preferably 0.85 or more, and more preferably 1.0 or more.
  • the upper limit is preferably 50 or less, more preferably 11 or less, and even more preferably 7.0 or less.
  • a composition has the effect of this invention more excellent because the mass ratio of the polymeric compound with respect to the atom A exists in the said range.
  • the content ratio is in the range of 1.0 to 7.0, the composition has a further excellent effect of the present invention. The reason for this is not clear, but it is considered that the atom A in the composition and the polymerizable compound interact with each other and affect the patternability (curability and resolution).
  • the composition preferably contains a binder resin.
  • a binder resin a linear organic polymer is preferably used.
  • a linear organic polymer a well-known thing can be used arbitrarily.
  • a linear organic polymer that is soluble or swellable in water or weak alkaline water is selected to enable water development or weak alkaline water development.
  • alkali-soluble resin resin containing group which accelerates
  • the binder resin is a linear organic polymer that promotes at least one alkali solubility in the molecule (preferably a molecule having a (meth) acrylic copolymer or styrene copolymer as the main chain). It can be suitably selected from alkali-soluble resins containing a group to be used.
  • polyhydroxystyrene resins, polysiloxane resins, (meth) acrylic resins, (meth) acrylamide resins, (meth) acrylic / (meth) acrylamide copolymer resins, epoxy resins and Polyimide resins are preferred, and (meth) acrylic resins, (meth) acrylamide resins, (meth) acryl / (meth) acrylamide copolymer resins, or polyimide resins are more preferred from the viewpoint of control of developability.
  • Examples of the group that promotes alkali solubility include a carboxylic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group. Especially, what is soluble in an organic solvent and can be developed with a weak alkaline aqueous solution is preferable, and an alkali-soluble resin containing a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid is more preferable. These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • binder resin examples include a radical polymer containing a carboxylic acid group in the side chain.
  • the radical polymer containing a carboxylic acid group in the side chain include, for example, JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12777, JP-B-54-25957, JP-A-54-54. -92723, JP-A-59-53836, and JP-A-59-71048.
  • a resin obtained by singly or copolymerizing a monomer containing a carboxylic acid group, an acid anhydride obtained by singly or copolymerizing a monomer containing an acid anhydride examples thereof include resins obtained by hydrolysis, half-esterification or half-amidation of units, and epoxy acrylates obtained by modifying epoxy resins with unsaturated monocarboxylic acids and acid anhydrides.
  • the monomer containing a carboxylic acid group include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, and 4-carboxylstyrene.
  • the acidic cellulose derivative which contains a carboxylic acid group in a side chain is also mentioned as an example.
  • the monomer containing an acid anhydride include maleic anhydride.
  • a polymer containing a hydroxyl group added to a polymer containing a hydroxyl group is useful.
  • acetal-modified polyvinyl alcohol-based binder resins containing acid groups are described in European Patent Nos. 993966, 1204000 and JP-A 2001-318463. An acetal-modified polyvinyl alcohol-based binder resin containing an acid group is suitable because of its excellent balance of film strength and developability.
  • polyvinyl pyrrolidone or polyethylene oxide is useful as the water-soluble linear organic polymer.
  • alcohol-soluble nylon and polyether which is a reaction product of 2,2-bis- (4-hydroxyphenyl) -propane and epichlorohydrin are also useful.
  • a polyimide resin described in International Publication No. 2008/123097 is also useful.
  • a known radical polymerization method can be applied.
  • Those skilled in the art can easily set the polymerization conditions such as temperature, pressure, the type and amount of the radical initiator, the type of solvent, and the like when producing the alkali-soluble resin by the radical polymerization method.
  • a polymer containing a structural unit containing a graft chain and a structural unit containing an acid group (alkali-soluble group) as the binder resin.
  • the definition of the structural unit containing the graft chain is synonymous with the structural unit containing the graft chain contained in the dispersant, and the preferred range is also the same.
  • the acid group include a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, or a phenolic hydroxyl group, and preferably at least one of a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group. More preferred is a carboxylic acid group.
  • the structural unit containing an acid group preferably contains at least one structural unit selected from structural units derived from monomers represented by the following general formulas (vii) to (ix). .
  • R 21 , R 22 , and R 23 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (eg, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, etc.), or a carbon number Represents an alkyl group of 1 to 6 (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, etc.).
  • R 21 , R 22 , and R 23 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and more preferably Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
  • R 21 and R 23 are each particularly preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • X 2 in the general formula (vii) represents an oxygen atom (—O—) or an imino group (—NH—), and is preferably an oxygen atom.
  • Y in the general formula (viii) represents a methine group or a nitrogen atom.
  • L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • the divalent linking group include a divalent aliphatic group (for example, an alkylene group, a substituted alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a substituted alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, and a substituted alkynylene group), a divalent aromatic group (for example, , Arylene group, and substituted arylene group), divalent heterocyclic group, oxygen atom (—O—), sulfur atom (—S—), imino group (—NH—), substituted imino bond (—NR 41 ′ —
  • R 41 ′ includes an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or a heterocyclic group), a carbonyl bond (—CO—), and combinations thereof.
  • the divalent aliphatic group may have a cyclic structure or a branched structure.
  • the aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the aliphatic group is preferably a saturated aliphatic group rather than an unsaturated aliphatic group.
  • the aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the carbon number of the divalent aromatic group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 15, and most preferably 6 to 10.
  • the aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • the divalent heterocyclic group preferably contains a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring as the heterocyclic ring.
  • One or more heterocycles, aliphatic rings or aromatic rings may be condensed with the heterocycle.
  • the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of substituents include halogen atoms, hydroxy groups, oxo groups ( ⁇ O), thioxo groups ( ⁇ S), imino groups ( ⁇ NH), substituted imino groups ( ⁇ N—R 42 , where R 42 represents a fatty acid Aromatic group, aromatic group or heterocyclic group), aliphatic group, aromatic group and heterocyclic group.
  • L 2 is preferably a single bond, an alkylene group or a divalent linking group containing an oxyalkylene structure.
  • the oxyalkylene structure is more preferably an oxyethylene structure or an oxypropylene structure.
  • L 2 may also contain a polyoxyalkylene structure containing two or more oxyalkylene structures.
  • the polyoxyalkylene structure is preferably a polyoxyethylene structure or a polyoxypropylene structure.
  • the polyoxyethylene structure is represented by — (OCH 2 CH 2 ) n—, where n is preferably an integer of 2 or more, and more preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
  • Z 2 is an acid group, preferably a carboxylic acid group.
  • R 24 , R 25 , and R 26 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (eg, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, etc.), an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, etc.), - represents a Z 2, or L 2 -Z 2.
  • L 2 and Z 2 has the same meaning as L 2 and Z 2 in the above, and preferred examples are also the same.
  • R 24 , R 25 and R 26 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • the composition preferably contains a polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably a compound containing at least one group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, more preferably a compound containing 2 or more, further preferably containing 3 or more, and containing 5 or more. Is particularly preferred.
  • the upper limit is 15 or less, for example.
  • Examples of the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
  • the polymerizable compound may be in any of chemical forms such as a monomer, a prepolymer, an oligomer, a mixture thereof, and a multimer thereof. Monomers are preferred.
  • the molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100 to 3000, and more preferably 250 to 1500.
  • the polymerizable compound is preferably a 3 to 15 functional (meth) acrylate compound, more preferably a 3 to 6 functional (meth) acrylate compound.
  • oligomer types can also be used.
  • NK ester A-TMMT penentaerythritol tetraacrylate, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • KAYARAD RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • Preferred embodiments of the polymerizable compound are shown below.
  • the polymerizable compound may have an acid group such as a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group.
  • an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid is preferable, and a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride is reacted with an unreacted hydroxy group of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound.
  • a polymerizable compound having an acid group is more preferable, and in this ester, the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol and / or dipentaerythritol. Examples of commercially available products include Aronix TO-2349, M-305, M-510, and M-520 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
  • the polymerizable compound is also preferably a compound containing a caprolactone structure.
  • the compound containing a caprolactone structure is not particularly limited as long as it contains a caprolactone structure in the molecule.
  • compounds containing a caprolactone structure represented by the following general formula (Z-1) are preferred.
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • m represents a number of 1 or 2
  • “*” represents a bond
  • R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, "*" indicates a bond.
  • polymerizable compound a compound represented by the following general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5) can also be used.
  • each E independently represents — ((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O) — or ((CH 2 ) y CH (CH 3 ) O) —.
  • Each represents independently an integer of 0 to 10
  • each X independently represents a (meth) acryloyl group, a hydrogen atom, or a carboxylic acid group.
  • the total of (meth) acryloyl groups is 3 or 4
  • each m independently represents an integer of 0 to 10
  • the total of each m is an integer of 0 to 40 .
  • the total number of (meth) acryloyl groups is 5 or 6
  • each n independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the total of each n is an integer of 0 to 60 .
  • m is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
  • the total of each m is preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 16, and further preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
  • n is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
  • the total of each n is preferably an integer of 3 to 60, more preferably an integer of 3 to 24, and still more preferably an integer of 6 to 12.
  • — ((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O) — or ((CH 2 ) y CH (CH 3 ) O) — represents an oxygen atom
  • a form in which the terminal on the side is bonded to X is preferred.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5) is a conventionally known process, which is a ring-opening addition of ethylene oxide or propylene oxide to pentaerythritol or dipentaerythritol. It can be synthesized from a step of bonding a ring-opening skeleton by a reaction and a step of introducing a (meth) acryloyl group by reacting, for example, (meth) acryloyl chloride with a terminal hydroxy group of the ring-opening skeleton. Each step is a well-known step, and a person skilled in the art can easily synthesize a compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5).
  • a pentaerythritol derivative and / or a dipentaerythritol derivative are more preferable.
  • Specific examples include compounds represented by the following formulas (a) to (f) (hereinafter also referred to as “exemplary compounds (a) to (f)”).
  • exemplary compounds (a), (f) b), (e) and (f) are preferred.
  • Examples of commercially available polymerizable compounds represented by the general formulas (Z-4) and (Z-5) include SR-494, a tetrafunctional acrylate containing four ethyleneoxy chains manufactured by Sartomer, Nippon Kayaku. Examples thereof include DPCA-60, which is a hexafunctional acrylate containing six pentyleneoxy chains, and TPA-330, which is a trifunctional acrylate containing three isobutyleneoxy chains.
  • Examples of the polymerizable compound include urethane acrylates described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, and JP-B-2-16765; Urethane compounds containing an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP-A-49860, JP-B-56-17654, JP-B-62-39417, and JP-B-62-39418 are also suitable.
  • urethane oligomers UAS-10, UAB-140 (Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd.), UA-7200 (Shin Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA- Examples thereof include 306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, and AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha).
  • the polymerizable compound preferably has an SP (Solubility Parameter) value of 9.50 or more, more preferably 10.40 or more, and still more preferably 10.60 or more.
  • SP Solubility Parameter
  • the SP value is determined by the Hoy method unless otherwise specified (HL Hoy Journal of Paining, 1970, Vol. 42, 76-118). The SP value is shown with the unit omitted, but the unit is cal 1/2 cm ⁇ 3/2 .
  • the composition preferably contains a polymerizable compound containing a cardo skeleton from the viewpoint of improving development residue.
  • a polymerizable compound containing a cardo skeleton a polymerizable compound containing a 9,9-bisarylfluorene skeleton is preferable, and a compound represented by the following formula (Q3) is more preferable.
  • X 1 to X 4 each independently represent a substituent containing a polymerizable group, and the carbon atom in the substituent may be substituted with a hetero atom.
  • the substituent containing a polymerizable group represented by X 1 to X 4 is not particularly limited, but is preferably an aliphatic group containing a polymerizable group.
  • the aliphatic group containing a polymerizable group represented by X 1 to X 4 is not particularly limited, but is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms other than the polymerizable group, and 2 to 10 carbon atoms. And more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the aliphatic group containing a polymerizable group represented by X 1 to X 4 is preferably substituted at one or two positions with a hetero atom, more preferably at one position with a hetero atom, and Ar 11 to More preferably, one position adjacent to the aryl group containing a benzene ring surrounded by a broken line represented by Ar 14 is substituted with a hetero atom.
  • the polymerizable group contained in the aliphatic group containing the polymerizable group represented by X 1 to X 4 is a radically polymerizable or cationically polymerizable group (hereinafter also referred to as a radically polymerizable group and a cationically polymerizable group, respectively). ) Is preferred.
  • radically polymerizable groups As the radically polymerizable group, generally known radically polymerizable groups can be used, and preferable examples thereof include a polymerizable group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond capable of radical polymerization, Can include a vinyl group, a (meth) acryloyloxy group, and the like. Among these, a (meth) acryloyloxy group is preferable, and an acryloyloxy group is more preferable.
  • cationic polymerizable group generally known cationic polymerizable groups can be used.
  • alicyclic ether group, cyclic acetal group, cyclic lactone group, cyclic thioether group, spiro orthoester group, vinyloxy group Groups and the like are preferable, and epoxy groups, oxetanyl groups, and vinyloxy groups are particularly preferable.
  • the polymerizable group contained in the substituent contained in Ar 1 to Ar 4 is preferably a radical polymerizable group.
  • Two or more of Ar 1 ⁇ Ar 4 comprises a substituent containing a polymerizable group, preferably contains a substituent 2-4 of Ar 1 ⁇ Ar 4 contains a polymerizable group, Ar More preferably, two or three of 1 to Ar 4 contain a substituent containing a polymerizable group, and two of Ar 1 to Ar 4 contain a substituent containing a polymerizable group. Further preferred.
  • Ar 11 to Ar 14 are each independently a polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group containing a benzene ring surrounded by a broken line as one of the condensed rings, X 1 to X 4 are each independently surrounded by a broken line Even if it is substituted with a benzene ring, it may be substituted with a ring other than the benzene ring surrounded by a broken line.
  • a and b each independently represent an integer of 1 to 5, preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably a and b are all 1.
  • c and d each independently represent an integer of 0 to 5, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably c and d are both 0.
  • R 1 to R 4 each independently represents a substituent.
  • the substituent represented by R 1 to R 4 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include halogen atoms, halogenated alkyl groups, alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, acyl groups, hydroxy groups, hydroxyalkyl groups, alkoxy groups, aryl groups, hetero groups. An aryl group, an alicyclic group, etc. can be mentioned.
  • the substituent represented by R 1 to R 4 is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group or an aryl group, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a phenyl group.
  • R 1 to R 4 are Each may be independently substituted with a benzene ring surrounded by a broken line, or may be substituted with a ring other than the benzene ring surrounded by a broken line.
  • e, f, g, and h each independently represent an integer of 0 or more, and the upper limit values of e, f, g, and h can be substituted by Ar 11 to Ar 14, respectively.
  • e, f, g and h are each independently preferably 0 to 8, more preferably 0 to 2, and still more preferably 0.
  • Ar 11 to Ar 14 are each independently a polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group containing a benzene ring surrounded by a broken line as one of the condensed rings, e, f, g and h may be 0 or 1 Preferably, it is 0.
  • Examples of the polymerizable compound containing a cardo skeleton include, but are not limited to, on-coat EX series (manufactured by Nagase Sangyo Co., Ltd.) and Ogsol (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • the composition preferably contains a polymerization initiator. It does not restrict
  • the composition contains a photopolymerization initiator and the polymerizable compound in addition to the metal nitride-containing particles, the composition is cured by irradiation with actinic rays or radiation. Sometimes called.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of a polymerizable compound, and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators.
  • the photopolymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molar extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 nm to 800 nm (more preferably 330 nm to 500 nm).
  • Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those containing a triazine skeleton, those containing an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, Examples include oxime compounds such as oxime derivatives, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, and hydroxyacetophenones. Examples of the halogenated hydrocarbon compound containing the triazine skeleton include those described in Wakabayashi et al., Bull. Chem. Soc.
  • trihalomethyltriazine compounds More preferred are trihalomethyltriazine compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers, onium compounds, benzophenone compounds, or acetophenone compounds, trihalomethyltriazine compounds, ⁇ - Particularly preferred is at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an aminoketone compound, an oxime compound, a triallylimidazole dimer, and a benzophenone compound.
  • hydroxyacetophenone compounds As the photopolymerization initiator, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds can also be suitably used. More specifically, for example, an aminoacetophenone initiator described in JP-A-10-291969 and an acylphosphine initiator described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can also be used.
  • hydroxyacetophenone-based initiator IRGACURE-184, DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, and IRGACURE-127 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used.
  • More preferred examples of the photopolymerization initiator include oxime compounds (oxime initiators).
  • an oxime compound is preferable because it has high sensitivity and high polymerization efficiency, can be cured regardless of the color material concentration, and can be easily designed with a high color material concentration.
  • oxime compound a compound described in JP-A No. 2001-233842, a compound described in JP-A No. 2000-80068, or a compound described in JP-A No. 2006-342166 can be used.
  • IRGACURE-OXE01 manufactured by BASF
  • IRGACURE-OXE02 manufactured by BASF
  • IRGACURE-OXE03 manufactured by BASF
  • IRGACURE-OXE04 manufactured by BASF
  • TR-PBG-304 manufactured by Changzhou Power Electronics New Materials Co., Ltd.
  • Adeka Arcles NCI-831 and Adeka Arcles NCI-930 manufactured by ADEKA
  • N-1919 carboxymethyl methacrylate
  • An initiator manufactured by ADEKA
  • oxime compounds other than those described above compounds described in JP-A-2009-519904 in which an oxime is linked to the carbazole N-position; compounds described in US Pat. No. 7,626,957 in which a hetero substituent is introduced into the benzophenone moiety; Compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-15025 and US Patent Publication No. 2009-292039 in which a nitro group is introduced at the dye moiety; Ketooxime compounds described in International Patent Publication No. 2009-131189; Triazine skeleton and oxime skeleton are the same molecule A compound described in US Pat. No.
  • the oxime compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (OX-1).
  • the oxime N—O bond may be an (E) oxime compound, a (Z) oxime compound, or a mixture of (E) and (Z) isomers. .
  • the substituent examples include a halogen atom, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, an acyl group, an alkyl group, and an aryl group.
  • the monovalent substituent represented by B is preferably an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an arylcarbonyl group, or a heterocyclic carbonyl group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
  • the divalent organic group represented by A is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a cycloalkylene group, or an alkynylene group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
  • An oxime compound containing a fluorine atom can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator.
  • Specific examples of the oxime compound containing a fluorine atom include compounds described in JP2010-262028; compounds 24 and 36 to 40 described in JP2014-500852; compounds described in JP2013-164471A (C-3); and the like. This content is incorporated herein.
  • R 1 and R 2 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms
  • R 1 and R 2 is a phenyl group, may form a fluorene group together a phenyl group are bonded to
  • R 3 and R 4 are each independently, Represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms
  • X represents a direct bond or carbonyl Indicates a group.
  • R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 have the same meanings as R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 in Formula (1)
  • R 5 is -R 6, -OR 6 , —SR 6 , —COR 6 , —CONR 6 R 6 , —NR 6 COR 6 , —OCOR 6 , —COOR 6 , —SCOR 6 , —OCSR 6 , —COSR 6 , —CSOR 6 , —CN, halogen represents an atom or a hydroxyl group, R 6 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group or a heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms having 7 to 30 carbon atoms having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, X represents a direct bond or a carbonyl group, and a represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • R 1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms.
  • R 3 and R 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms or a carbon number of 4 Represents a heterocyclic group of ⁇ 20, and X represents a direct bond or a carbonyl group.
  • R 1, R 3 and R 4 have the same meanings as R 1, R 3 and R 4 in the formula (3)
  • R 5 is, -R 6, -OR 6, -SR 6, Represents —COR 6 , —CONR 6 R 6 , —NR 6 COR 6 , —OCOR 6 , —COOR 6 , —SCOR 6 , —OCSR 6 , —COSR 6 , —CSOR 6 , —CN, a halogen atom or a hydroxyl group
  • R 6 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms
  • X is a direct bond or Represents a carbonyl group, and a represents an integer of 0 to 4.
  • R 1 is preferably each independently a methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, i-propyl, cyclohexyl group or phenyl group.
  • R 3 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a tolyl group or a xylyl group.
  • R 4 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms or a phenyl group.
  • R 5 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a tolyl group or a naphthyl group.
  • X is preferably a direct bond.
  • Specific examples of the compounds represented by formula (1) and formula (2) include, for example, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0076 to 0079 of JP-A No. 2014-137466. This content is incorporated herein.
  • the oxime compound preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 350 nm to 500 nm, more preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 360 nm to 480 nm, and more preferably has a high absorbance at 365 nm and 405 nm.
  • the molar extinction coefficient at 365 nm or 405 nm of the oxime compound is preferably from 1,000 to 300,000, more preferably from 2,000 to 300,000, more preferably from 5,000 to 200, from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Is more preferable.
  • a known method can be used for the molar extinction coefficient of the compound.
  • an ethyl acetate solvent is used at a concentration of 0.01 g / L. It is preferable to measure. You may use a photoinitiator in combination of 2 or more type as needed.
  • the content of the polymerization initiator is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass with respect to the total solid content in the composition, preferably 1 to 25% by mass. More preferably, it is 1 to 10% by mass.
  • the composition may contain only one kind of polymerization initiator, or may contain two or more kinds. When two or more types are contained, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
  • composition may further contain the following optional components.
  • the said composition may contain various surfactant from a viewpoint of improving applicability
  • various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
  • the fluorine content in the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and still more preferably 7 to 25% by mass.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and has good solubility in the composition.
  • fluorine-based surfactant compounds described in paragraphs 0015 to 0158 of JP-A No. 2015-117327 can also be used.
  • a block polymer can also be used as the fluorosurfactant, and specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A-2011-89090.
  • the fluorine-containing surfactant contains a repeating unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound containing a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy group or propyleneoxy group)
  • a fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound can also be preferably used, and the following compounds are also exemplified as the fluorine-based surfactant used in the present invention.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the above compound is preferably 3,000 to 50,000, for example, 14,000.
  • a fluoropolymer containing an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain can also be used as the fluorosurfactant.
  • Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A 2010-164965, paragraphs 0050 to 0090 and 0289 to 0295, for example, MegaFac RS-101, RS-102, RS-718K, RS-72- manufactured by DIC. K etc. are mentioned.
  • nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane, and ethoxylates and propoxylates thereof (for example, glycerol propoxylate, glycerin ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene Stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester (Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62 manufactured by BASF, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2, Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1), Rusupasu 20000 (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Corporation), and the like. Also, NCW-101, NCW-1001, NCW-1002 manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd
  • cationic surfactant examples include phthalocyanine derivatives (trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.), organosiloxane polymer KP341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), W001 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • phthalocyanine derivatives trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.
  • organosiloxane polymer KP341 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • W001 manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.
  • the composition may contain a colorant other than the metal nitride-containing particles (hereinafter also simply referred to as “colorant”).
  • the colorant is used, for example, for adjusting the chromaticity of the composition, and it is possible to replace a part of the metal nitride-containing particles with the colorant as long as the OD (Optical Density) value does not decrease.
  • Examples of such a colorant include pigments (black organic pigments and chromatic organic pigments, and inorganic pigments) and dyes.
  • the pigment is not particularly limited, and a known pigment can be used.
  • chromatic organic pigments include, for example, Color Index (CI) Pigment Yellow 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 24, 31, 32, 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36: 1, 37, 37: 1, 40, 42, 43, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 63, 65, 73, 74, 77, 81, 83, 86, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 123, 125, 126, 127, 128, 129, 137, 138, 139, 147, 148, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 161, 162, 164, 166, 167 Etc.
  • CI Color Index
  • a zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment having an average number of halogen atoms in the molecule of 10 to 14, bromine atoms on average 8 to 12, and chlorine atoms on average 2 to 5 should be used. Is also possible. Specific examples include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/118720. These organic pigments can be used alone or in various combinations in order to increase color purity.
  • black pigments can be used as the black pigment.
  • examples thereof include carbon black and / or black metal-containing inorganic pigments shown below.
  • the black metal-containing inorganic pigment include metal oxides containing one or more metal elements selected from the group consisting of Co, Cr, Cu, Mn, Ru, Fe, Ni, Sn, Ti, and Ag. Can be mentioned. These may be used alone or as a mixture of two or more. Moreover, you may prepare so that it may have desired light-shielding property by combining and using the inorganic pigment of another hue further in a black pigment.
  • these black pigments and other inorganic pigments having other hues are used not only independently but also in combination with a plurality of types of pigments for the purpose of expressing light-shielding properties in a wide wavelength range from ultraviolet to infrared. Is possible.
  • pyrazole azo compounds When classified as chemical structures, pyrazole azo compounds, pyromethene compounds, anilinoazo compounds, triphenylmethane compounds, anthraquinone compounds, benzylidene compounds, oxonol compounds, pyrazolotriazole azo compounds, pyridone azo compounds, cyanine compounds, phenothiazine compounds, and pyrrolopyrazole azomethine compounds Etc. can be used.
  • a dye multimer may be used as the dye. Examples of the dye multimer include compounds described in JP2011-213925A and JP2013-041097A.
  • the above composition may contain extender pigments as necessary in addition to the colorant.
  • extender pigments include barium sulfate, barium carbonate, calcium carbonate, silica, basic magnesium carbonate, alumina white, gloss white, titanium white, and hydrotalcite. These extender pigments can be used alone or in admixture of two or more.
  • the amount of extender used is usually 0 to 100 parts by weight, preferably 5 to 50 parts by weight, and more preferably 10 to 40 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the colorant. Colorants and extenders can be used with their surfaces modified with polymers.
  • Coloring agents may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • a coloring agent you may contain colored organic pigments, such as red, blue, yellow, green, and purple.
  • a light-shielding pigment specifically, metal nitride-containing particles
  • a colored organic pigment it is preferable to use the colored organic pigment in an amount of 1 to 40% by mass based on the light-shielding pigment.
  • a red pigment and a light-shielding pigment in combination.
  • Pigment Red 254 is preferable as the red pigment, although not particularly limited.
  • the content of the colorant is preferably from 20 to 80% by mass, more preferably from 30 to 70% by mass, and more preferably from 35 to 60% based on the total solid content of the composition. More preferred is mass%.
  • a pigment derivative contains, a sulfonic acid group, a carboxylic acid group, and its quaternary ammonium base are preferable, a carboxylic acid group or a sulfonic acid group is still more preferable, and a sulfonic acid group is especially preferable.
  • the basic group contained in the pigment derivative is preferably an amino group, more preferably a tertiary amino group.
  • Specific examples of the pigment derivative include the following compounds.
  • the descriptions in paragraphs 0162 to 0183 of JP2011-252065 A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in this specification.
  • a silane coupling agent is a compound containing a hydrolyzable group and other functional groups in the molecule.
  • a hydrolyzable group such as an alkoxy group is bonded to a silicon atom.
  • the hydrolyzable group refers to a substituent that is directly bonded to a silicon atom and can form a siloxane bond by a hydrolysis reaction and / or a condensation reaction.
  • Examples of the hydrolyzable group include a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, and an alkenyloxy group.
  • the hydrolyzable group contains a carbon atom, the number of carbon atoms is preferably 6 or less, and more preferably 4 or less.
  • an alkoxy group having 4 or less carbon atoms or an alkenyloxy group having 4 or less carbon atoms is preferable.
  • the silane coupling agent improves the adhesion between the substrate and the cured film, so fluorine atoms and silicon atoms (however, excluding silicon atoms to which hydrolyzable groups are bonded) It is preferable that it does not contain, a fluorine atom, a silicon atom (except a silicon atom to which a hydrolyzable group is bonded), an alkylene group substituted with a silicon atom, a linear alkyl group having 8 or more carbon atoms, and carbon It is desirable not to include a branched alkyl group of several or more.
  • the silane coupling agent preferably contains a group represented by the following formula (Z). * Represents a bonding position.
  • R Z1 represents a hydrolyzable group, and the definition thereof is as described above.
  • the molecular weight of the silane coupling agent is not particularly limited, and is often 100 to 1000 from the viewpoint of handleability, preferably 270 or more, and more preferably 270 to 1000.
  • silane coupling agent X represented by the formula (W).
  • R z1 represents a hydrolyzable group, and the definition is as described above.
  • R z2 represents a curable functional group, the definition is as described above, and the preferred range is also as described above.
  • Lz represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • examples of the divalent linking group include an alkylene group which may be substituted with a halogen atom, an arylene group which may be substituted with a halogen atom, —NR 12 —, —CONR 12 -, - CO -, - CO 2 -, SO 2 NR 12 -, - O -, - S -, - SO 2 -, or combinations thereof.
  • a silane coupling agent Y having at least a silicon atom, a nitrogen atom, and a curable functional group in the molecule and containing a hydrolyzable group bonded to the silicon atom.
  • the silane coupling agent Y only needs to have at least one silicon atom in the molecule, and the silicon atom can be bonded to the following atoms and substituents. They may be the same atom, substituent or different.
  • substituents further include an amino group, a halogen atom, a sulfonamide group, a silyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a thioalkoxy group, an alkyl group and / or an aryl group. It may be substituted with an alkoxycarbonyl group, an amide group, a urea group, an ammonium group, an alkylammonium group, a carboxylic acid group, or a salt thereof, a sulfo group, or a salt thereof.
  • at least one hydrolyzable group is bonded to the silicon atom.
  • the definition of the hydrolyzable group is as described above.
  • the silane coupling agent Y may contain a group represented by the formula (Z).
  • the definition of the curable functional group contained in the silane coupling agent Y is as described above, and the preferred range is also as described above.
  • the silane coupling agent Y only needs to have at least one curable functional group in one molecule, but it is also possible to take an embodiment in which two or more curable functional groups are contained. From the viewpoint of property, it is preferable to contain 2 to 20 curable functional groups, more preferably 4 to 15 and most preferably 6 to 10 curable functional groups in the molecule.
  • the molecular weights of the silane coupling agent X and the silane coupling agent Y are not particularly limited, but include the above ranges (preferably 270 or more).
  • the above composition may contain one silane coupling agent or two or more silane coupling agents.
  • a composition may contain 2 or more types of silane coupling agents, the sum should just be in the said range.
  • the composition may contain an ultraviolet absorber. Thereby, the shape of the pattern of a cured film can be made more excellent (fine).
  • an ultraviolet absorber salicylate, benzophenone, benzotriazole, substituted acrylonitrile, and triazine ultraviolet absorbers can be used.
  • compounds of paragraphs 0137 to 0142 corresponding to paragraphs 0251 to 0254 of US2012 / 0068292 of JP2012-068418A can be used, and the contents thereof can be incorporated and incorporated in the present specification. .
  • a diethylamino-phenylsulfonyl-based ultraviolet absorber (manufactured by Daito Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: UV-503) is also preferably used.
  • the ultraviolet absorber include compounds exemplified in paragraphs 0134 to 0148 of JP2012-32556A.
  • the content of the ultraviolet absorber is preferably 0.001 to 15% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, and still more preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
  • the composition may contain a polymerization inhibitor.
  • Polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis (3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine primary cerium salt and the like.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
  • the composition may contain only one type of polymerization inhibitor, or may contain two or more types.
  • the following components may be further added to the composition.
  • examples include sensitizers, co-sensitizers, crosslinking agents, curing accelerators, fillers, thermosetting accelerators, plasticizers, diluents, and sensitizers, and further adhesion promoters to the substrate surface.
  • auxiliaries for example, conductive particles, fillers, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, leveling agents, peeling accelerators, antioxidants, fragrances, surface tension modifiers, chain transfer agents, etc.
  • These components include, for example, paragraph numbers 0183 to 0228 of JP2012-003225A (corresponding ⁇ 0237> to ⁇ 0309> of US Patent Application Publication No.
  • JP 2013/0034812 and JP2008-250074.
  • the descriptions of paragraph numbers 0101 to 0102, paragraph numbers 0103 to 0104, paragraph numbers 0107 to 0109, and paragraph numbers 0159 to 0184 of JP 2013-195480 A can be taken into consideration, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. It is.
  • the manufacturing method of the said composition contains the following mixing and dispersion
  • distribution process is a process of mixing the said component with a well-known mixing method (For example, a stirrer, a homogenizer, a high-pressure emulsifier, a wet pulverizer, and a wet disperser), and obtaining a composition.
  • a well-known mixing method for example, a stirrer, a homogenizer, a high-pressure emulsifier, a wet pulverizer, and a wet disperser
  • each component constituting the composition may be mixed at once, or may be sequentially added after each component is dissolved or dispersed in an organic solvent.
  • the order of input and the working conditions when blending are not particularly limited.
  • the mixing and dispersing step may include a step of producing a dispersion.
  • the step of preparing the dispersion is a step of preparing the dispersion by mixing the metal nitride-containing particles, the dispersant, and the solvent, and dispersing the metal nitride-containing particles by the above method.
  • the remaining components can be mixed with the prepared dispersion to produce a composition.
  • the mechanical force used for dispersing the pigment includes compression, squeezing, impact, shearing and cavitation. Specific examples of these processes include a bead mill, a sand mill, a roll mill, a high speed impeller, a sand grinder, a flow jet mixer, high pressure wet atomization, and ultrasonic dispersion.
  • the manufacturing method of the said composition contains the process of obtaining the said metal nitride containing particle
  • the step of obtaining metal nitride-containing particles is performed before mixing the above-described components.
  • the embodiment of the specific manufacturing process of the metal nitride-containing particles by the thermal plasma method is as described above.
  • the metal nitride-containing particles are preferably subjected to the following stationary step before being subjected to the mixing and dispersing step or the step of producing a dispersion.
  • the standing step refers to a predetermined time (preferably 12 to 72 hours) in a sealed container in which the metal nitride-containing particles obtained by the thermal plasma method are not exposed to the atmosphere after their production and the oxygen concentration is controlled. (More preferably 12 to 48 hours, still more preferably 12 to 24 hours). At this time, it is more preferable that the moisture content in the sealed container is controlled.
  • the oxygen (O 2 ) concentration and the water content in the sealed container are each preferably 100 ppm or less, more preferably 10 ppm or less, and still more preferably 1 ppm or less.
  • the content of oxygen (O 2) concentration and moisture in the sealed container can be performed by adjusting the oxygen concentration and water content in the inert gas supplied in a sealed container.
  • the inert gas nitrogen gas and argon gas are preferably used, and among these, it is more preferable to use nitrogen gas.
  • the surface and crystal grain boundaries of the metal nitride-containing particles become stable. Thereby, generation
  • the standing step can be replaced with step H described in the method for producing metal nitride-containing particles, and can be replaced with step H in that the composition has a more excellent effect of the present invention. preferable.
  • a filtration process is a process of filtering the composition manufactured by the said mixing and dispersion
  • foreign substances can be removed from the composition and / or defects can be reduced.
  • Any filter can be used without particular limitation as long as it has been conventionally used for filtration.
  • a filter made of a fluororesin such as PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene), a polyamide resin such as nylon, or a polyolefin resin such as polyethylene or polypropylene (PP) (containing high density and ultra high molecular weight) can be used.
  • PP polypropylene
  • nylon are preferable.
  • the pore diameter here can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer. As a commercially available filter, for example, it can be selected from various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd., Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Japan Microlith Co., Ltd.) or KITZ Micro Filter Co., Ltd. .
  • As the second filter a filter formed of the same material as the first filter can be used.
  • the pore size of the second filter is suitably about 0.2 to 10.0 ⁇ m, preferably about 0.2 to 7.0 ⁇ m, and more preferably about 0.3 to 6.0 ⁇ m.
  • the cured film is obtained using the composition.
  • the cured film contains metal nitride-containing particles.
  • the cured film is preferably used as a light-shielding film, and specifically used for light-shielding the periphery of the light receiving portion of the image sensor.
  • the said light shielding film is formed using the said composition (especially the said photosensitive composition).
  • the light-shielding film obtained by using the above composition is excellent in resolution and corrosion resistance of the electrode.
  • the film thickness of the light shielding film is not particularly limited, but the film thickness after drying is preferably 0.2 ⁇ m or more and 50 ⁇ m or less, and preferably 0.3 ⁇ m or more and 10 ⁇ m or less, in that the light shielding film has the effect of the present invention. Is more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m or more and 5 ⁇ m or less. Since the above composition has a high optical density per unit volume (because of its high light shielding properties), the film thickness can be reduced as compared with a composition using a conventional black pigment.
  • the size of the light-shielding film (the length of one side of the light-shielding film provided around the sensor light-receiving portion) is preferably 0.001 mm or more and 10 mm or less in that the light-shielding film has more excellent effects of the present invention.
  • 05 mm or more and 7 mm or less are more preferable, and 0.1 mm or more and 3.5 mm or less are still more preferable. Since the above composition has a high optical density per unit volume, it is advantageous for microfabrication, such as being able to reduce the coating amount, and is excellent in resolution and anticorrosion properties of the electrode. Can do.
  • composition layer forming step a step of applying the above composition onto a substrate to form a composition layer (coating film).
  • Exposure step a step of exposing the composition layer through a photomask (hereinafter also simply referred to as “mask”).
  • Development step A step of developing the exposed composition layer to form a patterned cured film (light-shielding film).
  • composition layer forming step the composition is applied on a substrate directly or through another layer to form a composition layer (composition layer forming step), exposed through a predetermined mask pattern, and light. Only the irradiated coating film portion is cured (exposure process) and developed with a developer (development process), whereby the color filter can be produced.
  • exposure process Exposure process
  • development process developer
  • the composition layer forming step is a step of forming the composition layer (coating film) by coating the composition on the substrate.
  • the substrate include alkali-free glass, soda glass, Pyrex (registered trademark) glass, quartz glass used in liquid crystal display devices and the like, and a transparent conductive film attached to these, photoelectric devices used in solid-state imaging devices, and the like.
  • Examples include a conversion element substrate (for example, a silicon substrate), a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) substrate, and a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor) substrate.
  • an undercoat layer may be provided on these substrates in order to improve adhesion with the upper layer, prevent diffusion of substances, or planarize the substrate surface.
  • various coating methods such as slit coating, inkjet method, spin coating, cast coating, roll coating, and screen printing can be applied.
  • the coating film thickness of the composition is preferably 0.35 ⁇ m or more and 1.5 ⁇ m or less, preferably 0.40 ⁇ m or more, from the viewpoint of resolution. 1.0 ⁇ m or less is more preferable.
  • composition coated on the substrate is usually dried at 70 ° C. or higher and 110 ° C. or lower for 2 minutes or more and 4 minutes or less. Thereby, a composition layer can be formed.
  • the exposure step is a step in which the composition layer (coating film) formed in the composition layer forming step is exposed through a mask and only the coating film portion irradiated with light is cured.
  • the exposure is preferably performed by irradiation with actinic rays or radiation.
  • actinic rays or radiation In particular, ultraviolet rays such as g-line, h-line, and i-line are preferably used, and a high-pressure mercury lamp is more preferable.
  • the irradiation intensity is preferably 5 ⁇ 1500mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10 ⁇ 1000mJ / cm 2. Further, from the viewpoint of improving the resolution, exposure with an i-line stepper is preferable in forming a light-shielding film for a solid-state imaging device.
  • an alkali development treatment (development step) is performed, and the light non-irradiated part in the exposure step is eluted in an alkaline aqueous solution. Thereby, only the photocured part (the coating film part irradiated with light) remains.
  • the developer when producing a light-shielding color filter containing a black matrix for a solid-state imaging device, an organic alkali developer that does not cause damage to the underlying circuit or the like is desirable.
  • the development temperature is usually 20 to 30 ° C., and the development time is 20 to 90 seconds.
  • Examples of the alkaline aqueous solution include an inorganic developer and an organic developer.
  • As the inorganic developer sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium oxalate, or sodium metasuccinate having a concentration of 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 1 is used.
  • An alkaline aqueous solution dissolved so as to be in mass% can be mentioned.
  • the developing method for example, a paddle developing method and a shower developing method can be used.
  • the manufacturing method of the color filter containing the said cured film (black matrix) may contain the hardening process which hardens a cured film by a heating and / or exposure after the said image development process.
  • the color filter containing the cured film (black matrix) is excellent in resolution and corrosion resistance of the electrode. Therefore, the color filter containing the said cured film (black matrix) is suitable for solid-state image sensors, such as a CCD image sensor and / or a CMOS image sensor. Particularly, it is suitable for a CCD image sensor and / or a CMOS image sensor having a high resolution exceeding 1 million pixels. That is, the color filter containing the cured film is suitable for a solid-state imaging device. Further, the color filter may include a structure in which a cured film that forms each color pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by a partition, for example, in a lattice shape. The cured film (black matrix) is disposed, for example, between a light receiving portion of each pixel constituting a CCD image sensor and / or a CMOS image sensor and a microlens for condensing light.
  • the solid-state imaging device contains the cured film (black matrix).
  • the solid-state imaging device preferably contains a color filter that contains a black matrix and, if necessary, a patterned film composed of pixels of other colors (three colors or four colors).
  • the solid-state imaging device is not particularly limited as long as it contains the black matrix and functions as a solid-state imaging device.
  • a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device CCD image sensor, CMOS image sensor, etc.
  • a solid-state imaging device containing the black matrix on the surface opposite to the light-receiving element forming surface of the substrate.
  • the color filter may have a structure in which a cured film that forms each color pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by a partition, for example, in a lattice shape.
  • the partition in this case preferably has a low refractive index for each color pixel.
  • the solid-state imaging device containing such a structure include the solid-state imaging devices described in JP2012-227478A and JP2014-179577A.
  • the said cured film is suitable for image display apparatuses, such as a liquid crystal display device and an organic electroluminescent display apparatus.
  • image display devices For the definition of image display devices and details of each image display device, refer to, for example, “Electronic Display Device (Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Kenkyukai, 1990)” and “Display Device (Junsho Ibuki, Industrial Books ( (Issued in 1989)).
  • the liquid crystal display device is described, for example, in “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Industrial Research Co., Ltd., published in 1994)”.
  • the cured film is suitable for, for example, a liquid crystal display device of the method described in the “next generation liquid crystal display technology”.
  • the liquid crystal display device containing the cured film for example, a color filter, a liquid crystal layer, and a liquid crystal driving means (simple matrix driving method and active matrix driving) are provided between a pair of substrates at least one of which is light transmissive. And a liquid crystal display device containing at least a method.
  • the liquid crystal display device includes a plurality of pixel groups, and each pixel constituting the pixel group includes a color filter separated from each other by the cured film (black matrix).
  • At least one includes a color filter, a liquid crystal layer, and liquid crystal driving means between a pair of light-transmitting substrates, and the liquid crystal driving means is an active element (for example, a color filter containing a TFT (Thin Film Transistor) and containing the cured film (black matrix) between the active elements is contained.
  • a color filter containing a TFT (Thin Film Transistor) and containing the cured film (black matrix) between the active elements is contained.
  • the color filter containing the cured film is suitable for a liquid crystal display device of a color TFT (Thin Film Transistor) type.
  • the color TFT liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Color TFT liquid crystal display (issued in 1996 by Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd.)”.
  • the color filter is a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, such as a lateral electric field driving method such as IPS (In Plane Switching); a pixel division method such as MVA (Multi-domain Vertical Alignment); and STN (Super-Twist).
  • the color filter is suitable for a bright, high-definition COA (Color-filter On Array) type liquid crystal display device.
  • COA Color-filter On Array
  • the required characteristics for the color filter may require the required characteristics for the interlayer insulating film, that is, the low dielectric constant and the resistance to the peeling solution, in addition to the normal required characteristics.
  • the COA type liquid crystal display device containing the color filter has better resolution or better durability.
  • a resin film may be further included on the color filter layer.
  • the liquid crystal display device includes various members such as an electrode substrate, a polarizing film, a retardation film, a backlight, a spacer, and a viewing angle guarantee film.
  • the color filter can be applied to a liquid crystal display device composed of these known members.
  • these materials for example, “'94 Liquid Crystal Display Peripheral Materials / Chemicals Market (Kentaro Shima, CMC 1994)” and “2003 Liquid Crystal Related Markets Current Status and Future Prospects (Volume 2)” "Fuji Chimera Research Institute, Ltd., published in 2003)”.
  • backlights SID meeting Digest 1380 (2005) (A. Konno et.al), Monthly Display December 2005, pages 18-24 (Yasuhiro Shima), pages 25-30 (Takaaki Yagi), etc. Are listed.
  • the cured film is composed of portable devices such as personal computers, tablets, mobile phones, smartphones and digital cameras; OA (Office Automation) devices such as printer multifunction devices and scanners; surveillance cameras, bar code readers, and automatic cash deposits.
  • Machine automated teller ⁇ machine
  • high-speed camera and industrial equipment such as personal authentication using facial image authentication
  • in-vehicle camera equipment medical camera equipment such as endoscope, capsule endoscope and catheter
  • Optics used in space equipment such as sensors, biosensors, military reconnaissance cameras, 3D map cameras, meteorological and oceanographic observation cameras, land resource exploration cameras, and exploration cameras for space astronomy and deep space targets.
  • Filter and module shading member and Shielding layer further is suitable for anti-reflection member and the antireflection layer.
  • the cured film can also be used for applications such as micro LED (Light Emitting Diode) and micro OLED (Organic Light Emitting Diode).
  • the cured film is suitable for members that provide a light shielding function or an antireflection function, in addition to optical filters and optical films used in micro LEDs and micro OLEDs.
  • Examples of the micro LED and the micro OLED include those described in JP-T-2015-500562 and JP-T-2014-533890.
  • the cured film is suitable as an optical and optical film used in quantum dot displays. Moreover, it is suitable as a member which provides a light shielding function and an antireflection function.
  • quantum dot displays include US Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0335677, US Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0036536, US Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0036203, and US Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0035960. What has been described.
  • Metal nitride-containing particles P-1 were produced by the following method. First, niobium (powder) ⁇ 100-325 mesh> manufactured by Mitsuwa Chemicals, which contains niobium as a transition metal, was prepared as a raw material (hereinafter also referred to as “metal raw material powder”). Next, the content of impurities contained in the metal raw material powder was analyzed by ICP emission spectroscopy. For the ICP emission spectroscopic analysis, an ICP emission spectroscopic analyzer “SPS3000” (trade name) manufactured by Seiko Instruments Inc. was used.
  • SPS3000 an ICP emission spectroscopic analyzer “SPS3000” (trade name) manufactured by Seiko Instruments Inc. was used.
  • the metal raw material powder was subjected to plasma treatment in Ar gas (treatment conditions were as described in the following plasma treatment (1)) to form metal fine particles. It was 80 nm when the average primary particle diameter of the obtained metal fine particle was measured. In addition, the average primary particle diameter was calculated
  • the sample was observed with a transmission electron microscope (TEM) at a magnification of 20,000 to obtain an image.
  • the area of the metal fine particles in the obtained image was calculated by image processing.
  • the diameter when the obtained area was converted into a circle was calculated. This operation is performed on a total of 400 metal fine particles (approximately 3000 metal fine particles are confirmed in each visual field) for four visual fields, and the average diameter of the metal fine particles is calculated by arithmetically averaging the evaluated diameters in terms of circles. It was.
  • Plasma treatment (1) was performed by the following method. That is, a plasma treatment (1) was performed under the following conditions using an apparatus according to the black composite fine particle production apparatus shown in FIG. 1 of International Publication No. 2010/147098 as the metal fine particle production apparatus.
  • High-frequency voltage applied to the coil for high-frequency oscillation Frequency, about 4 MHz, voltage, about 80 kVA ⁇
  • Plasma gas Argon gas (Supply rate: 100 L / min)
  • Carrier gas Argon gas (Supply amount: 10 L / min)
  • -Chamber atmosphere Argon gas (Supply rate 1000L / min, Chamber flow rate 5m / sec)
  • Cyclone atmosphere Argon gas, Internal pressure: 50 kPa ⁇ Material supply speed from chamber to cyclone: 10 m / s (average value)
  • JIP 270M made of Fe powder JFE steel was prepared, and plasma treatment was performed under the conditions of the plasma treatment (1) to atomize atoms A. At this time, when impurities contained in the obtained fine particles were measured by the same method as described above, no impurities were detected.
  • the metal fine particles obtained above and the atomized atom A were mixed to obtain a raw metal powder.
  • grains were obtained by carrying out plasma processing in nitrogen gas (a processing condition is based on the following plasma processing (2)).
  • Plasma treatment (2) was performed by the following method.
  • the apparatus used is the same as in the plasma treatment (1).
  • Plasma gas Argon gas and nitrogen gas (Supply amount 50 L / min each)
  • Carrier gas Nitrogen gas (Supply amount: 10L / min)
  • Atmosphere in chamber Nitrogen gas (amount supplied: 1000 L / min, flow velocity in chamber: 5 m / sec)
  • Cyclone atmosphere Nitrogen gas, internal pressure 50kPa ⁇ Material supply speed from chamber to cyclone: 10 m / s (average value)
  • the nitrogen gas at 20 ° C. is used under the condition that the relative humidity is 95% in the atmosphere by using a shunt type humidity supply device SRH manufactured by Nippon Shintec Co., Ltd. using Ar gas. It was introduced and allowed to stand for 24 hours. Thereafter, the obtained metal nitride-containing particles were classified using a TTSP separator manufactured by Hosokawa Micron under the conditions of a yield of 10% to obtain metal nitride-containing particles P-1. Nitrogen gas was supplied to the separator.
  • the average primary particle diameter of the metal nitride-containing particles P-1 was measured and found to be 12 nm. Further, the conductivity of the metal nitride-containing particle P-1 was measured and found to be 180 ⁇ 10 4 S / m. In addition, an average primary particle diameter is an average primary particle diameter measured by said method. In addition, the said electrical conductivity is the electrical conductivity measured by the following method. The conductivity was measured by the following method using a powder resistance measurement system MCP-PD51 manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Analytech.
  • the metal nitride-containing particles P-2 to P-7, P-C1 and P- are the same as the metal nitride-containing particles P-1, except that the content of atoms A is as described in Table 1.
  • C5 was produced.
  • the average primary particle diameter of the metal fine particles, the average primary particle diameter of the metal nitride-containing particles, and the electrical conductivity related to the production of the metal nitride-containing particles are summarized in Table 1.
  • Metal nitride-containing particles P-C2 were produced in the same manner as the metal nitride-containing particles P-1, except that the atom A was not added to the transition metal raw material.
  • the average primary particle diameter of the metal fine particles, the average primary particle diameter of the metal nitride-containing particles, and the electrical conductivity related to the production of the metal nitride-containing particles are summarized in Table 1.
  • the metal nitride-containing particles P-8 are the same as the metal nitride-containing particles P-1 except that the transition metal raw materials shown in Table 1 are used and the content of atoms A is as described in Table 1. To P-15 were produced.
  • the average primary particle diameter of the metal fine particles, the average primary particle diameter of the metal nitride-containing particles, and the electrical conductivity related to the production of the metal nitride-containing particles are summarized in Table 1.
  • Nb powder Niobium (powder) ⁇ 100-325 mesh> manufactured by Mitsuwa Chemicals ⁇
  • V powder Metal vanadium powder VHO made by Taiyo Mining -Zr powder: Zirconium powder made by Wako Pure Chemical Industries-Tantalum Nodal: Tantalum Nodal made by Global Advanced Metal ⁇ Hf powder: Hafnium powder made by Furuuchi Chemical ⁇ Y powder: Yttrium powder made in Japan yttrium ⁇ Cr powder: Degassed electrolytic metal chrome powder made by Kosei ⁇ Re powder: Rhenium powder made by Rhenium Alloys ⁇ W powder: Tungsten powder AW3110 made by Eurotungsten ⁇ Al powder: Aluminum powder No.
  • Si powder Silicon powder made by Furuuchi Chemical ⁇ Fe powder: JIP 270M made by Fe powder JFE Steel ⁇
  • Ni powder Ni powder 300 nano product made by Toho Titanium ⁇
  • Ag powder Ag powder made by Mitsui Kinzoku SPQ03R
  • ppm in the following Table 1 intends mass ppm.
  • “not detected” indicates that no impurity was detected when measured by the above measurement method, specifically, less than 20 ppm by mass.
  • “Not added” indicates that the atom A was not added, and “Not measured” indicates that the measurement was not performed because the atom A was not added. Therefore, “not measured” indicates substantially less than 20 ppm by mass (calculated less than 5 ppm by mass).
  • Dispersants A to C having the following structures were used as the dispersant.
  • the numerical value described in each structural unit intends the mass% of each structural unit with respect to the total structural units.
  • the letters described in each structural unit intend mol% of each structural unit with respect to all the structural units.
  • Binder resin As the binder resin, the following resin A and resin B were used. The structures of the resin A and the resin B are shown below. In the resin A and the resin B, the numbers described in each structural unit are intended to be mol% of each structural unit with respect to all the structural units.
  • Resin A ACRYCURE RD-F8 (trade name, manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.)
  • Polymerizable compound M1 dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., trade name “KAYARAD”, see the following formula)
  • Polymerizable compound M2 PET-30 (pentaerythritol triacrylate, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)
  • OXE-02 Irgacure OXE02 (trade name, manufactured by BASF Japan)
  • composition Next, the metal nitride-containing particle dispersion, binder resin, polymerizable compound, polymerization initiator, polymerization inhibitor, and surfactant were mixed and stirred, and Examples and Comparative Examples shown in Tables 2 and 3 below. Each composition was obtained. In addition, all content of each component in Table 2 is the mass%.
  • OD value A coating film was formed by spin coating on each glass composition (Eagle XG, manufactured by Corning) having a thickness of 0.7 mm and a 10 cm square. At this time, the number of revolutions was adjusted so that the film thickness became 1.5 ⁇ m according to the solid content concentration of each composition. The formed coating film was dried by heat treatment at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes on a hot plate to obtain a cured film. About the board
  • Solid content change rate (initial solid content concentration)-(solid content concentration of 1 cm of supernatant)
  • a sample solution in which the above composition was diluted 500 times by PGMEA was prepared, and the number of metal nitride-containing particles having a size of 10 ⁇ m or more contained in 10 ml of the sample solution was determined by a flow particle image analyzer (trade name “FPIA”). , Manufactured by Malvern). Evaluation was performed according to the following criteria. Practically “C” or more is preferable. A: Number of particles is 3 or less B: Number of particles is 4 to 10 C: Number of particles is 11 to 20 D: Number of particles is 21 or more
  • the composition was applied onto an 8-inch silicon substrate to prepare a coating film.
  • the coating film was prepared using a coater developer ACT8 manufactured by Tokyo Electron, and the number of revolutions was adjusted so that the film thickness became 1.5 ⁇ m corresponding to the solid content concentration of each composition.
  • the obtained coating film was subjected to heat treatment at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes as a pre-bake treatment on a hot plate.
  • the coating film was exposed (negative) through a photomask on which an island pattern with a width of 10 ⁇ m was formed using an i-line stepper (Canon FPA3000i5 +) on the substrate with the coating film after the pre-baking.
  • the exposed coating film is subjected to paddle development for 30 seconds using CD-2060 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronics Materials) as a developer using a coater developer ACT8 manufactured by Tokyo Electron, and rinsed with pure water after development. Went.
  • the developed coating film was post-baked (temperature: 220 ° C., time: 10 minutes).
  • the pattern shape of the coating film after post-baking was measured with a length measuring SEM (Scanning Electron Microscope). Specifically, the width of the island was measured and evaluated according to the following criteria. Practically “C” or more is preferable.
  • the width of the island is 9.5 ⁇ m to 10.5 ⁇ m
  • a coating film was formed on an image sensor device substrate by a spin coater.
  • the coating film was pre-baked on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes.
  • an i-line exposure apparatus FPA3000i5 +, manufactured by Canon
  • heat treatment was performed at 220 ° C. for 5 minutes using a hot plate (post-baking step).
  • the substrate was exposed for 7 days under conditions of 130 ° C. and 90% relative humidity, and then wiring was formed by wire bonding.
  • wire breakage was evaluated by a wire bonding inspection device manufactured by Canon Machinery. 50 chips were evaluated, and the number of wirings per chip was 40. Evaluation was performed according to the following criteria. Practically “C” or more is preferable. A: No more than 1 wire break B: 2 or more but less than 5 wire C: 5 or more but less than 10 wire breaks D: 10 or more wire breaks
  • the transition metal in which the metal nitride-containing particles are transition metals excluding titanium among the transition metals of Groups 3 to 11 and the electronegativity is 1.22 to 2.36.
  • Cured films (light-shielding films) produced using the compositions of Examples 1 to 32 containing the nitrides described above have excellent light-shielding properties, excellent resolution, and excellent corrosion resistance of the electrodes. all right.
  • the cured film (light-shielding film) produced using the compositions of Comparative Examples 1 to 5 did not achieve the desired effect.
  • the film (light-shielding film) has an OD value (light-shielding property) superior to a cured film (light-shielding film) produced using the composition of Example 9 or 11 in which the transition metal is zirconium or hafnium. It was.
  • composition of Example 21 having a solid content of 10 to 40% by mass had a smaller number of particles than the composition of Example 22 having a solid content of more than 40% by mass.
  • composition of Example 23 having a water content of 0.1 to 1% by mass had fewer particles than the composition of Example 24 having a content of more than 1% by mass.
  • composition of Example 2 in which the content of metal nitride-containing particles is 20 to 70% by mass relative to the total solid content of the composition is compared with the composition of Example 29 that is less than 20% by mass. Thus, it had better temporal stability.
  • the composition of Example 2 is more than 70% by mass, and the number of particles is smaller than that of the composition of Example 28, and the resulting cured film (light-shielding film) is more excellent. It had image properties.
  • the composition of Example 2 in which the mass ratio of the dispersant to the metal nitride-containing particles is 0.05 to 0.30 is compared with the composition of Example 32 in which the mass ratio is less than 0.05. Therefore, it had better temporal stability.
  • the cured film (light-shielding film) produced using the composition of Example 2 has a better resolution than the cured film (light-shielding film) produced using the composition of Example 18. Had sex.
  • Metal nitride-containing particles P-1 (A) in which the surface of metal nitride-containing particles P-1 produced by the above method was coated with aluminum hydroxide were produced by the following method. First, 100 g of metal nitride-containing particles P-1 were weighed and added to 750 mL of pure water, and well dispersed to obtain a slurry. Next, the above slurry was added to a solution obtained by dissolving 220 g of an aluminum chloride aqueous solution having a concentration of 10% by mass as aluminum oxide and 160 g of urea in 500 mL of water, and mixed well to obtain a mixture.
  • Nitride-containing particles P-1 (A) were obtained.
  • the metal nitride-containing particles P-1 (A) had an average primary particle size of 13 nm and a conductivity of 100 S / m.
  • Example 1 the evaluation was performed in the same manner except that the polymerization initiator was changed from OXE-02 to Irgacure OXE03 (trade name, manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd.), and the same result as in Example 1 could be obtained. I understood. Furthermore, compared to Example 1, the robustness with respect to the exposure amount was wide, and the resolution could be maintained even when the exposure amount was reduced.
  • Example 1 Evaluation was conducted in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the polymerization initiator was changed from OXE-02 to Adeka Arcles NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA), and the same results as in Example 1 were obtained. I understood. Furthermore, compared to Example 1, the robustness with respect to the exposure amount was wide, and the resolution could be maintained even when the exposure amount was reduced.
  • Example 1 In the same manner as in Example 1 except that the polymerizable compound was changed from the polymerizable compound M1 to the polymerizable compound M2, the same results as in Example 1 were obtained.
  • Example 1 the polymerizable compound was changed from the polymerizable compound M1 to a mixture of the polymerizable compounds M1 and M2 (1: 1 by mass ratio) without changing the content of the polymerizable compound with respect to the entire composition. was evaluated in the same manner, and it was found that the same results as in Example 1 were obtained.
  • Example 1 In the same manner as in Example 1 except that PGMEA was used instead of the solvent CPN, it was found that the same result as in Example 1 was obtained.
  • Example 1 evaluation was performed in the same manner except that PGMEA was used instead of the solvent CPN and Bu acetate, and it was found that the same result as in Example 1 was obtained.
  • Example 1 Evaluation was conducted in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the surfactant F-556 was not used. As a result of the evaluation, it was found that the same result as in Example 1 was obtained.
  • Example 1 the evaluation was performed in the same manner except that the polymerization inhibitor PMF was not used. As a result of the evaluation, it was found that the same result as in Example 1 was obtained.
  • Carbon black dispersion (trade name “Color Black S170”, manufactured by Degussa, average primary particle size 17 nm, BET specific surface area 200 m 2 / g, gas black method, instead of metal nitride-containing particles, was used.
  • a carbon black dispersion was obtained in the same manner as described above except that carbon black produced by the above method was used.
  • the total content of metal nitride-containing particles P-1 and carbon black in the composition is 21% by mass.
  • the composition was prepared in the same manner except that was used, and evaluated using this composition. As a result of the evaluation, it was found that the OD value was the same as in Example 1, and the same light shielding property as in Example 1 was obtained.
  • the composition was prepared in the same manner except that was used, and evaluated using this composition. As a result of the evaluation, it was found that the OD value was the same as in Example 1, the same light shielding property as in Example 1 was obtained, and a darker film was obtained.

Abstract

Provided are: a composition with which a cured film exhibiting an excellent light-blocking performance, an excellent resolution, and an excellent electrode corrosion resistance can be produced; and a method for producing the composition; a cured film; a color filter; a light-blocking film; a solid-state imaging element; and moreover an image display device. The composition contains particles containing a metal nitride that contains specific atoms, and these metal nitride-containing particles contain the nitride of a transition metal from among the transition metals of groups 3-11 excluding titanium, wherein the transition metal has an electronegativity of 1.22-2.36.

Description

組成物、組成物の製造方法、硬化膜、カラーフィルタ、遮光膜、固体撮像素子及び画像表示装置Composition, method for producing composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
 本発明は、組成物、組成物の製造方法、硬化膜、カラーフィルタ、遮光膜、固体撮像素子及び画像表示装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a composition, a method for producing the composition, a cured film, a color filter, a light shielding film, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device.
 従来から、黒色粉末としては、チタン窒化物を含有する組成物が知られている。チタン窒化物を含有する組成物は、種々の用途に用いられ、例えば液晶表示装置及び固体撮像装置等に設けられた遮光膜の作製に使用されてきた。
 具体的には、液晶表示装置に用いられるカラーフィルタには着色画素間の光を遮蔽し、コントラストを向上させる等の目的で、ブラックマトリクスと呼ばれる遮光膜が備えられている。
 また、固体撮像素子においてもノイズ発生防止、画質の向上等を目的として遮光膜が設けられている。現在、携帯電話及びPDA(Personal Digital Assistant)等の電子機器の携帯端末には、小型で薄型な撮像ユニットが搭載されている。このような撮像ユニットは、一般に、CCD(Charge Coupled Device)イメージセンサ及びCMOS(Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor)イメージセンサ等の固体撮像素子と、固体撮像素子上に被写体像を形成するためのレンズと、を備えている。
Conventionally, a composition containing titanium nitride is known as a black powder. Compositions containing titanium nitride have been used in various applications, for example, in the production of light-shielding films provided in liquid crystal display devices and solid-state imaging devices.
Specifically, a color filter used in a liquid crystal display device includes a light shielding film called a black matrix for the purpose of shielding light between colored pixels and improving contrast.
Also in the solid-state imaging device, a light shielding film is provided for the purpose of preventing noise and improving image quality. Currently, portable terminals of electronic devices such as mobile phones and PDAs (Personal Digital Assistants) are equipped with small and thin imaging units. Such an imaging unit generally includes a solid-state imaging device such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) image sensor and a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor) image sensor, a lens for forming a subject image on the solid-state imaging device, It has.
 更に近年では、特定の波長の光の透過率に着目し、チタン窒化物に代えて、特定の波長の光の透過率がより低い(遮光性が高い)金属酸窒化物を用いた黒色粉末が検討されている。例えば特許文献1には、「バナジウム又はニオブの一種又は二種の酸窒化物からなる黒色粉末であり、酸素含有量16wt%以下及び窒素含有量10wt%以上であって、粉末濃度50ppmの分散液透過スペクトルにおいて450nmの透過率Xが10.0%以下であることを特徴とする青色遮蔽黒色粉末。」が開示されている。 In recent years, attention has been focused on the transmittance of light of a specific wavelength, and instead of titanium nitride, a black powder using a metal oxynitride having a lower transmittance of light of a specific wavelength (high light shielding property) has been developed. It is being considered. For example, Patent Document 1 states that “a black powder composed of one or two oxynitrides of vanadium or niobium, an oxygen content of 16 wt% or less, a nitrogen content of 10 wt% or more, and a dispersion having a powder concentration of 50 ppm. "Blue shielding black powder characterized in that the transmittance X at 450 nm in the transmission spectrum is 10.0% or less."
特開2012-96945号公報JP 2012-96945 A
 特許文献1に記載の青色遮蔽黒色粉末は、高い遮光性を有する黒色顔料として優れた性質を有している。しかし本発明者の検討によれば、上記のような黒色顔料を含有する組成物は、電極パターンが形成された基板上に、パターン状に加工された硬化膜を形成するために使用された場合、解像性の向上及び電極パターンの劣化(腐食)抑制の点でさらなる改良の余地があることを知見した。なお、解像性とは、所望の微細パターンに対して、得られるパターン形状が所望の形状により近似していること、具体的には、得られるパターン形状が所望の形状よりも太っていない、及び細っていないことを意図する。 The blue shielding black powder described in Patent Document 1 has excellent properties as a black pigment having high light shielding properties. However, according to the study of the present inventor, when the composition containing the black pigment as described above is used to form a cured film processed into a pattern on a substrate on which an electrode pattern is formed. The present inventors have found that there is room for further improvement in terms of improving resolution and suppressing deterioration (corrosion) of electrode patterns. Note that the resolution is that the desired pattern is approximated by the desired pattern, specifically, the obtained pattern is not thicker than the desired shape. And not intended to be thin.
 そこで、本発明は、優れた遮光性、優れた解像性、及び優れた電極の防食性を有する硬化膜を作製できる組成物を提供することを課題とする。また、本発明は、組成物の製造方法、硬化膜、カラーフィルタ、遮光膜、固体撮像素子及び画像表示装置を提供することも課題とする。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a composition capable of producing a cured film having excellent light-shielding properties, excellent resolution, and excellent electrode corrosion resistance. Another object of the present invention is to provide a method for producing a composition, a cured film, a color filter, a light-shielding film, a solid-state imaging device, and an image display device.
 本発明者は、上記課題を達成すべく鋭意検討した結果、所定の原子を含有する金属窒化物含有粒子を含有する組成物であって、金属窒化物含有粒子が3~11族の遷移金属のうち、チタンを除く遷移金属であって、かつ、電気陰性度が1.22~2.36である遷移金属の窒化物を含有する組成物が、上記課題を解決することができることを見出し、本発明を完成させた。
 すなわち、以下の構成により上記課題を達成することができることを見出した。
As a result of intensive studies to achieve the above-mentioned problems, the present inventor is a composition containing metal nitride-containing particles containing a predetermined atom, wherein the metal nitride-containing particles are made of a group 3-11 transition metal. Of these, it has been found that a composition containing a transition metal nitride other than titanium and having an electronegativity of 1.22 to 2.36 can solve the above problems. Completed the invention.
That is, it has been found that the above-described problem can be achieved by the following configuration.
 [1] 原子Aを含有する金属窒化物含有粒子を含有する組成物であって、金属窒化物含有粒子は、3~11族の遷移金属のうち、チタンを除く遷移金属であって、かつ、電気陰性度が1.22~2.36である遷移金属の窒化物を含有し、原子Aは、遷移金属の窒化物を構成する遷移金属とは異なる元素であって、ホウ素、アルミニウム、ケイ素、マンガン、鉄、ニッケル及び銀からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種であり、金属窒化物含有粒子中における原子Aの含有量が、0.00005~10質量%である、組成物。
 [2] 金属窒化物含有粒子の導電率が100×10~600×10S/mである、[1]に記載の組成物。
 [3] 金属窒化物含有粒子の平均一次粒子径が10~50nmである、[1]又は[2]に記載の組成物。
 [4] 更にバインダー樹脂を含有する、[1]~[3]のいずれかに記載の組成物。
 [5] 金属窒化物含有粒子に対するバインダー樹脂の質量比が0.3以下である、[4]に記載の組成物。
 [6] 遷移金属が、V、Cr、Y、Zr、Nb、Hf、Ta、W、及びReからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種である、[1]~[5]のいずれかに記載の組成物。
 [7] 遷移金属が、V、及びNbからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種である、[1]~[6]のいずれかに記載の組成物。
 [8] 更に重合性化合物を含有する、[1]~[7]のいずれかに記載の組成物。
 [9] 更に重合開始剤を含有する、[1]~[8]のいずれかに記載の組成物。
 [10] 更に溶剤を含有し、固形分が10~40質量%である、[1]~[9]のいずれかに記載の組成物。
 [11] 溶剤が水を含有し、水の含有量が、組成物の全質量に対して0.1~1質量%である、[10]に記載の組成物。
 [12] 金属窒化物含有粒子の含有量が、組成物の全固形分に対して20~70質量%である、[1]~[11]のいずれかに記載の組成物。
 [13] 更に分散剤を含有し、分散剤がポリアクリル酸メチル、ポリメタクリル酸メチル、及び、環状又は鎖状のポリエステルからなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の構造を含有する、[1]~[12]のいずれかに記載の組成物。
 [14] 金属窒化物含有粒子に対する分散剤の質量比が、0.05~0.30である、[13]に記載の組成物。
 [15] 金属窒化物含有粒子が、水酸化アルミニウムを含有する無機化合物で被覆された金属窒化物含有粒子である、[1]~[14]のいずれかに記載の組成物。
 [16] [1]~[15]のいずれかに記載の組成物の製造方法であって、 熱プラズマ法によって金属窒化物含有粒子を得る工程を含有する、組成物の製造方法。
 [17] [1]~[15]のいずれかに記載の組成物を用いて得られる、硬化膜。
 [18] [17]に記載の硬化膜を含有する、カラーフィルタ。
 [19] [17]に記載の硬化膜を含有する、遮光膜。
 [20] [17]に記載の硬化膜を含有する、固体撮像素子。
 [21] [17]に記載の硬化膜を含有する、画像表示装置。
[1] A composition containing metal nitride-containing particles containing atom A, wherein the metal nitride-containing particles are transition metals excluding titanium among the group 3-11 transition metals, and It contains a transition metal nitride having an electronegativity of 1.22 to 2.36, and atom A is an element different from the transition metal constituting the transition metal nitride, and includes boron, aluminum, silicon, A composition which is at least one selected from the group consisting of manganese, iron, nickel and silver, and the content of atom A in the metal nitride-containing particles is 0.00005 to 10% by mass.
[2] The composition according to [1], wherein the conductivity of the metal nitride-containing particles is 100 × 10 4 to 600 × 10 4 S / m.
[3] The composition according to [1] or [2], wherein the metal nitride-containing particles have an average primary particle size of 10 to 50 nm.
[4] The composition according to any one of [1] to [3], further comprising a binder resin.
[5] The composition according to [4], wherein the mass ratio of the binder resin to the metal nitride-containing particles is 0.3 or less.
[6] The transition metal according to any one of [1] to [5], wherein the transition metal is at least one selected from the group consisting of V, Cr, Y, Zr, Nb, Hf, Ta, W, and Re. Composition.
[7] The composition according to any one of [1] to [6], wherein the transition metal is at least one selected from the group consisting of V and Nb.
[8] The composition according to any one of [1] to [7], further comprising a polymerizable compound.
[9] The composition according to any one of [1] to [8], further comprising a polymerization initiator.
[10] The composition according to any one of [1] to [9], further containing a solvent and having a solid content of 10 to 40% by mass.
[11] The composition according to [10], wherein the solvent contains water and the water content is 0.1 to 1% by mass relative to the total mass of the composition.
[12] The composition according to any one of [1] to [11], wherein the content of the metal nitride-containing particles is 20 to 70% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
[13] A dispersant is further contained, and the dispersant contains at least one structure selected from the group consisting of polymethyl acrylate, polymethyl methacrylate, and cyclic or chain polyester. [1] To [12].
[14] The composition according to [13], wherein the mass ratio of the dispersant to the metal nitride-containing particles is 0.05 to 0.30.
[15] The composition according to any one of [1] to [14], wherein the metal nitride-containing particles are metal nitride-containing particles coated with an inorganic compound containing aluminum hydroxide.
[16] A method for producing a composition according to any one of [1] to [15], comprising a step of obtaining metal nitride-containing particles by a thermal plasma method.
[17] A cured film obtained using the composition according to any one of [1] to [15].
[18] A color filter containing the cured film according to [17].
[19] A light-shielding film containing the cured film according to [17].
[20] A solid-state imaging device containing the cured film according to [17].
[21] An image display device comprising the cured film according to [17].
 本発明によれば、優れた遮光性、優れた解像性、及び優れた電極の防食性を有する硬化膜を作製できる(以下、「本発明の効果を有する」ともいう。)組成物を提供することができる。また、本発明によれば、組成物の製造方法、硬化膜、カラーフィルタ、遮光膜、固体撮像素子及び画像表示装置を提供することができる。 According to the present invention, there is provided a composition capable of producing a cured film having excellent light shielding properties, excellent resolution, and excellent electrode anticorrosive properties (hereinafter also referred to as “having the effect of the present invention”). can do. Moreover, according to this invention, the manufacturing method of a composition, a cured film, a color filter, a light shielding film, a solid-state image sensor, and an image display apparatus can be provided.
 以下に、組成物について、組成物を構成する成分ごとに詳述する。
 なお、本明細書において「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含有する範囲を意味する。
 また、本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を含有しないものと共に置換基を含有するものをも包含するものである。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を含有しないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を含有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含する。
 また、本明細書中における「活性光線」又は「放射線」とは、例えば、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、及びエキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV:Extreme ultraviolet lithography光)、X線、並びに電子線等を意味する。また本明細書において「光」とは、活性光線及び放射線を意味する。本明細書中における「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、及びエキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、X線、並びにEUV光等による露光のみならず、電子線及びイオンビーム等の粒子線による描画も包含する。
 また、本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」はアクリレート及びメタアクリレートを表す。また、本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリル」はアクリル及びメタアクリルを表す。また、本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、アクリロイル及びメタクリロイルを表す。また、本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリルアミド」は、アクリルアミド及びメタアクリルアミドを表す。また、本明細書中において、「単量体」と「モノマー」とは同義である。単量体は、オリゴマー及びポリマーと区別され、重量平均分子量が2,000以下の化合物をいう。本明細書中において、重合性化合物とは、重合性基を含有する化合物のことをいい、単量体であっても、ポリマーであってもよい。重合性基とは、重合反応に関与する基をいう。
Below, a composition is explained in full detail for every component which comprises a composition.
In the present specification, a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
Moreover, in the description of group (atomic group) in this specification, the description which does not describe substitution and non-substitution includes what does not contain a substituent and what contains a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group not containing a substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group containing a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In addition, in the present specification, “active light” or “radiation” means, for example, the emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, deep ultraviolet light represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet lithography (EUV), X-ray, and Means an electron beam. In this specification, “light” means actinic rays and radiation. Unless otherwise specified, “exposure” in the present specification includes not only exposure with an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp and far ultraviolet rays such as an excimer laser, X-rays and EUV light, but also an electron beam and an ion beam, etc. Also includes drawing with particle beams.
Moreover, in this specification, "(meth) acrylate" represents an acrylate and a methacrylate. In the present specification, “(meth) acryl” represents acryl and methacryl. In the present specification, “(meth) acryloyl” represents acryloyl and methacryloyl. In the present specification, “(meth) acrylamide” represents acrylamide and methacrylamide. In this specification, “monomer” and “monomer” are synonymous. A monomer is distinguished from an oligomer and a polymer, and refers to a compound having a weight average molecular weight of 2,000 or less. In the present specification, the polymerizable compound means a compound containing a polymerizable group, and may be a monomer or a polymer. The polymerizable group refers to a group that participates in a polymerization reaction.
[組成物]
 上記組成物は、原子Aを含有する金属窒化物含有粒子を含有する組成物であって、金属窒化物含有粒子は、3~11族の遷移金属のうち、チタンを除く遷移金属であって、かつ、電気陰性度が1.22~2.36である遷移金属の窒化物を含有し、原子Aは、上記遷移金属とは異なる元素であって、ホウ素、アルミニウム、ケイ素、マンガン、鉄、ニッケル及び銀からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種であり、金属窒化物含有粒子中における原子Aの含有量が、0.00005~10質量%である、組成物である。上記組成物が本発明の効果を有する理由については必ずしも明確でないが、本発明者は以下のとおり推測する。なお、以下の推測により、上記組成物が本発明の効果を奏する機序が限定されるものではない。
[Composition]
The above composition is a composition containing metal nitride-containing particles containing atoms A, and the metal nitride-containing particles are transition metals excluding titanium among the group 3-11 transition metals, And a transition metal nitride having an electronegativity of 1.22 to 2.36, and the atom A is an element different from the transition metal, and is boron, aluminum, silicon, manganese, iron, nickel And a composition in which the content of atom A in the metal nitride-containing particles is 0.00005 to 10% by mass. The reason why the above composition has the effect of the present invention is not necessarily clear, but the present inventor presumes as follows. In addition, the mechanism by which the said composition exhibits the effect of this invention by the following assumptions is not limited.
 上記組成物は、3~11族の遷移金属のうち、チタンを除く遷移金属であって、かつ、電気陰性度が1.22~2.36である遷移金属の窒化物を含有する粒子を含有する。
 上記窒化物は価電子帯が窒素2p軌道から構成されるため、酸化物と比較して価電子帯がより負側にある。また、上記窒化物は、上記のとおり所定の電気陰性度を有する遷移金属からなるため、上記価電子帯と伝導帯とのバンドギャップがより小さくなる。この結果、上記遷移金属の窒化物はより広い波長領域の光を吸収する(遮光性が高くなる)ものと推測される。なお、本明細書における電気陰性度とは、ポーリング(Pauling)の定義による電気陰性度を意図する。
 また、上記組成物は、原子Aを含有する。遮光性が高いだけでなく、パターン形成に用いられる波長(例えばi線:365nm)における光の透過性を制御することができる。具体的には、パターン形成に必要な光は透過させることができる。つまり、上記組成物は優れた解像性を有する。更に、上記組成物は、原子Aの含有量を所定の範囲としているため、優れた電極の防食性を有する。
The above composition contains particles containing transition metal nitrides which are transition metals excluding titanium among the transition metals of Group 3 to 11 and have an electronegativity of 1.22 to 2.36. To do.
Since the nitride has a valence band composed of 2p orbitals of nitrogen, the valence band is on the more negative side than the oxide. Further, since the nitride is made of a transition metal having a predetermined electronegativity as described above, the band gap between the valence band and the conduction band becomes smaller. As a result, it is presumed that the transition metal nitride absorbs light in a wider wavelength range (higher light shielding properties). In addition, the electronegativity in this specification intends the electronegativity according to the definition of Pauling.
Further, the composition contains atom A. In addition to high light shielding properties, it is possible to control light transmission at a wavelength (for example, i-line: 365 nm) used for pattern formation. Specifically, light necessary for pattern formation can be transmitted. That is, the composition has excellent resolution. Further, the composition has an excellent anticorrosive property of the electrode because the content of the atom A is in a predetermined range.
〔金属窒化物含有粒子〕
 上記金属窒化物含有粒子は、原子Aを含有する金属窒化物含有粒子である。上記金属窒化物含有粒子が原子Aを含有する態様としては特に制限されず、イオン、金属化合物(錯化合物も含有する)、金属間化合物、合金、酸化物、複合酸化物、窒化物、酸窒化物、硫化物及び酸硫化物等、いずれの形態で含まれていてもよい。また、金属窒化物含有粒子中に含まれている原子Aは、結晶格子間位置の不純物として存在していてもよいし、結晶粒界にアモルファス状態で不純物として存在していてもよい。
[Metal nitride-containing particles]
The metal nitride-containing particles are metal nitride-containing particles containing atoms A. The aspect in which the metal nitride-containing particles contain the atom A is not particularly limited, and ions, metal compounds (including complex compounds), intermetallic compounds, alloys, oxides, complex oxides, nitrides, oxynitrides It may be contained in any form such as a product, sulfide and oxysulfide. In addition, the atoms A contained in the metal nitride-containing particles may exist as an impurity at a position between crystal lattices, or may exist as an impurity in an amorphous state at a crystal grain boundary.
<原子A>
 原子Aは金属窒化物含有粒子に含有される。原子Aは、下記の遷移金属とは異なる元素であって、ホウ素、アルミニウム、ケイ素、マンガン、鉄、ニッケル及び銀からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種である。なかでも、組成物がより優れた本発明の効果を有する点で、アルミニウム、ケイ素、鉄、ニッケル及び銀からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種が好ましく、鉄、ケイ素及びニッケルからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種がより好ましい。原子Aは1種を単独で用いても、2種以上を併用してもよい。
<Atom A>
Atom A is contained in the metal nitride-containing particles. The atom A is an element different from the transition metal described below, and is at least one selected from the group consisting of boron, aluminum, silicon, manganese, iron, nickel, and silver. Among these, at least one selected from the group consisting of aluminum, silicon, iron, nickel and silver is preferable in that the composition has more excellent effects of the present invention, and selected from the group consisting of iron, silicon and nickel. More preferred is at least one selected from the group consisting of The atom A may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together.
 金属窒化物含有粒子中における原子Aの含有量は、0.00005~10質量%である。原子Aの含有量が下限値未満であると、上記組成物により得られる硬化膜の解像性が劣る。原子Aの含有量が上限値超であると、上記組成物により得られる硬化膜の遮光性及び電極の防食性が劣る。なかでも、上記組成物により得られる硬化膜がより優れた電極の防食性を有する点で、原子Aの含有量は、0.00005質量%以上1%未満が好ましく、0.00005質量%以上0.1%未満がより好ましい。
 また、0.00005質量%以上10質量%未満だと、上記組成物により得られる硬化膜はより優れた遮光性を有する。
 ここで、金属窒化物含有粒子中における原子Aの含有量は、ICP(Inductively Coupled Plasma:高周波誘導結合プラズマ)発光分光分析法により測定される。
The content of atom A in the metal nitride-containing particles is 0.00005 to 10% by mass. When the content of atom A is less than the lower limit, the resolution of the cured film obtained from the composition is inferior. When the content of the atom A exceeds the upper limit value, the light shielding property of the cured film obtained from the composition and the anticorrosion property of the electrode are inferior. Among them, the content of the atom A is preferably 0.00005% by mass or more and less than 1%, more preferably 0.00005% by mass or more and 0% or more, in that the cured film obtained from the composition has more excellent corrosion resistance of the electrode. Less than 1% is more preferable.
Moreover, when it is 0.00005 mass% or more and less than 10 mass%, the cured film obtained by the said composition has more excellent light-shielding property.
Here, the content of atom A in the metal nitride-containing particles is measured by ICP (Inductively Coupled Plasma) emission spectroscopic analysis.
<遷移金属の窒化物>
 上記金属窒化物含有粒子は、3~11族の遷移金属のうち、チタンを除く遷移金属であって、かつ、電気陰性度が1.22~2.36である遷移金属の窒化物を含有する。上記遷移金属(カッコ内は電気陰性度)としては、3族の遷移元素のSc(1.36)、Dy(1.22)、Ho(1.23)、Er(1.24)、Tm(1.25)、Lu(1.27)、Th(1.3)、Pa(1.5)、U(1.38)、Np(1.36)、Pu(1.28)、Am(1.3)、Cm(1.3)、Bk(1.3)、Cf(1.3)、Es(1.3)、Fm(1.3)、Md(1.3)、No(1.3)、Lr(1.3);4族のZr(1.33)、Hf(1.3);5族のV(1.63)、Nb(1.6)、Ta(1.5);6族のCr(1.66)、Mo(2.16)、W(2.36);7族のMn(1.55)、Tc(1.9)、Re(1.9);8族のFe(1.83)、Ru(2.2)、Os(2.2);9族のCo(1.88)、Rh(2.28)、Ir(2.2);10族のNi(1.91)、Pd(2.2)、Pt(2.28);11族のCu(1.9)、Ag(1.93);が挙げられる。なかでも組成物がより優れた本発明の効果を有する点で、Sc、V、Cr、Mn、Fe、Co、Ni、Cu、Y、Zr、Nb、Mo、Tc、Ru、Rh、Pd、Ag、Hf、Ta、W、Re、Os、Ir、又はPtが好ましく、Sc、V、Cr、Co、Cu、Y、Zr、Mo、Tc、Ru、Rh、Pd、Hf、Ta、W、Re、Os、Ir、又はPtがより好ましく、V、Cr、Y、Zr、Nb、Hf、Ta、W、又はReが更に好ましく、V、Cr、Y、Nb、Ta、W、又はReが特に好ましく、V、又はNbが特により好ましく、Nbが最も好ましい。
<Nitride of transition metal>
The metal nitride-containing particle contains a transition metal nitride that is a transition metal excluding titanium among the group 3-11 transition metals and has an electronegativity of 1.22 to 2.36. . As the transition metal (electronegativity in parentheses), Sc (1.36), Dy (1.22), Ho (1.23), Er (1.24), Tm (group 3 transition elements) 1.25), Lu (1.27), Th (1.3), Pa (1.5), U (1.38), Np (1.36), Pu (1.28), Am (1 .3), Cm (1.3), Bk (1.3), Cf (1.3), Es (1.3), Fm (1.3), Md (1.3), No (1. 3), Lr (1.3); Group 4 Zr (1.33), Hf (1.3); Group 5 V (1.63), Nb (1.6), Ta (1.5) Group 6 Cr (1.66), Mo (2.16), W (2.36); Group 7 Mn (1.55), Tc (1.9), Re (1.9); 8 Group Fe (1.83), Ru (2.2), Os (2.2); Group 9 Co (1.88), Rh (2.28), Ir (2.2); Group 10 Ni (1.91), Pd (2.2), Pt (2.28); Group 11 Cu ( 1.9), Ag (1.93); Among these, Sc, V, Cr, Mn, Fe, Co, Ni, Cu, Y, Zr, Nb, Mo, Tc, Ru, Rh, Pd, Ag are preferable in that the composition has more excellent effects of the present invention. , Hf, Ta, W, Re, Os, Ir, or Pt, Sc, V, Cr, Co, Cu, Y, Zr, Mo, Tc, Ru, Rh, Pd, Hf, Ta, W, Re, Os, Ir, or Pt is more preferable, V, Cr, Y, Zr, Nb, Hf, Ta, W, or Re is more preferable, V, Cr, Y, Nb, Ta, W, or Re is particularly preferable, V or Nb is particularly more preferable, and Nb is most preferable.
 金属窒化物含有粒子中の「遷移金属の窒化物を構成する遷移金属」の含有量は、金属窒化物含有粒子の全質量に対して、10~85質量%が好ましく、15~75質量%がより好ましく、20~70質量%が更に好ましい。金属窒化物含有粒子中の「遷移金属の窒化物を構成する遷移金属」の含有量は、ICP(Inductively Coupled Plasma)発光分光分析法により分析できる。
 金属窒化物含有粒子中の窒素原子(N原子)の含有量は、金属窒化物含有粒子の全質量に対して、3~60質量%が好ましく、5~50質量%がより好ましく、10~40質量%が更に好ましい。窒素原子の含有量は不活性ガス融解-熱伝導度法により分析することができる。
 金属窒化物含有粒子は主成分として金属窒化物を含有し、粒子表面の酸化などにより、一部酸素原子を含有してもよい。粒子表面の酸化は、例えば、金属窒化物の合成時に酸素が混入する場合や粒子径が小さい場合に、より顕著となる。
 金属窒化物含有粒子中の酸素原子の含有量は、金属窒化物含有粒子の全質量に対して、1~40質量%が好ましく、1~35質量%がより好ましく、5~30質量%が更に好ましい。酸素原子の含有量は、不活性ガス融解-赤外線吸収法により分析することができる。
The content of the “transition metal constituting the transition metal nitride” in the metal nitride-containing particles is preferably 10 to 85% by mass, and preferably 15 to 75% by mass with respect to the total mass of the metal nitride-containing particles. More preferred is 20 to 70% by mass. The content of “transition metal constituting transition metal nitride” in the metal nitride-containing particles can be analyzed by ICP (Inductively Coupled Plasma) emission spectroscopy.
The content of nitrogen atoms (N atoms) in the metal nitride-containing particles is preferably 3 to 60% by mass, more preferably 5 to 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the metal nitride-containing particles. More preferred is mass%. The nitrogen atom content can be analyzed by an inert gas melting-thermal conductivity method.
The metal nitride-containing particles contain metal nitride as a main component and may partially contain oxygen atoms due to oxidation of the particle surface. For example, the oxidation of the particle surface becomes more prominent when oxygen is mixed in the synthesis of the metal nitride or when the particle diameter is small.
The content of oxygen atoms in the metal nitride-containing particles is preferably 1 to 40% by mass, more preferably 1 to 35% by mass, and further preferably 5 to 30% by mass with respect to the total mass of the metal nitride-containing particles. preferable. The oxygen atom content can be analyzed by an inert gas melting-infrared absorption method.
 経時安定性及び遮光性の観点から、金属窒化物含有粒子の比表面積は5m/g以上100m/g以下が好ましく、10m/g以上60m/g以下がより好ましい。比表面積はBET(Brunauer、Emmett、Teller)法により求めることができる。 From the viewpoint of stability over time and the light-shielding properties, the specific surface area is preferably 5 m 2 / g or more 100 m 2 / g or less of a metal nitride-containing particles, 10 m 2 / g or more 60 m 2 / g or less is more preferable. The specific surface area can be determined by the BET (Brunauer, Emmett, Teller) method.
 金属窒化物含有粒子は、金属窒化物含有粒子と金属微粒子からなる複合微粒子であってもよい。
 複合微粒子とは、金属窒化物含有粒子と金属微粒子が複合化しているか、高度に分散した状態にある粒子のことをいう。ここで、「複合化している」とは、金属窒化物と金属の両成分によって粒子が構成されていることを意味し、「高度に分散した状態」とは、金属窒化物含有粒子と金属粒子とがそれぞれ個別で存在し、かつ少量成分の粒子が凝集せず均一、一様に分散していることを意味する。
 金属微粒子としては特に制限されず、例えば、銅、金、白金、パラジウム、錫、コバルト、ロジウム、イリジウム、ルテニウム、オスミウム、モリブデン、タングステン、ニオブ、タンタル、カルシウム、ビスマス、アンチモン及び鉛、並びにこれらの合金、から選ばれる少なくとも一種が挙げられる。中でも、銅、金、白金、パラジウム、錫、コバルト、ロジウム及びイリジウム、並びにこれらの合金から選ばれる少なくとも1種であることが好ましく、銅、金、白金及び錫、並びにこれらの合金から選ばれる少なくとも一種であることがより好ましい。
 金属窒化物含有粒子における金属微粒子の含有量としては、金属窒化物含有粒子の全質量に対して5~50質量%が好ましく、10~30質量%がより好ましい。
The metal nitride-containing particles may be composite fine particles composed of metal nitride-containing particles and metal fine particles.
The composite fine particles are particles in which metal nitride-containing particles and metal fine particles are complexed or in a highly dispersed state. Here, “composite” means that particles are composed of both metal nitride and metal components, and “highly dispersed state” means metal nitride-containing particles and metal particles. Means that the small amount of particles are uniformly and uniformly dispersed without aggregation.
The metal fine particles are not particularly limited. For example, copper, gold, platinum, palladium, tin, cobalt, rhodium, iridium, ruthenium, osmium, molybdenum, tungsten, niobium, tantalum, calcium, bismuth, antimony and lead, and these At least one selected from alloys can be mentioned. Among these, at least one selected from copper, gold, platinum, palladium, tin, cobalt, rhodium and iridium, and alloys thereof is preferable, and at least selected from copper, gold, platinum, tin, and alloys thereof It is more preferable that it is 1 type.
The content of the metal fine particles in the metal nitride-containing particles is preferably 5 to 50% by mass and more preferably 10 to 30% by mass with respect to the total mass of the metal nitride-containing particles.
<金属窒化物含有粒子の製造方法>
 金属窒化物含有粒子の製造には、通常、気相反応法が用いられ、具体的には電気炉法及び熱プラズマ法等が挙げられる。これらの製法の中でも、不純物の混入が少ない点、粒子径が揃いやすい点、及び、生産性が高い点等の理由から、熱プラズマ法が好ましい。
 熱プラズマ法による金属窒化物含有粒子の具体的な製造方法としては、例えば、金属微粒子製造装置を用いるものが挙げられる。金属微粒子製造装置は、例えば、熱プラズマを発生させるプラズマトーチと、金属原料粉末をプラズマトーチ内へ供給する材料供給装置と、冷却機能を含有するチャンバと、生成された金属微粒子を分級するサイクロンと、及び金属微粒子を回収する回収部とによって構成される。
 なお、本明細書において、金属微粒子とは、金属元素を含有する一次粒子径が20nm~40μmの粒子を意図する。
<Method for producing metal nitride-containing particles>
For the production of metal nitride-containing particles, a gas phase reaction method is usually used, and specific examples include an electric furnace method and a thermal plasma method. Among these production methods, the thermal plasma method is preferable because it is less contaminated with impurities, has a uniform particle diameter, and has high productivity.
A specific method for producing metal nitride-containing particles by the thermal plasma method includes, for example, a method using a metal fine particle production apparatus. The metal fine particle manufacturing apparatus includes, for example, a plasma torch that generates thermal plasma, a material supply device that supplies metal raw material powder into the plasma torch, a chamber that includes a cooling function, and a cyclone that classifies the generated metal fine particles. And a recovery unit for recovering the metal fine particles.
In the present specification, the metal fine particles mean particles having a primary particle diameter of 20 nm to 40 μm containing a metal element.
 金属微粒子製造装置を用いた金属窒化物含有粒子の製造方法としては、特に限定されず、公知の方法を用いることができる。中でも、下記の所定の平均一次粒子径の金属窒化物含有粒子の収率が高まる点で、金属微粒子製造装置を用いて金属窒化物含有粒子を製造する方法は以下に示す工程を含有することが好ましい。
工程A:プラズマトーチ内に窒素ガスを含有しない不活性ガスをプラズマガスとして供給し、熱プラズマ炎を発生する工程。
工程B:プラズマトーチ内の熱プラズマ炎に、遷移金属を含有する金属原料粉末を供給し、上記金属原料粉末を蒸発させ、気相の原料金属を得る工程。
工程C:上記気相の原料金属を冷却し、遷移金属を含有する金属微粒子を得る工程。
工程D:プラズマトーチ内に窒素ガスを含有する不活性ガスをプラズマガスとして供給し、熱プラズマ炎を発生する工程。
工程E:プラズマトーチ内の熱プラズマ炎に、遷移金属を含有する金属微粒子を供給し、上記金属微粒子を蒸発させ、気相の原料金属を得る工程。
工程F:上記気相の原料金属を冷却し、金属窒化物含有粒子を得る工程。
 また、金属窒化物含有粒子の製造方法は、上記の工程C及び/又は工程Fの後に、所望により下記の工程Gを含有してもよい。
工程G:得られた粒子を分級する工程。
 更に、工程Aの前、工程Aと工程Bとの間、工程Cと工程Dとの間、又は工程DとEとの間に、以下の工程A2を含有してもよい。
工程A2:遷移金属を含有する金属原料粉末に、原子Aを混合する工程。
 更に、上記工程A2の前に、以下の工程A3-1~A3-3を含有してもよい。
工程A3-1:プラズマトーチ内に窒素ガスを含有しない不活性ガスをプラズマガスとして供給し、熱プラズマ炎を発生する工程
工程A3-2:プラズマトーチ内の熱プラズマ炎に、原子Aを含有する原料粉末を供給し、上記原料粉末を蒸発させ、気相の原子Aを得る工程
工程A3-3:上記気相の原子Aを冷却し、微粒子化された原子Aを得る工程
 なお、工程A3-3の後に更に、工程Gを含有してもよい。
 なお、本明細書において、微粒子化された原子Aとは、原子A含有する一次粒子径が20nm~40μmの粒子を意図する。
It does not specifically limit as a manufacturing method of metal nitride containing particle | grains using a metal microparticle manufacturing apparatus, A well-known method can be used. Among them, the method for producing metal nitride-containing particles using a metal fine particle production apparatus includes the following steps in that the yield of metal nitride-containing particles having the following predetermined average primary particle diameter is increased. preferable.
Step A: A step of supplying a thermal plasma flame by supplying an inert gas containing no nitrogen gas as a plasma gas in the plasma torch.
Step B: A step of supplying a metal raw material powder containing a transition metal to a thermal plasma flame in a plasma torch and evaporating the metal raw material powder to obtain a gas phase raw material metal.
Step C: Step of cooling the gas phase raw material metal to obtain fine metal particles containing a transition metal.
Step D: A step of supplying a thermal plasma flame by supplying an inert gas containing nitrogen gas as a plasma gas in the plasma torch.
Step E: A step of supplying metal fine particles containing a transition metal to a thermal plasma flame in a plasma torch and evaporating the metal fine particles to obtain a gas phase raw material metal.
Step F: Step of cooling the gas phase raw metal to obtain metal nitride-containing particles.
Moreover, the manufacturing method of metal nitride containing particle | grains may contain the following process G depending on necessity after the said process C and / or the process F. FIG.
Step G: A step of classifying the obtained particles.
Further, before step A, between step A and step B, between step C and step D, or between step D and E, the following step A2 may be included.
Step A2: A step of mixing atoms A into a metal raw material powder containing a transition metal.
Further, before the step A2, the following steps A3-1 to A3-3 may be included.
Step A3-1: An inert gas not containing nitrogen gas is supplied as a plasma gas in the plasma torch, and a thermal plasma flame is generated. Step A3-2: Atom A is contained in the thermal plasma flame in the plasma torch. Step A3-3 of supplying raw material powder and evaporating the raw material powder to obtain gas phase atoms A: Step of cooling the gas phase atoms A to obtain atomized atoms A Step A3- Step 3 may be further included after 3.
In the present specification, the atomized atom A means a particle having an atom A-containing primary particle diameter of 20 nm to 40 μm.
 更に、上記金属窒化物含有粒子の製造方法は、工程Fの後(工程Gを含有する場合は、工程Fの後の工程Gの後)に更に下記の工程Hを含有することが好ましい。
工程H:工程F(又は工程G)において得られた金属窒化物含有粒子を、水蒸気及び窒素ガスの混合雰囲気に暴露し、窒化処理する工程。
 なお、所望により、上記金属窒化物含有粒子の製造方法は、工程Hの後に更に工程Gを含有してもよい。以下では、各工程の好適態様について詳述する。
Furthermore, it is preferable that the manufacturing method of the said metal nitride containing particle | grains contains the following process H further after the process F (When the process G is included, after the process G after the process F).
Step H: A step of exposing the metal nitride-containing particles obtained in Step F (or Step G) to a mixed atmosphere of water vapor and nitrogen gas to perform nitriding treatment.
In addition, the manufacturing method of the said metal nitride containing particle | grains may contain the process G further after the process H if desired. Below, the suitable aspect of each process is explained in full detail.
・工程A
 工程Aはプラズマトーチ内に窒素ガスを含有しない不活性ガスをプラズマガスとして供給し、熱プラズマ炎を発生する工程である。熱プラズマ炎の発生方法としては、特に限定されないが、直流アーク放電法、多相アーク放電法、高周波プラズマ法、及び、ハイブリッドプラズマ法等が挙げられ、電極からの不純物の混入が少ない高周波プラズマ法が好ましい。
 高周波プラズマ法による熱プラズマ炎の発生方法としては、特に制限されず、例えば、高周波発振用コイルと石英管を含有するプラズマトーチ内にプラズマガスを供給し、上記高周波発振用コイルに高周波電流を印加することにより熱プラズマ炎を得る方法が挙げられる。
 工程Aにおける上記プラズマガスとしては、窒素ガスを含有しない不活性ガスが用いられる。窒素ガスを含有しない不活性ガスとしては、アルゴンガス、及び水素ガス等が挙げられる。窒素ガスを含有しない不活性ガスは、1種を単独で用いても、2種以上を併用してもよい。
・ Process A
Step A is a step of generating a thermal plasma flame by supplying an inert gas containing no nitrogen gas as a plasma gas in the plasma torch. The generation method of the thermal plasma flame is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a direct current arc discharge method, a multiphase arc discharge method, a high frequency plasma method, a hybrid plasma method, and the like. Is preferred.
The method of generating a thermal plasma flame by the high frequency plasma method is not particularly limited. For example, a plasma gas is supplied into a plasma torch containing a high frequency oscillation coil and a quartz tube, and a high frequency current is applied to the high frequency oscillation coil. The method of obtaining a thermal plasma flame by doing is mentioned.
As the plasma gas in step A, an inert gas not containing nitrogen gas is used. Examples of the inert gas not containing nitrogen gas include argon gas and hydrogen gas. The inert gas which does not contain nitrogen gas may be used individually by 1 type, or may use 2 or more types together.
・工程A2
 工程A2は遷移金属を含有する金属原料粉末に、原子Aを混合する工程である。原料金属粉末及び原子Aの混合方法としては特に制限されず、公知の方法を用いることができる。例えば、金属原料粉末をプラズマトーチ内へ供給する上記材料供給装置が、混合及び分散機能を含有してもよい。具体的には、国際公開第2010/147098号公報の段落0047~0058に記載された材料供給装置を用いることができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。なお、金属窒化物含有粒子の製造方法としては、工程A2の前に、以下の工程A3-1~A3-3を更に含有してもよい。
・ Process A2
Step A2 is a step of mixing atoms A into a metal raw material powder containing a transition metal. The method for mixing the raw metal powder and the atom A is not particularly limited, and a known method can be used. For example, the material supply device for supplying the metal raw material powder into the plasma torch may contain a mixing and dispersing function. Specifically, the material supply apparatus described in paragraphs [0047] to [0058] of International Publication No. 2010/147098 can be used, the contents of which are incorporated herein. The method for producing metal nitride-containing particles may further include the following steps A3-1 to A3-3 before step A2.
・工程B
 工程Bは、プラズマトーチ内の熱プラズマ炎に、遷移金属を含有する金属原料粉末を供給し、上記金属原料粉末を蒸発させ、気相の原料金属を得る工程である。プラズマトーチ内の熱プラズマ炎に金属原料粉末を供給する方法としては特に制限されないが、得られる気相の原料金属が、より均一な状態となる点で、キャリアガスを用いて噴霧されることが好ましい。なお、キャリアガスとしては、窒素ガスを含有しない不活性ガスを用いることが好ましい。窒素ガスを含有しない不活性ガスの態様は上記のとおりである。
 なお、金属窒化物含有粒子を製造する方法が、上記工程A2を含有する場合、金属原料粉末をプラズマトーチ内に供給に至るまでの間、金属原料粉末は、均一な分散状態が維持されていることが好ましい。
・ Process B
Step B is a step of supplying a metal raw material powder containing a transition metal to a thermal plasma flame in the plasma torch and evaporating the metal raw material powder to obtain a gas phase raw material metal. The method for supplying the metal raw material powder to the thermal plasma flame in the plasma torch is not particularly limited, but the obtained gas phase raw material metal may be sprayed using a carrier gas in a more uniform state. preferable. In addition, it is preferable to use inert gas which does not contain nitrogen gas as carrier gas. The aspect of the inert gas not containing nitrogen gas is as described above.
In addition, when the method for producing metal nitride-containing particles includes the step A2, the metal raw material powder is maintained in a uniform dispersed state until the metal raw material powder is supplied into the plasma torch. It is preferable.
・工程C
 工程Cは、気相の原料金属を冷却し、遷移金属を含有する金属微粒子を得る工程である。冷却方法としては特に制限されないが、冷却機能を含有するチャンバを用いることが好ましい。上記工程Bにおいて得られた気相の原料金属を、上記冷却機能を含有するチャンバに導入し、チャンバ内で急冷することにより、下記の所望の粒子径の金属微粒子を生成することができる。生成した金属微粒子は、例えば、上記回収部により回収される。チャンバ内の雰囲気としては、窒素ガスを含有しない不活性ガスが好ましい。窒素ガスを含有しない不活性ガスの態様は上記のとおりである。
 なお、上記工程A~Cを経ることにより、遷移金属を含有する金属微粒子が得られる。遷移金属を含有する金属微粒子は、工程Eにおいて蒸発しやすい。また、金属原料粉末が不純物を含有する場合にも、上記工程A~Cを経ることにより、上記不純物を除去することができる。
・ Process C
Step C is a step of cooling the gas phase raw material metal to obtain fine metal particles containing a transition metal. The cooling method is not particularly limited, but it is preferable to use a chamber containing a cooling function. By introducing the gas phase raw material metal obtained in the step B into the chamber containing the cooling function and quenching in the chamber, metal fine particles having the following desired particle diameter can be generated. The generated metal fine particles are recovered by, for example, the recovery unit. The atmosphere in the chamber is preferably an inert gas that does not contain nitrogen gas. The aspect of the inert gas not containing nitrogen gas is as described above.
By passing through the above steps A to C, metal fine particles containing a transition metal can be obtained. The metal fine particles containing the transition metal are likely to evaporate in the process E. Even when the metal raw material powder contains impurities, the impurities can be removed by performing the steps A to C.
・工程D
 工程Dは、プラズマトーチ内に窒素ガスを含有する不活性ガスをプラズマガスとして供給し、熱プラズマ炎を発生する工程である。窒素を含有する不活性ガスとしては、窒素ガス、及び不活性ガスを含有する窒素ガスが挙げられる。不活性ガスとしては、アルゴンガス、及び水素ガス等が挙げられる。不活性ガス含有する窒素ガスとしては、特に制限されないが、窒素ガスの含有量は、通常、10~90モル%程度であり、30~60モル%程度が好ましい。その他の態様は工程Aと同様である。
・ Process D
Step D is a step of generating a thermal plasma flame by supplying an inert gas containing nitrogen gas as a plasma gas in the plasma torch. Examples of the inert gas containing nitrogen include nitrogen gas and nitrogen gas containing an inert gas. Examples of the inert gas include argon gas and hydrogen gas. The nitrogen gas contained in the inert gas is not particularly limited, but the nitrogen gas content is usually about 10 to 90 mol%, preferably about 30 to 60 mol%. Other aspects are the same as in step A.
・工程E
 工程Eは、プラズマトーチ内の熱プラズマ炎に、遷移金属を含有する金属微粒子を供給し、上記金属微粒子を蒸発させ、気相の原料金属を得る工程である。プラズマトーチ内の熱プラズマ炎に金属微粒子を供給する方法としては上記のとおりであるが、キャリアガスとしては、窒素を含有する不活性ガスが好ましい。窒素を含有する不活性ガスの態様は上記のとおりである。
 工程Eでは、工程A~工程Cによって金属微粒子となった原料金属を熱プラズマ炎に供給するため、気相の原料金属が得られやすく、また、気相の原料金属の状態もより均一になりやすい。
・ Process E
Step E is a step of supplying metal fine particles containing a transition metal to the thermal plasma flame in the plasma torch and evaporating the metal fine particles to obtain a gas phase raw material metal. The method for supplying the metal fine particles to the thermal plasma flame in the plasma torch is as described above, but the carrier gas is preferably an inert gas containing nitrogen. The aspect of the inert gas containing nitrogen is as described above.
In Step E, the raw material metal that has become fine metal particles in Steps A to C is supplied to the thermal plasma flame, so that it is easy to obtain a vapor phase raw material metal, and the state of the vapor phase raw material metal becomes more uniform. Cheap.
・工程F
 工程Fは、気相の原料金属を冷却し、遷移金属の窒化物を含有する金属窒化物含有粒子を得る工程である。冷却方法の好適態様は上記のとおりであるが、チャンバ内の雰囲気としては、窒素ガスを含有する不活性ガスが好ましい。窒素ガスを含有する不活性ガスの好適態様は上記のとおりである。
・ Process F
Step F is a step of cooling the gas phase raw material metal to obtain metal nitride-containing particles containing a transition metal nitride. Although the suitable aspect of the cooling method is as above-mentioned, as the atmosphere in a chamber, the inert gas containing nitrogen gas is preferable. The suitable aspect of the inert gas containing nitrogen gas is as above-mentioned.
・工程G
 工程Gは、得られた金属微粒子及び/又は金属窒化物含有粒子を分級する工程である。分級の方法としては特に制限されないが、例えば、サイクロンを用いることができる。サイクロンは、円錐上の容器を有し、容器内に旋回流を発生して、遠心力を利用して粒子を分級する機能を有する。なお、分級は、不活性ガスの雰囲気下で行うことが好ましい。不活性ガスの態様は上記のとおりである。
・ Process G
Step G is a step of classifying the obtained metal fine particles and / or metal nitride-containing particles. The classification method is not particularly limited, and for example, a cyclone can be used. The cyclone has a container on a cone, and generates a swirling flow in the container and has a function of classifying particles using centrifugal force. The classification is preferably performed in an inert gas atmosphere. The aspect of the inert gas is as described above.
・工程H
 工程Hは金属窒化物含有粒子を、水蒸気及び窒素ガスの混合雰囲気に暴露し、窒化処理する工程である。この工程を経ることにより、金属窒化物含有粒子における金属窒化物の含有量をより多くすることができる。金属窒化物含有粒子を、水蒸気及び窒素ガスの混合雰囲気に暴露する方法については特に制限されないが、例えば、金属窒化物含有粒子を水蒸気及び窒素ガスを混合したガスで満たされた恒温槽に導入し、所定時間静置又は攪拌する方法が挙げられ、金属窒化物含有粒子の表面及び結晶境界がより安定化する点で静置することがより好ましい。
 なお、水蒸気及び窒素ガスの混合比率としては、大気中であれば相対湿度が25~95%となる条件が好ましい。また、静置又は攪拌する時間は0.5~72時間が好ましく、その際の温度は10~40℃が好ましい。
・ Process H
Step H is a step in which the metal nitride-containing particles are exposed to a mixed atmosphere of water vapor and nitrogen gas to perform nitriding treatment. Through this step, the metal nitride content in the metal nitride-containing particles can be increased. The method for exposing the metal nitride-containing particles to a mixed atmosphere of water vapor and nitrogen gas is not particularly limited. For example, the metal nitride-containing particles are introduced into a thermostatic bath filled with a gas mixed with water vapor and nitrogen gas. There may be mentioned a method of standing or stirring for a predetermined time, and it is more preferred that the metal nitride-containing particles are allowed to stand for stabilization of the surface and crystal boundaries.
The mixing ratio of water vapor and nitrogen gas is preferably such that the relative humidity is 25 to 95% in the atmosphere. The time for standing or stirring is preferably 0.5 to 72 hours, and the temperature at that time is preferably 10 to 40 ° C.
 ・工程A3-1~A3-3
 工程A3-1~A3-3は、プラズマトーチ内に窒素ガスを含有しない不活性ガスをプラズマガスとして供給し、熱プラズマ炎を発生する工程(A3-1)、プラズマトーチ内の熱プラズマ炎に、原子Aを含有する原料粉末を供給し、上記原料粉末を蒸発させ、気相の原子Aを得る工程(A3-2)、及び上記気相の原子Aを冷却し、原子Aからなる微粒子を得る工程(A3-3)である。それぞれの工程における態様は、上記工程A、工程B(遷移金属を含有する金属原料粉末に代えて、原子Aを含有する原料粉末を用いる)、及び工程C(遷移金属を含有する金属微粒子に代えて、微粒子化された原子Aを得る。)で説明したとおりである。
 なお、上記工程を経ることにより、原子Aが微粒子化され、工程Eにおいて原子Aが蒸発し易くなる。また、上記工程を経ることにより、原子Aを含有する原料粉末が含有する不純物(原子A以外の金属成分等)を除去することができる。
・ Process A3-1 to A3-3
In steps A3-1 to A3-3, an inert gas not containing nitrogen gas is supplied as a plasma gas in the plasma torch to generate a thermal plasma flame (A3-1), and a thermal plasma flame in the plasma torch is used. Supplying a raw material powder containing atoms A, evaporating the raw material powder to obtain gas phase atoms A (A3-2), and cooling the gas phase atoms A to form fine particles comprising atoms A This is the obtaining step (A3-3). The aspect in each process is the above-mentioned process A, process B (instead of a metal raw material powder containing a transition metal, using a raw material powder containing an atom A), and process C (substituting metal fine particles containing a transition metal) Thus, atomized atom A is obtained.
In addition, through the above process, the atom A is made into fine particles, and the atom A is easily evaporated in the process E. Moreover, the impurities (metal components other than the atom A) contained in the raw material powder containing the atom A can be removed through the above steps.
 (原子Aを含有する金属窒化物含有粒子の製造方法の好適態様)
 上記原子Aを含有する金属窒化物含有粒子の製造方法の好適態様としては、以下の工程を上から順に有する原子Aを含有する、金属窒化物含有粒子の製造方法が挙げられる。
・工程A:プラズマトーチ内に窒素ガスを含有しない不活性ガスをプラズマガスとして供給し、熱プラズマ炎を発生する工程。
・工程B:プラズマトーチ内の熱プラズマ炎に、遷移金属を含有する金属原料粉末を供給し、上記原料金属粉末を蒸発させ、気相の原料金属を得る工程。
・工程C:上記気相の原料金属を冷却し、遷移金属を含有する金属微粒子を得る工程。
・工程G:得られた粒子を分級する工程。
・工程A3-1:プラズマトーチ内に窒素ガスを含有しない不活性ガスをプラズマガスとして供給し、熱プラズマ炎を発生する工程
・工程A3-2:プラズマトーチ内の熱プラズマ炎に、原子Aを含有する原料粉末を供給し、上記原料粉末を蒸発させ、気相の原子Aを得る工程
・工程A3-3:上記気相の原子Aを冷却し、微粒子化された原子Aを得る工程
・工程G:得られた粒子を分級する工程。
・工程A2:遷移金属を含有する金属原料粉末(この場合、金属微粒子)に、原子A(この場合、微粒子化された原子A)を混合する工程。
・工程D:プラズマトーチ内に窒素ガスを含有する不活性ガスをプラズマガスとして供給し、熱プラズマ炎を発生する工程。
・工程E:プラズマトーチ内の熱プラズマ炎に、遷移金属を含有する金属微粒子を供給し、上記金属微粒子を蒸発させ、気相の原料金属を得る工程。
・工程F:上記気相の原料金属を冷却し、金属窒化物含有粒子を得る工程。
・工程G:得られた粒子を分級する工程。
・工程H:工程Gにおいて得られた金属窒化物含有粒子を、水蒸気及び窒素ガスの混合雰囲気に暴露し、窒化処理する工程。
 なお、上記一連の工程において、工程A~C、及び工程A3-1~A3-3の順序を入れ替えてもよい。すなわち、工程A3-1~A3-3の後、工程A~Cを実施してもよい。
(Preferred embodiment of method for producing metal nitride-containing particles containing atom A)
As a suitable aspect of the manufacturing method of the metal nitride containing particle | grains containing the said atom A, the manufacturing method of the metal nitride containing particle | grains containing the atom A which has the following processes in an order from the top is mentioned.
Step A: A step of supplying an inert gas not containing nitrogen gas as a plasma gas in the plasma torch to generate a thermal plasma flame.
Step B: A step of supplying a metal raw material powder containing a transition metal to a thermal plasma flame in the plasma torch and evaporating the raw material metal powder to obtain a gas phase raw material metal.
Step C: A step of cooling the gas phase raw material metal to obtain fine metal particles containing a transition metal.
-Process G: The process of classifying the obtained particle | grains.
Step A3-1: A step of supplying an inert gas containing no nitrogen gas into the plasma torch as a plasma gas to generate a thermal plasma flame. Step A3-2: Atom A is added to the thermal plasma flame in the plasma torch. Step / step A3-3 of supplying raw material powder and evaporating the raw material powder to obtain vapor phase atoms A: Step A3-3: Cooling vapor phase atoms A to obtain atomized atom A G: A step of classifying the obtained particles.
Step A2: A step of mixing atoms A (in this case, atomized atoms A) with a metal raw material powder (in this case, metal fine particles) containing a transition metal.
Step D: A step of supplying an inert gas containing nitrogen gas into the plasma torch as a plasma gas to generate a thermal plasma flame.
Step E: A step of supplying metal fine particles containing a transition metal to a thermal plasma flame in a plasma torch and evaporating the metal fine particles to obtain a gas phase raw material metal.
Step F: Step of cooling the gas phase raw material metal to obtain metal nitride-containing particles.
-Process G: The process of classifying the obtained particle | grains.
Step H: Step of exposing the metal nitride-containing particles obtained in Step G to a mixed atmosphere of water vapor and nitrogen gas to perform nitriding treatment.
In the series of steps, the order of steps A to C and steps A3-1 to A3-3 may be changed. That is, steps A to C may be performed after steps A3-1 to A3-3.
 上記の原子Aを含有する金属窒化物含有粒子の製造方法の好適態様によれば、金属原料粉末、及び原料粒子が含有する不純物を除去でき、かつ、所望の平均一次粒子径を有する金属窒化物含有粒子を製造することができる。
 不純物が除去される機序は必ずしも明確ではないが、本発明者は以下のとおり推測している。すなわち、遷移金属及び/又は原子Aはプラズマ処理によりイオン化され、上記イオンが冷却される際には、遷移金属、原子A及び不純物は、それぞれの融点を反映して微粒子化されるものと推測される。このとき、融点が低い原子は粒子化が速く、融点が高い原子は粒子化が遅くなる。そのため、上記のとおり、一度プラズマ処理された微粒子(工程B及びC、並びに工程A3-2及びA3-3)は単一成分(単一結晶)になりやすいものと推測される。上記により得られた単一成分の粒子を分級すれば、遷移金属の粒子及び/又は原子Aの粒子と、不純物の粒子の密度及び/粒径の違いにより、不純物の粒子を除去することができる。なお、上記分級は、例えばサイクロン等を用い、分級条件を適宜設定することで行うことができる。
According to the preferred embodiment of the method for producing the metal nitride-containing particles containing the atom A, the metal raw material powder and the metal nitride that can remove impurities contained in the raw material particles and have a desired average primary particle diameter Containing particles can be produced.
The mechanism by which impurities are removed is not necessarily clear, but the present inventor speculates as follows. That is, the transition metal and / or atom A is ionized by plasma treatment, and when the ions are cooled, the transition metal, atom A, and impurities are presumed to be finely divided to reflect their melting points. The At this time, the atomization with a low melting point is fast, and the atomization with a high melting point is slow. Therefore, as described above, it is presumed that the fine particles (steps B and C and steps A3-2 and A3-3) once plasma-treated are likely to become a single component (single crystal). If the single component particles obtained as described above are classified, the impurity particles can be removed depending on the density and / or particle size difference between the transition metal particles and / or the atom A particles and the impurity particles. . In addition, the said classification can be performed by setting a classification condition suitably using a cyclone etc., for example.
 (原料金属粉末及び原料粉末の精製)
 上記工程Bにおいて用いることのできる遷移金属を含有する金属原料粉末(以下、単に「金属原料粉末」という。)及び原子Aを含有する原料粉末(以下、単に「原料粉末」という。)としては、特に制限されないが、高純度のものであることが好ましい。金属原料粉末における遷移金属の含有量は、特に限定されないが、99.99%以上が好ましく、99.999%以上がより好ましい。また、原料粉末における原子Aの含有量も同様である。
(Purification of raw metal powder and raw material powder)
As the metal raw material powder containing transition metal (hereinafter simply referred to as “metal raw material powder”) and the raw material powder containing atom A (hereinafter simply referred to as “raw material powder”) that can be used in the above-mentioned step B, Although it does not restrict | limit in particular, It is preferable that it is a highly purified thing. The content of the transition metal in the metal raw material powder is not particularly limited, but is preferably 99.99% or more, and more preferably 99.999% or more. The same applies to the content of atom A in the raw material powder.
 上記金属原料粉末及び/又は原料粉末は、所望の遷移金属及び/又は原子A以外の原子を不純物として含有する場合がある。金属原料粉末に含有される不純物としては、ホウ素、アルミニウム、ケイ素、マンガン、鉄、ニッケル及び銀等が挙げられる。また、原料粉末に含有される不純物としては、金属元素等が挙げられる。 The metal raw material powder and / or the raw material powder may contain a desired transition metal and / or an atom other than the atom A as an impurity. Examples of impurities contained in the metal raw material powder include boron, aluminum, silicon, manganese, iron, nickel, and silver. Moreover, a metal element etc. are mentioned as an impurity contained in raw material powder.
 上記組成物は、金属窒化物含有粒子中における原子Aの含有量を、0.00005~10質量%とすることにより本発明の効果を奏する。そのため、金属原料粉末及び/又は原料粉末に意図しない上記不純物が含まれていると、原子Aの含有量を所定の範囲に制御することが困難なため、本発明の効果を得にくくなる。そのため、上記金属窒化物含有粒子の製造方法は、工程Bの前(工程A2を含有する場合は、工程A2の前)に、以下の工程A0を更に含有してもよい。
工程A0:金属原料粉末及び/又は原料粉末から不純物を除去する工程。
The composition exhibits the effects of the present invention by setting the content of atom A in the metal nitride-containing particles to 0.00005 to 10% by mass. For this reason, if the metal raw material powder and / or the raw material powder includes the unintended impurities, it is difficult to control the content of the atoms A within a predetermined range, and thus it is difficult to obtain the effects of the present invention. Therefore, the method for producing metal nitride-containing particles may further include the following step A0 before step B (when step A2 is included, before step A2).
Step A0: A step of removing impurities from the metal raw material powder and / or the raw material powder.
・工程A0
 工程A0において、原料金属粉末及び/又は原料粉末から不純物を除去する方法(分離精製方法)としては特に限定されないが、例えば、ニオブについて特開2012-211048号公報の段落0013~0030に記載された方法を用いることができ、その他の原料金属粉末及び/又は原料粉末についてもこれに準じた方法を用いることができる。
・ Process A0
In step A0, the raw metal powder and / or the method for removing impurities from the raw material powder (separation and purification method) is not particularly limited. A method similar to this can be used for other raw metal powders and / or raw material powders.
(金属窒化物含有粒子の被覆)
 上記の金属窒化物含有粒子は、無機化合物で被覆された金属窒化物含有粒子であってもよい。つまり、金属窒化物含有粒子と、金属窒化物含有粒子を被覆する、無機化合物を用いて形成される被覆層とを有する、被覆金属窒化物含有粒子であってもよい。無機化合物で被覆された金属窒化物含有粒子を含有する上記組成物は、より優れた分散安定性を有する。
 無機化合物としては特に限定されず、SiO、ZrO、TiO、GeO、Al、Y、及びP等の酸化物、水酸化アルミニウム、並びに、水酸化ジルコニウム等の水酸化物が挙げられる。なかでも、より薄い被膜を形成しやすく、かつ、より被覆率の高い被膜を形成しやすい点で、水酸化アルミニウムが好ましい。
 また、金属窒化物含有粒子の屈折率を制御することを意図した場合には、低屈折率被膜としては酸化ケイ素が好ましく、高屈折率被膜としては水酸化ジルコニウムが好ましい。
 金属窒化物含有粒子を無機化合物で被覆する方法については特に制限されないが、金属窒化物含有粒子の製造方法は、下記の無機化合物被覆工程を含有することが好ましい。
(Coating of metal nitride-containing particles)
The metal nitride-containing particles may be metal nitride-containing particles coated with an inorganic compound. That is, it may be a coated metal nitride-containing particle having metal nitride-containing particles and a coating layer formed using an inorganic compound that coats the metal nitride-containing particles. The composition containing metal nitride-containing particles coated with an inorganic compound has better dispersion stability.
The inorganic compound is not particularly limited, and is an oxide such as SiO 2 , ZrO 2 , TiO 2 , GeO 2 , Al 2 O 3 , Y 2 O 3 , and P 2 O 5 , aluminum hydroxide, and zirconium hydroxide. And the like. Among these, aluminum hydroxide is preferable in that it can easily form a thinner film and can easily form a film having a higher coverage.
When the refractive index of the metal nitride-containing particles is intended to be controlled, silicon oxide is preferable as the low refractive index film, and zirconium hydroxide is preferable as the high refractive index film.
The method for coating the metal nitride-containing particles with the inorganic compound is not particularly limited, but the method for producing the metal nitride-containing particles preferably includes the following inorganic compound coating step.
・無機化合物被覆工程
 無機化合物被覆工程は上記の金属窒化物含有粒子を酸化物及び/又は水酸化物により被覆する工程である。被覆する方法としては、特に制限されないが、例えば以下の湿式コーティング法等が挙げられる。
-Inorganic compound coating process An inorganic compound coating process is a process of coat | covering said metal nitride containing particle | grains with an oxide and / or a hydroxide. Although it does not restrict | limit especially as a method to coat | cover, For example, the following wet coating methods etc. are mentioned.
 第一の湿式コーティング法としては、まず、上記の金属窒化物含有粒子を水と混合してスラリーを作製する。次に上記スラリーに、Si,Zr,Ti,Ge,Al,Y,及び、Pからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含有する水溶性化合物(例えば珪ケイ酸ナトリウム)を反応させ、余分なアルカリイオンをデカンテーション及び/又はイオン交換樹脂等で除去した後に、スラリーを乾燥させ、酸化物で被覆された金属窒化物含有粒子を得る。 As the first wet coating method, first, the metal nitride-containing particles are mixed with water to prepare a slurry. Next, the slurry is reacted with a water-soluble compound (for example, sodium silicate) containing at least one selected from the group consisting of Si, Zr, Ti, Ge, Al, Y, and P, and an excess amount. After alkali ions are removed by decantation and / or ion exchange resin or the like, the slurry is dried to obtain metal nitride-containing particles coated with oxide.
 第二の湿式コーティング法としては、まず、上記の金属窒化物含有粒子をアルコール等の有機溶剤と混合してスラリーを作製する。次に、上記スラリー中でSi,Zr,Ti,Ge,Al,Y,及び、Pからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種を含有するアルコキシド等の有機金属化合物を生成し、上記スラリーを高温で焼成する。上記スラリーを高温で焼成するとゾルゲル反応が進行し、酸化物で被覆された金属窒化物含有粒子が得られる。 As the second wet coating method, first, the above metal nitride-containing particles are mixed with an organic solvent such as alcohol to prepare a slurry. Next, an organometallic compound such as an alkoxide containing at least one selected from the group consisting of Si, Zr, Ti, Ge, Al, Y, and P is generated in the slurry, and the slurry is heated at a high temperature. Bake. When the slurry is fired at a high temperature, a sol-gel reaction proceeds, and metal nitride-containing particles coated with an oxide are obtained.
 第三の湿式コーティング法としては、金属窒化物含有粒子の存在下で、尿素と塩化アルミニウムを用いて、イオン液体を含有するスラリーを形成する。このスラリーから金属窒化物含有粒子を取り出し、乾燥させ、その後、上記金属窒化物含有粒子を焼成することにより、水酸化アルミニウムを含有する水酸化物により被覆された金属窒化物含有粒子が得られる。 As a third wet coating method, a slurry containing an ionic liquid is formed using urea and aluminum chloride in the presence of metal nitride-containing particles. The metal nitride-containing particles are taken out from the slurry and dried, and then the metal nitride-containing particles are fired to obtain metal nitride-containing particles coated with a hydroxide containing aluminum hydroxide.
<金属窒化物含有粒子の物性>
(導電率)
 上記の金属窒化物含有粒子の導電率は、特に制限されないが、100×10~600×10S/mが好ましく、165×10~340×10S/mがより好ましく、165×10S/m~220×10S/mが更に好ましく、170~190×10S/mが特に好ましい。金属窒化物含有粒子の導電率の下限値が165×10S/m以上であって、上限値が340×10S/m以下だと、金属窒化物含有粒子を含有する組成物により得られる硬化膜はより優れた遮光性を有し、かつ、優れた電極の防食性を有する。
 なお、本明細書において、導電率とは、三菱化学アナリテック社製粉体抵抗測定システムMCP-PD51を用いて下記の方法により測定された導電率を意図する。
 まず、金属窒化物含有粒子を所定量、上記測定装置の測定容器に詰めた後に、加圧を開始して、圧力を0kN、1kN、5kN、10kN、20kNと変化させ粒子の体積抵抗率(ρ)を測定する。その測定結果から、体積抵抗率が圧力に依存しない条件における飽和体積抵抗率を求め、得られた飽和体積抵抗率を用いて導電率(σ)をσ=1/ρの関係式により算出する。なお、上記試験は室温環境下で行う。
<Physical properties of metal nitride-containing particles>
(conductivity)
The conductivity of the metal nitride-containing particles is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 × 10 4 to 600 × 10 4 S / m, more preferably 165 × 10 4 to 340 × 10 4 S / m, and 165 × 10 4 S / m to 220 × 10 4 S / m is more preferable, and 170 to 190 × 10 4 S / m is particularly preferable. When the lower limit value of the conductivity of the metal nitride-containing particles is 165 × 10 4 S / m or more and the upper limit value is 340 × 10 4 S / m or less, the composition containing the metal nitride-containing particles is obtained. The cured film to be obtained has a better light-shielding property and an excellent electrode anticorrosive property.
In this specification, the term “conductivity” means the conductivity measured by the following method using a powder resistance measurement system MCP-PD51 manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Analytech.
First, after a predetermined amount of metal nitride-containing particles are packed in a measurement container of the measurement apparatus, pressurization is started, and the pressure is changed to 0 kN, 1 kN, 5 kN, 10 kN, and 20 kN to change the volume resistivity (ρ ). From the measurement result, the saturated volume resistivity under the condition that the volume resistivity does not depend on the pressure is obtained, and the conductivity (σ) is calculated by the relational expression of σ = 1 / ρ using the obtained saturated volume resistivity. The above test is performed in a room temperature environment.
(平均一次粒子径)
 上記の金属窒化物含有粒子の平均一次粒子径は特に制限されないが、10~50nmが好ましく、10~30nmがより好ましく、10~27nmが更に好ましい。平均一次粒子径が27nm以下であると、金属窒化物含有粒子を含有する組成物において、金属窒化物含有粒子が沈降しにくくなり、結果として組成物は、より優れた経時安定性を有する。
 なお、本明細書において平均一次粒子径とは一次粒子の平均粒子径を意図し、平均一次粒子径は、下記の方法で測定した平均一次粒子径を意図する。
 試料:分散液(金属窒化物含有粒子25質量%、分散剤7.5質量%、PGMEA;プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート溶媒67.5質量%)を下記の実施例に記載の方法により調製し、得られた分散液をPGMEAで100倍希釈したのち、カーボン箔上に滴下し、乾燥させたもの。
 なお、分散剤としては、下記方法により得られる像において、金属窒化物含有粒子の一次粒子を認識できる程度に、金属窒化物含有粒子を分散させられる分散剤を用いる。上記分散剤の具体例としては、実施例に記載した分散剤が挙げられる。なお、一次粒子とは、凝集のない独立した粒子をいう。
 上記試料を、透過型電子顕微鏡(TEM:Transmission Electron Microscope)を用いて倍率2万倍で観察して像を得る。得られた像のなかの金属窒化物含有粒子のうち、一次粒子を選択し、上記一次粒子の面積を画像処理により算出する。次に、得られた面積を円に換算した場合の直径を算出する。この操作を4視野分、合計400個の金属窒化物含有粒子の一次粒子について行い、評価した円換算の直径を算術平均して、金属窒化物含有粒子の平均一次粒子径とする。
(Average primary particle size)
The average primary particle diameter of the metal nitride-containing particles is not particularly limited, but is preferably 10 to 50 nm, more preferably 10 to 30 nm, and still more preferably 10 to 27 nm. When the average primary particle size is 27 nm or less, in the composition containing the metal nitride-containing particles, the metal nitride-containing particles are less likely to settle, and as a result, the composition has better temporal stability.
In addition, in this specification, the average primary particle diameter intends the average particle diameter of primary particles, and the average primary particle diameter intends the average primary particle diameter measured by the following method.
Sample: A dispersion (25% by mass of metal nitride-containing particles, 7.5% by mass of dispersant, PGMEA; 67.5% by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate solvent) was prepared by the method described in the following examples, and obtained. The dispersion obtained was diluted 100 times with PGMEA and then dropped on a carbon foil and dried.
As the dispersant, a dispersant that can disperse the metal nitride-containing particles to the extent that the primary particles of the metal nitride-containing particles can be recognized in an image obtained by the following method is used. Specific examples of the dispersant include the dispersants described in Examples. The primary particles are independent particles without aggregation.
The sample is observed at a magnification of 20,000 using a transmission electron microscope (TEM) to obtain an image. Primary particles are selected from the metal nitride-containing particles in the obtained image, and the area of the primary particles is calculated by image processing. Next, the diameter when the obtained area is converted into a circle is calculated. This operation is performed for a total of 400 primary particles of metal nitride-containing particles for 4 fields of view, and the evaluated circle-equivalent diameter is arithmetically averaged to obtain the average primary particle size of the metal nitride-containing particles.
〔溶剤〕
 上記組成物は、溶剤を含有することが好ましい。溶剤としては、水、及び有機溶剤が挙げられる。なかでも上記組成物は有機溶剤を含有することが好ましい。
〔solvent〕
The composition preferably contains a solvent. Examples of the solvent include water and organic solvents. Especially, it is preferable that the said composition contains the organic solvent.
<有機溶剤>
 有機溶剤としては、特に制限されないが、例えば、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサン、エチレンジクロライド、テトラヒドロフラン、トルエン、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、エチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、アセチルアセトン、シクロヘキサノン、シクロペンタノン、ジアセトンアルコール、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、エチレングリコールエチルエーテルアセテート、エチレングリコールモノイソプロピルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノブチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシプロパノール、メトキシメトキシエタノール、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジエチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、3-メトキシプロピルアセテート、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、ジメチルスルホキシド、γ-ブチロラクトン、酢酸エチル、酢酸ブチル、乳酸メチル、及び乳酸エチル等が挙げられる。
<Organic solvent>
The organic solvent is not particularly limited. For example, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexane, ethylene dichloride, tetrahydrofuran, toluene, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl ether. , Acetylacetone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, diacetone alcohol, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol ethyl ether acetate, ethylene glycol monoisopropyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate, 3-methoxypropanol, methoxymethoxyethanol, diethyleneglycol Monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, diethylene glycol diethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, 3-methoxypropyl acetate, N, N-dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, γ-butyrolactone, acetic acid Examples include ethyl, butyl acetate, methyl lactate, and ethyl lactate.
 上記組成物は、有機溶剤を1種含有していてもよいし、2種以上の有機溶剤を含有していてもよいが、上記組成物の調液時に金属窒化物含有粒子の粒径変動を抑制できるという点から、2種以上の有機溶剤を含有することが好ましい。
 2種以上の有機溶剤を含有する場合には、上記の3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、エチルセロソルブアセテート、乳酸エチル、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、酢酸ブチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン、シクロペンタノン、エチルカルビトールアセテート、ブチルカルビトールアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、及びプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテートからなる群から選択される2種以上で構成されることが好ましい。
The composition may contain one kind of organic solvent or two or more kinds of organic solvents, but the particle size variation of the metal nitride-containing particles may be changed during the preparation of the composition. From the viewpoint that it can be suppressed, it is preferable to contain two or more organic solvents.
When two or more organic solvents are contained, the above-mentioned methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl lactate, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, butyl acetate, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, -It is preferably composed of two or more selected from the group consisting of heptanone, cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, and propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate.
 上記組成物が有機溶剤を含有する場合、有機溶剤の含有量としては、組成物の全質量に対し、10~90質量%であることが好ましく、60~90質量%であることがより好ましい。有機溶剤を2種類以上含有する場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 When the above composition contains an organic solvent, the content of the organic solvent is preferably 10 to 90% by mass, more preferably 60 to 90% by mass with respect to the total mass of the composition. When two or more types of organic solvents are contained, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<水>
 上記組成物は、水を含有してもよい。水は、意図的に添加されるものであってもよいし、上記組成物に含まれる各成分を添加することで不可避的に組成物中に含有されるものであってもよい。
 水の含有量は、組成物の全質量に対して、0.01質量以上であることが好ましく、0.05質量%以上であることがより好ましく、0.1質量%以上であることが更に好ましく、1質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.8質量%以下であることがより好ましく、0.7質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。水の含有量が上記範囲内にあると、硬化膜を作製した際にピンホールの発生が抑制され、さらに、硬化膜の耐湿性が向上する。また、水の含有量が上記範囲内にあると、組成物に含有されるパーティクルがより少なくなり易い。
<Water>
The composition may contain water. Water may be intentionally added, or may be inevitably contained in the composition by adding each component contained in the composition.
The water content is preferably 0.01% by mass or more, more preferably 0.05% by mass or more, and further preferably 0.1% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the composition. Preferably, it is 1% by mass or less, more preferably 0.8% by mass or less, and further preferably 0.7% by mass or less. When the water content is within the above range, the generation of pinholes is suppressed when a cured film is produced, and the moisture resistance of the cured film is further improved. Moreover, when the content of water is within the above range, the number of particles contained in the composition tends to be smaller.
 上記組成物が更に溶剤を含有する場合、組成物の固形分は10~40質量%であることが好ましい。組成物の固形分が上限値以下だと、組成物に含有されるパーティクル数がより少なくなり易い。また、組成物の固形分が下限値以上だと、組成物がより優れた塗布性を有する。
 また、金属窒化物含有粒子の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して20~70質量%であることが好ましい。金属窒化物含有粒子の含有量が、下限値以上であると、組成物は、より優れた経時安定性を有する。また、金属窒化物含有粒子の含有量が、上限値以下であると、組成物に含有されるパーティクル数がより少なくなり易く、かつ、より優れた解像性を有する硬化膜を作製できる組成物が得られる。
When the composition further contains a solvent, the solid content of the composition is preferably 10 to 40% by mass. When the solid content of the composition is not more than the upper limit value, the number of particles contained in the composition tends to be smaller. Moreover, when the solid content of the composition is not less than the lower limit value, the composition has more excellent coating properties.
The content of the metal nitride-containing particles is preferably 20 to 70% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. When the content of the metal nitride-containing particles is at least the lower limit value, the composition has more excellent temporal stability. In addition, if the content of the metal nitride-containing particles is not more than the upper limit value, the number of particles contained in the composition is likely to be smaller, and a composition capable of producing a cured film having more excellent resolution Is obtained.
〔分散剤〕
 上記組成物は、分散剤を含有することが好ましい。分散剤は、上記金属窒化物含有粒子等の黒色顔料の分散性向上に寄与する。本明細書において、分散剤と、後述するバインダー樹脂とは、異なる成分である。
 分散剤としては、例えば、公知の顔料分散剤を適宜選択して用いることができる。なかでも、高分子化合物が好ましい。
 分散剤としては、高分子分散剤〔例えば、ポリアミドアミンとその塩、ポリカルボン酸とその塩、高分子量不飽和酸エステル、変性ポリウレタン、変性ポリエステル、変性ポリ(メタ)アクリレート、(メタ)アクリル系共重合体、ナフタレンスルホン酸ホルマリン縮合物〕、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルリン酸エステル、ポリオキシエチレンアルキルアミン、及び、顔料誘導体等を挙げることができる。
 高分子化合物は、その構造から更に直鎖状高分子、末端変性型高分子、グラフト型高分子、及びブロック型高分子に分類することができる。
[Dispersant]
The composition preferably contains a dispersant. A dispersing agent contributes to the improvement of dispersibility of black pigments, such as the above-mentioned metal nitride content particles. In the present specification, the dispersant and the binder resin described later are different components.
As the dispersant, for example, a known pigment dispersant can be appropriately selected and used. Of these, polymer compounds are preferable.
Examples of the dispersant include polymer dispersants [for example, polyamidoamine and its salt, polycarboxylic acid and its salt, high molecular weight unsaturated acid ester, modified polyurethane, modified polyester, modified poly (meth) acrylate, (meth) acrylic type Copolymer, naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin condensate], polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate ester, polyoxyethylene alkyl amine, and pigment derivatives.
The polymer compounds can be further classified into linear polymers, terminal-modified polymers, graft polymers, and block polymers based on their structures.
<高分子化合物>
 高分子化合物は、金属窒化物含有粒子の好適態様である黒色顔料及び所望により併用する顔料等(以下、単に「黒色顔料等」ともいう。)の被分散体の表面に吸着し、被分散体の再凝集を防止するように作用する。そのため、顔料表面へのアンカー部位を含有する、末端変性型高分子、グラフト型高分子、及び、ブロック型高分子が好ましい。
 一方で、金属窒化物含有粒子の表面を改質することにより、金属窒化物含有粒子に対する高分子化合物の吸着性を促進させることもできる。
<Polymer compound>
The polymer compound is adsorbed on the surface of a dispersion of a black pigment, which is a preferred embodiment of the metal nitride-containing particles, and a pigment or the like to be used in combination (hereinafter also simply referred to as “black pigment etc.”). It acts to prevent re-aggregation. Therefore, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer, and a block polymer containing an anchor site to the pigment surface are preferable.
On the other hand, the adsorptivity of the polymer compound to the metal nitride-containing particles can be promoted by modifying the surface of the metal nitride-containing particles.
 高分子化合物は、グラフト鎖を含有する構造単位を含有することが好ましい。なお、本明細書において、「構造単位」とは「繰り返し単位」と同義である。
 このようなグラフト鎖を含有する構造単位を含有する高分子化合物は、グラフト鎖によって溶剤との親和性を有するために、黒色顔料等の着色顔料の分散性、及び、経時後の分散安定性(経時安定性)に優れるものである。また、グラフト鎖の存在により、グラフト鎖を含有する構造単位を含有する高分子化合物は重合性化合物又はその他の併用可能な樹脂等との親和性を有する。結果として、アルカリ現像で残渣を生じにくくなる。
 グラフト鎖が長くなると立体反発効果が高くなり黒色顔料等の分散性は向上する。一方、グラフト鎖が長すぎると黒色顔料等の着色顔料への吸着力が低下して、黒色顔料等の分散性は低下する傾向となる。このため、グラフト鎖は、水素原子を除いた原子数が40~10000であるものが好ましく、水素原子を除いた原子数が50~2000であるものがより好ましく、水素原子を除いた原子数が60~500であるものが更に好ましい。
 ここで、グラフト鎖とは、共重合体の主鎖の根元(主鎖から枝分かれしている基において主鎖に結合する原子)から、主鎖から枝分かれしている基の末端までを示す。
The polymer compound preferably contains a structural unit containing a graft chain. In this specification, “structural unit” is synonymous with “repeating unit”.
Since the polymer compound containing a structural unit containing such a graft chain has an affinity for a solvent by the graft chain, the dispersibility of a colored pigment such as a black pigment, and the dispersion stability after aging ( It has excellent stability over time. Further, due to the presence of the graft chain, the polymer compound containing the structural unit containing the graft chain has an affinity with a polymerizable compound or other resin that can be used in combination. As a result, it becomes difficult to produce a residue by alkali development.
When the graft chain becomes longer, the steric repulsion effect becomes higher and the dispersibility of the black pigment and the like is improved. On the other hand, if the graft chain is too long, the adsorptive power to colored pigments such as black pigments is lowered, and the dispersibility of black pigments and the like tends to be lowered. For this reason, the graft chain preferably has 40 to 10,000 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms, more preferably 50 to 2000 atoms excluding hydrogen atoms, and the number of atoms excluding hydrogen atoms. More preferred is 60-500.
Here, the graft chain means from the base of the main chain of the copolymer (the atom bonded to the main chain in a group branched from the main chain) to the end of the group branched from the main chain.
 グラフト鎖は、ポリマー構造を含有することが好ましく、このようなポリマー構造としては、例えば、ポリ(メタ)アクリレート構造(例えば、ポリ(メタ)アクリル構造)、ポリエステル構造、ポリウレタン構造、ポリウレア構造、ポリアミド構造、及び、ポリエーテル構造等を挙げることができる。
 グラフト鎖と溶剤との相互作用性を向上させ、それにより黒色顔料等の分散性を高めるために、グラフト鎖は、ポリエステル構造、ポリエーテル構造及びポリ(メタ)アクリレート構造からなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種を含有するグラフト鎖であることが好ましく、ポリエステル構造又はポリエーテル構造の少なくともいずれかを含有するグラフト鎖であることがより好ましい。
The graft chain preferably contains a polymer structure. Examples of such a polymer structure include a poly (meth) acrylate structure (for example, a poly (meth) acrylic structure), a polyester structure, a polyurethane structure, a polyurea structure, and a polyamide. Examples thereof include a structure and a polyether structure.
The graft chain was selected from the group consisting of a polyester structure, a polyether structure and a poly (meth) acrylate structure in order to improve the interaction between the graft chain and the solvent, thereby increasing the dispersibility of the black pigment and the like. A graft chain containing at least one kind is preferred, and a graft chain containing at least one of a polyester structure or a polyether structure is more preferred.
 このようなグラフト鎖を含有するマクロモノマーとしては、特に限定されないが、反応性二重結合性基を含有するマクロモノマーを好適に使用することができる。 The macromonomer containing such a graft chain is not particularly limited, but a macromonomer containing a reactive double bond group can be preferably used.
 高分子化合物が含有するグラフト鎖を含有する構造単位に対応し、高分子化合物の合成に好適に用いられる市販のマクロモノマーとしては、AA-6(商品名、東亜合成社製)、AA-10(商品名、東亜合成社製)、AB-6(商品名、東亜合成社製)、AS-6(商品名、東亜合成社製)、AN-6(商品名、東亜合成社製)、AW-6(商品名、東亜合成社製)、AA-714(商品名、東亜合成社製)、AY-707(商品名、東亜合成社製)、AY-714(商品名、東亜合成社製)、AK-5(商品名、東亜合成社製)、AK-30(商品名、東亜合成社製)、AK-32(商品名、東亜合成社製)、ブレンマーPP-100(商品名、日油社製)、ブレンマーPP-500(商品名、日油社製)、ブレンマーPP-800(商品名、日油社製)、ブレンマーPP-1000(商品名、日油社製)、ブレンマー55-PET-800(商品名、日油社製)、ブレンマーPME-4000(商品名、日油社製)、ブレンマーPSE-400(商品名、日油社製)、ブレンマーPSE-1300(商品名、日油社製)、ブレンマー43PAPE-600B(商品名、日油社製)等が用いられる。このなかでも、好ましくは、AA-6(商品名、東亜合成社製)、AA-10(商品名、東亜合成社製)、AB-6(商品名、東亜合成社製)、AS-6(商品名、東亜合成社製)、AN-6(商品名、東亜合成社製)、及び、ブレンマーPME-4000(商品名、日油社製)等が用いられる。 Corresponding to the structural unit containing a graft chain contained in the polymer compound, commercially available macromonomers suitably used for the synthesis of the polymer compound include AA-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), AA-10. (Trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AB-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AS-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AN-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AW -6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AA-714 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AY-707 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AY-714 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.) AK-5 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AK-30 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AK-32 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), Blemmer PP-100 (trade name, NOF Corporation) Blemmer PP-500 (trade name, manufactured by NOF Corporation), Blemmer PP-800 ( Product name, manufactured by NOF Corporation), BLEMMER PP-1000 (trade name, manufactured by NOF CORPORATION), BLEMMER 55-PET-800 (trade name, manufactured by NOF CORPORATION), BLEMMER PME-4000 (trade name, manufactured by NOF Corporation) ), BLEMMER PSE-400 (trade name, manufactured by NOF Corporation), BLEMMER PSE-1300 (trade name, manufactured by NOF Corporation), BLEMMER 43PAPE-600B (trade name, manufactured by NOF Corporation) and the like are used. Among these, AA-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AA-10 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AB-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AS-6 ( Trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), AN-6 (trade name, manufactured by Toa Gosei Co., Ltd.), Bremer PME-4000 (trade name, manufactured by NOF Corporation) and the like are used.
 上記分散剤は、ポリアクリル酸メチル、ポリメタクリル酸メチル、及び環状又は鎖状のポリエステルからなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の構造を含有することが好ましい。より好ましくは、上記分散剤は、ポリアクリル酸メチル、ポリメタクリル酸メチル、及び鎖状のポリエステルからなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の構造を含有する。更に好ましくは、上記分散剤は、ポリアクリル酸メチル、ポリメタクリル酸メチル、ポリカプロラクトン、及びポリバレロラクトンからなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の構造を含有する。分散剤は、一の分散剤中に上記構造を単独で含有するものであってもよいし、一の分散剤中にこれらの構造を複数含有するものであってもよい。
 ここで、ポリカプロラクトン構造とは、ε-カプロラクトンを開環した構造を繰り返し単位として含有するものをいう。ポリバレロラクトン構造とは、δ-バレロラクトンを開環した構造を繰り返し単位として含有するものをいう。
 ポリカプロラクトン構造を含有する分散剤の具体例としては、下記式(1)及び下記式(2)におけるj及びkが5であるものが挙げられる。また、ポリバレロラクトン構造を含有する分散剤の具体例としては、下記式(1)及び下記式(2)におけるj及びkが4であるものが挙げられる。
 ポリアクリル酸メチル構造を含有する分散剤の具体例としては、下記式(4)におけるXが水素原子であり、Rがメチル基であるものが挙げられる。また、ポリメタクリル酸メチル構造を含有する分散剤の具体例としては、下記式(4)におけるXがメチル基であり、Rがメチル基であるものが挙げられる。
The dispersing agent preferably contains at least one structure selected from the group consisting of polymethyl acrylate, polymethyl methacrylate, and cyclic or chain polyester. More preferably, the dispersant contains at least one structure selected from the group consisting of polymethyl acrylate, polymethyl methacrylate, and chain polyester. More preferably, the dispersant contains at least one structure selected from the group consisting of polymethyl acrylate, polymethyl methacrylate, polycaprolactone, and polyvalerolactone. The dispersing agent may contain the above structure alone in one dispersing agent, or may contain a plurality of these structures in one dispersing agent.
Here, the polycaprolactone structure means a structure containing a ring-opened structure of ε-caprolactone as a repeating unit. The polyvalerolactone structure means a structure containing a ring-opened structure of δ-valerolactone as a repeating unit.
Specific examples of the dispersant containing a polycaprolactone structure include those in which j and k are 5 in the following formula (1) and the following formula (2). Specific examples of the dispersant containing a polyvalerolactone structure include those in which j and k in the following formula (1) and the following formula (2) are 4.
Specific examples of the dispersant containing a polymethyl acrylate structure include those in which X 5 in the following formula (4) is a hydrogen atom and R 4 is a methyl group. Further, specific examples of the dispersant containing a polymethyl methacrylate structure include those in which X 5 in the following formula (4) is a methyl group and R 4 is a methyl group.
(グラフト鎖を含有する構造単位)
 高分子化合物は、グラフト鎖を含有する構造単位として、下記式(1)~式(4)のいずれかで表される構造単位を含有することが好ましく、下記式(1A)、下記式(2A)、下記式(3A)、下記式(3B)、及び下記(4)のいずれかで表される構造単位を含有することがより好ましい。
(Structural unit containing graft chain)
The polymer compound preferably contains a structural unit represented by any one of the following formulas (1) to (4) as a structural unit containing a graft chain. ), A structural unit represented by any one of the following formula (3A), the following formula (3B), and the following (4).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
 式(1)~式(4)において、W、W、W、及びWはそれぞれ独立に酸素原子又はNHを表す。W、W、W、及びWは酸素原子であることが好ましい。
 式(1)~式(4)において、X、X、X、X、及びXは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は1価の有機基を表す。X、X、X、X、及びXとしては、合成上の制約の観点からは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又は炭素数(炭素原子数)1~12のアルキル基であることが好ましく、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又はメチル基であることがより好ましく、メチル基が更に好ましい。
In the formulas (1) to (4), W 1 , W 2 , W 3 , and W 4 each independently represent an oxygen atom or NH. W 1 , W 2 , W 3 , and W 4 are preferably oxygen atoms.
In the formulas (1) to (4), X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , X 4 , and X 5 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group. X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , X 4 , and X 5 are each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms (the number of carbon atoms) from the viewpoint of synthesis constraints. Are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, more preferably a methyl group.
 式(1)~式(4)において、Y、Y、Y、及びYは、それぞれ独立に、2価の連結基を表し、連結基は特に構造上制約されない。Y、Y、Y、及びYで表される2価の連結基として、具体的には、下記の(Y-1)~(Y-21)の連結基等が例として挙げられる。下記に示した構造において、A、Bはそれぞれ、結合部位を意味する。下記に示した構造のうち、合成の簡便性から、(Y-2)又は(Y-13)であることがより好ましい。 In the formulas (1) to (4), Y 1 , Y 2 , Y 3 , and Y 4 each independently represent a divalent linking group, and the linking group is not particularly limited in structure. Specific examples of the divalent linking group represented by Y 1 , Y 2 , Y 3 , and Y 4 include the following (Y-1) to (Y-21) linking groups. . In the structure shown below, A and B each represent a binding site. Of the structures shown below, (Y-2) or (Y-13) is more preferable from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 式(1)~式(4)において、Z、Z、Z、及びZは、それぞれ独立に1価の有機基を表す。有機基の構造は、特に限定されないが、具体的には、アルキル基、水酸基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、ヘテロアリールオキシ基、アルキルチオエーテル基、アリールチオエーテル基、ヘテロアリールチオエーテル基、及びアミノ基等が挙げられる。これらの中でも、Z、Z、Z、及びZで表される有機基としては、特に分散性向上の観点から、立体反発効果を含有するものが好ましく、各々独立に炭素数5から24のアルキル基又はアルコキシ基が好ましく、その中でも、特に各々独立に炭素数5から24の分岐アルキル基、炭素数5から24の環状アルキル基、又は、炭素数5から24のアルコキシ基が好ましい。なお、アルコキシ基中に含まれるアルキル基は、直鎖状、分岐鎖状、及び、環状のいずれでもよい。 In the formulas (1) to (4), Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , and Z 4 each independently represent a monovalent organic group. The structure of the organic group is not particularly limited. Specifically, an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, a heteroarylthioether group, an amino group, and the like Is mentioned. Among these, as the organic group represented by Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , and Z 4 , those containing a steric repulsion effect are particularly preferable from the viewpoint of improving dispersibility, and each independently has 5 carbon atoms. Among them, a 24 alkyl group or an alkoxy group is preferable, and among them, a branched alkyl group having 5 to 24 carbon atoms, a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 24 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 5 to 24 carbon atoms is particularly preferable. The alkyl group contained in the alkoxy group may be linear, branched, or cyclic.
 式(1)~式(4)において、n、m、p、及びqは、それぞれ独立に、1から500の整数である。
 また、式(1)及び式(2)において、j及びkは、それぞれ独立に、2~8の整数を表す。式(1)及び式(2)におけるj及びkは、組成物の経時安定性及び現像性の観点から、4~6の整数が好ましく、5が最も好ましい。
In the formulas (1) to (4), n, m, p, and q are each independently an integer of 1 to 500.
In the formulas (1) and (2), j and k each independently represent an integer of 2 to 8. J and k in the formulas (1) and (2) are preferably integers of 4 to 6, and most preferably 5, from the viewpoint of the temporal stability and developability of the composition.
 式(3)中、Rは分岐又は直鎖のアルキレン基を表し、炭素数1~10のアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数2又は3のアルキレン基がより好ましい。pが2~500のとき、複数存在するRは互いに同じであっても異なっていてもよい。
 式(4)中、Rは水素原子又は1価の有機基を表し、この1価の有機基としては特に構造上限定はされない。Rとして好ましくは、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、又は、ヘテロアリール基が挙げられ、より好ましくは、水素原子、又はアルキル基である。Rがアルキル基である場合、アルキル基としては、炭素数1~20の直鎖状アルキル基、炭素数3~20の分岐状アルキル基、又は炭素数5~20の環状アルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~20の直鎖状アルキル基がより好ましく、炭素数1~6の直鎖状アルキル基が更に好ましい。式(4)において、qが2~500のとき、グラフト共重合体中に複数存在するX及びRは互いに同じであっても異なっていてもよい。
In formula (3), R 3 represents a branched or straight chain alkylene group, preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms. When p is 2 to 500, a plurality of R 3 may be the same or different from each other.
In the formula (4), R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and the monovalent organic group is not particularly limited in terms of structure. R 4 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. When R 4 is an alkyl group, the alkyl group is preferably a linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms, A linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a linear alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is still more preferable. In the formula (4), when q is 2 to 500, a plurality of X 5 and R 4 present in the graft copolymer may be the same or different from each other.
 また、高分子化合物は、2種以上の構造が異なる、グラフト鎖を含有する構造単位を含有することができる。即ち、高分子化合物の分子中に、互いに構造の異なる式(1)~式(4)で示される構造単位を含んでいてもよく、また、式(1)~式(4)においてn、m、p、及びqがそれぞれ2以上の整数を表す場合、式(1)及び式(2)においては、側鎖中にj及びkが互いに異なる構造を含んでいてもよく、式(3)及び式(4)においては、分子内に複数存在するR、R及びXは互いに同じであっても異なっていてもよい。 In addition, the polymer compound can contain structural units containing graft chains that differ in two or more structures. That is, the polymer compound molecule may contain structural units represented by formulas (1) to (4) having different structures, and n, m in formulas (1) to (4). , P, and q each represent an integer of 2 or more, in formula (1) and formula (2), j and k may contain structures different from each other in the side chain. In the formula (4), a plurality of R 3 , R 4 and X 5 present in the molecule may be the same or different from each other.
 式(1)で表される構造単位としては、組成物の経時安定性及び現像性の観点から、下記式(1A)で表される構造単位であることがより好ましい。
 また、式(2)で表される構造単位としては、組成物の経時安定性及び現像性の観点から、下記式(2A)で表される構造単位であることがより好ましい。
The structural unit represented by the formula (1) is more preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula (1A) from the viewpoint of temporal stability and developability of the composition.
Moreover, as a structural unit represented by Formula (2), it is more preferable that it is a structural unit represented by following formula (2A) from a viewpoint of temporal stability of a composition and developability.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 式(1A)中、X、Y、Z及びnは、式(1)におけるX、Y、Z及びnと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。式(2A)中、X、Y、Z及びmは、式(2)におけるX、Y、Z及びmと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 Wherein (1A), X 1, Y 1, Z 1 and n are as defined X 1, Y 1, Z 1 and n in Formula (1), and preferred ranges are also the same. Wherein (2A), X 2, Y 2, Z 2 and m are as defined X 2, Y 2, Z 2 and m in the formula (2), and preferred ranges are also the same.
 また、式(3)で表される構造単位としては、組成物の経時安定性及び現像性の観点から、下記式(3A)又は式(3B)で表される構造単位であることがより好ましい。 The structural unit represented by the formula (3) is more preferably a structural unit represented by the following formula (3A) or formula (3B) from the viewpoint of the temporal stability and developability of the composition. .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 式(3A)又は(3B)中、X、Y、Z及びpは、式(3)におけるX、Y、Z及びpと同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 Wherein (3A) or (3B), X 3, Y 3, Z 3 and p are as defined X 3, Y 3, Z 3 and p in formula (3), and preferred ranges are also the same.
 高分子化合物は、グラフト鎖を含有する構造単位として、式(1A)で表される構造単位を含有することがより好ましい。 More preferably, the polymer compound contains a structural unit represented by the formula (1A) as a structural unit containing a graft chain.
 高分子化合物において、グラフト鎖を含有する構造単位(例えば、上記式(1)~式(4)で表される構造単位)は、質量換算で、高分子化合物の総質量に対し2~90%の範囲で含まれることが好ましく、5~30%の範囲で含まれることがより好ましい。グラフト鎖を含有する構造単位がこの範囲内で含まれると、黒色顔料の分散性が高く、硬化膜を形成する際の現像性が良好である。 In the polymer compound, the structural unit containing a graft chain (for example, the structural unit represented by the above formulas (1) to (4)) is 2 to 90% in terms of mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer compound. Preferably, it is contained in the range of 5 to 30%. When the structural unit containing a graft chain is included within this range, the dispersibility of the black pigment is high, and the developability when forming a cured film is good.
(疎水性構造単位)
 また、高分子化合物は、グラフト鎖を含有する構造単位とは異なる(すなわち、グラフト鎖を含有する構造単位には相当しない)疎水性構造単位を含有することが好ましい。ただし、本明細書において、疎水性構造単位は、酸基(例えば、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、フェノール性水酸基等)を有さない構造単位である。
(Hydrophobic structural unit)
The polymer compound preferably contains a hydrophobic structural unit that is different from the structural unit containing the graft chain (that is, does not correspond to the structural unit containing the graft chain). However, in this specification, a hydrophobic structural unit is a structural unit which does not have an acid group (for example, a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, a phenolic hydroxyl group, etc.).
 疎水性構造単位は、好ましくは、ClogP値が1.2以上の化合物(モノマー)に由来する(対応する)構造単位であり、より好ましくは、ClogP値が1.2~8の化合物に由来する構造単位である。これにより、本発明の効果をより確実に発現することができる。 The hydrophobic structural unit is preferably a structural unit derived from (corresponding to) a compound (monomer) having a ClogP value of 1.2 or more, more preferably derived from a compound having a ClogP value of 1.2 to 8. A structural unit. Thereby, the effect of this invention can be expressed more reliably.
 ClogP値は、Daylight Chemical Information System, Inc.から入手できるプログラム“CLOGP”で計算された値である。このプログラムは、Hansch, Leoのフラグメントアプローチ(下記文献参照)により算出される“計算logP”の値を提供する。フラグメントアプローチは化合物の化学構造に基づいており、化学構造を部分構造(フラグメント)に分割し、そのフラグメントに対して割り当てられたlogP寄与分を合計することにより化合物のlogP値を推算している。その詳細は以下の文献に記載されている。本発明では、プログラムCLOGP v4.82により計算したClogP値を用いる。
 A. J. Leo, Comprehensive Medicinal Chemistry, Vol.4, C. Hansch, P. G. Sammnens, J. B. Taylor and C. A. Ramsden, Eds., p.295, Pergamon Press, 1990 C. Hansch & A. J. Leo. SUbstituent Constants For Correlation Analysis in Chemistry and Biology. John Wiley & Sons. A.J. Leo. Calculating logPoct from structure. Chem. Rev., 93, 1281-1306, 1993.
ClogP values are available from Daylight Chemical Information System, Inc. It is a value calculated by the program “CLOGP” available from This program provides the value of “computation logP” calculated by Hansch, Leo's fragment approach (see below). The fragment approach is based on the chemical structure of a compound, which divides the chemical structure into substructures (fragments) and estimates the logP value of the compound by summing the logP contributions assigned to that fragment. Details thereof are described in the following documents. In the present invention, the ClogP value calculated by the program CLOGP v4.82 is used.
A. J. et al. Leo, Comprehensive Medicinal Chemistry, Vol. 4, C.I. Hansch, P.A. G. Sammunens, J. et al. B. Taylor and C.M. A. Ramsden, Eds. , P. 295, Pergamon Press, 1990 C.I. Hansch & A. J. et al. Leo. Substituent Constants For Correlation Analysis in Chemistry and Biology. John Wiley & Sons. A. J. et al. Leo. Calculating logPoch from structure. Chem. Rev. , 93, 1281-1306, 1993.
 logPは、分配係数P(Partition Coefficient)の常用対数を意味し、ある有機化合物が油(一般的には1-オクタノール)と水の2相系の平衡でどのように分配されるかを定量的な数値として表す物性値であり、以下の式で示される。
  logP=log(Coil/Cwater)
 式中、Coilは油相中の化合物のモル濃度を、Cwaterは水相中の化合物のモル濃度を表す。
 logPの値が0をはさんでプラスに大きくなると油溶性が増し、マイナスで絶対値が大きくなると水溶性が増すことを意味し、有機化合物の水溶性と負の相関があり、有機化合物の親疎水性を見積るパラメータとして広く利用されている。
log P means the common logarithm of the partition coefficient P (Partition Coefficient), and quantitatively determines how an organic compound is distributed in the equilibrium of a two-phase system of oil (generally 1-octanol) and water. It is a physical property value expressed as a numerical value, and is represented by the following formula.
logP = log (Coil / Cwater)
In the formula, Coil represents the molar concentration of the compound in the oil phase, and Cwater represents the molar concentration of the compound in the aqueous phase.
When the logP value increases to a positive value across 0, the oil solubility increases. When the logP value increases to a negative value, the water solubility increases. There is a negative correlation with the water solubility of the organic compound. It is widely used as a parameter for estimating aqueous properties.
 高分子化合物は、疎水性構造単位として、下記一般式(i)~(iii)で表される単量体に由来の構造単位から選択された1種以上の構造単位を含有することが好ましい。 The polymer compound preferably contains one or more structural units selected from structural units derived from monomers represented by the following general formulas (i) to (iii) as hydrophobic structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
 上記式(i)~(iii)中、R、R、及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子等)、又は炭素数が1~6のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基等)を表す。
 R、R、及びRは、好ましくは水素原子、又は炭素数が1~3のアルキル基であり、より好ましくは水素原子又はメチル基である。R及びRは、水素原子であることが更に好ましい。
 Xは、酸素原子(-O-)又はイミノ基(-NH-)を表し、酸素原子であることが好ましい。
In the above formulas (i) to (iii), R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, etc.), or a carbon number of 1 Represents an alkyl group of ˜6 (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, etc.).
R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. R 2 and R 3 are more preferably a hydrogen atom.
X represents an oxygen atom (—O—) or an imino group (—NH—), and is preferably an oxygen atom.
 Lは、単結合又は2価の連結基である。2価の連結基としては、2価の脂肪族基(例えば、アルキレン基、置換アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、置換アルケニレン基、アルキニレン基、置換アルキニレン基)、2価の芳香族基(例えば、アリーレン基、置換アリーレン基)、2価の複素環基、酸素原子(-O-)、硫黄原子(-S-)、イミノ基(-NH-)、置換イミノ基(-NR31-、ここでR31は脂肪族基、芳香族基又は複素環基)、カルボニル基(-CO-)、及び、これらの組合せ等が挙げられる。 L is a single bond or a divalent linking group. As the divalent linking group, a divalent aliphatic group (for example, alkylene group, substituted alkylene group, alkenylene group, substituted alkenylene group, alkynylene group, substituted alkynylene group), divalent aromatic group (for example, arylene group) , Substituted arylene group), divalent heterocyclic group, oxygen atom (—O—), sulfur atom (—S—), imino group (—NH—), substituted imino group (—NR 31 —, where R 31 Includes an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or a heterocyclic group), a carbonyl group (—CO—), and combinations thereof.
 2価の脂肪族基は、環状構造又は分岐構造を有していてもよい。脂肪族基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~10が更に好ましい。脂肪族基は不飽和脂肪族基であっても飽和脂肪族基であってもよいが、飽和脂肪族基であることが好ましい。また、脂肪族基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基の例は、ハロゲン原子、芳香族基及び複素環基等が挙げられる。 The divalent aliphatic group may have a cyclic structure or a branched structure. The aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The aliphatic group may be an unsaturated aliphatic group or a saturated aliphatic group, but is preferably a saturated aliphatic group. Further, the aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aromatic group and a heterocyclic group.
 2価の芳香族基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。また、芳香族基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基の例は、ハロゲン原子、脂肪族基、芳香族基及び複素環基等が挙げられる。 The carbon number of the divalent aromatic group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 15, and still more preferably 6 to 10. The aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
 2価の複素環基は、複素環として5員環又は6員環を含有することが好ましい。複素環に他の複素環、脂肪族環又は芳香族環が縮合していてもよい。また、複素環基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基の例としては、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、オキソ基(=O)、チオキソ基(=S)、イミノ基(=NH)、置換イミノ基(=N-R32、ここでR32は脂肪族基、芳香族基又は複素環基)、脂肪族基、芳香族基、又は、複素環基が挙げられる。 The divalent heterocyclic group preferably contains a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring as the heterocyclic ring. Another heterocyclic ring, an aliphatic ring or an aromatic ring may be condensed with the heterocyclic ring. Further, the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of substituents include halogen atoms, hydroxy groups, oxo groups (═O), thioxo groups (═S), imino groups (═NH), substituted imino groups (═N—R 32 , where R 32 is a fatty acid Aromatic group, aromatic group or heterocyclic group), aliphatic group, aromatic group, or heterocyclic group.
 Lは、単結合、アルキレン基又はオキシアルキレン構造を含有する2価の連結基であることが好ましい。オキシアルキレン構造は、オキシエチレン構造又はオキシプロピレン構造であることがより好ましい。また、Lは、オキシアルキレン構造を2以上繰り返して含有するポリオキシアルキレン構造を含んでいてもよい。ポリオキシアルキレン構造としては、ポリオキシエチレン構造又はポリオキシプロピレン構造が好ましい。ポリオキシエチレン構造は、-(OCHCH)n-で表され、nは、2以上の整数が好ましく、2~10の整数であることがより好ましい。 L is preferably a single bond, an alkylene group or a divalent linking group containing an oxyalkylene structure. The oxyalkylene structure is more preferably an oxyethylene structure or an oxypropylene structure. L may also contain a polyoxyalkylene structure containing two or more oxyalkylene structures. The polyoxyalkylene structure is preferably a polyoxyethylene structure or a polyoxypropylene structure. The polyoxyethylene structure is represented by — (OCH 2 CH 2 ) n—, where n is preferably an integer of 2 or more, and more preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
 Zとしては、脂肪族基(例えば、アルキル基、置換アルキル基、不飽和アルキル基、置換不飽和アルキル基、)、芳香族基(例えば、アリール基、置換アリール基、アリーレン基、置換アリーレン基)、複素環基、又は、これらの組み合わせが挙げられる。これらの基には、酸素原子(-O-)、硫黄原子(-S-)、イミノ基(-NH-)、置換イミノ基(-NR31-、ここでR31は脂肪族基、芳香族基又は複素環基)、又は、カルボニル基(-CO-)が含まれていてもよい。 Z is an aliphatic group (eg, alkyl group, substituted alkyl group, unsaturated alkyl group, substituted unsaturated alkyl group), aromatic group (eg, aryl group, substituted aryl group, arylene group, substituted arylene group). , A heterocyclic group, or a combination thereof. These groups include an oxygen atom (—O—), a sulfur atom (—S—), an imino group (—NH—), a substituted imino group (—NR 31 —, wherein R 31 is an aliphatic group, an aromatic group Group or heterocyclic group) or a carbonyl group (—CO—) may be contained.
 脂肪族基は、環状構造又は分岐構造を有していてもよい。脂肪族基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~10が更に好ましい。脂肪族基には、更に環集合炭化水素基、架橋環式炭化水素基が含まれ、環集合炭化水素基の例としては、ビシクロヘキシル基、パーヒドロナフタレニル基、ビフェニル基、4-シクロヘキシルフェニル基等が含まれる。架橋環式炭化水素環として、例えば、ピナン、ボルナン、ノルピナン、ノルボルナン、ビシクロオクタン環(ビシクロ[2.2.2]オクタン環、及び、ビシクロ[3.2.1]オクタン環等)等の2環式炭化水素環、ホモブレダン、アダマンタン、トリシクロ[5.2.1.02,6]デカン、及び、トリシクロ[4.3.1.12,5]ウンデカン環等の3環式炭化水素環、並びに、テトラシクロ[4.4.0.12,5.17,10]ドデカン、及び、パーヒドロ-1,4-メタノ-5,8-メタノナフタレン環等の4環式炭化水素環等が挙げられる。また、架橋環式炭化水素環には、縮合環式炭化水素環、例えば、パーヒドロナフタレン(デカリン)、パーヒドロアントラセン、パーヒドロフェナントレン、パーヒドロアセナフテン、パーヒドロフルオレン、パーヒドロインデン、及び、パーヒドロフェナレン環等の5~8員シクロアルカン環が複数個縮合した縮合環も含まれる。
 脂肪族基は不飽和脂肪族基よりも飽和脂肪族基の方が好ましい。また、脂肪族基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基の例は、ハロゲン原子、芳香族基及び複素環基が挙げられる。ただし、脂肪族基は、置換基として酸基を有さない。
The aliphatic group may have a cyclic structure or a branched structure. The aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The aliphatic group further includes a ring assembly hydrocarbon group and a bridged cyclic hydrocarbon group. Examples of the ring assembly hydrocarbon group include a bicyclohexyl group, a perhydronaphthalenyl group, a biphenyl group, and 4-cyclohexyl. A phenyl group and the like are included. Examples of the bridged cyclic hydrocarbon ring include 2 such as pinane, bornane, norpinane, norbornane, bicyclooctane ring (bicyclo [2.2.2] octane ring, bicyclo [3.2.1] octane ring, etc.). Tricyclic hydrocarbon rings such as cyclic hydrocarbon rings, homobredan, adamantane, tricyclo [5.2.1.0 2,6 ] decane, and tricyclo [4.3.1.1 2,5 ] undecane rings , And tetracyclo [4.4.0.1 2,5 . 1 7, 10 ] dodecane, and tetracyclic hydrocarbon rings such as perhydro-1,4-methano-5,8-methanonaphthalene ring. The bridged cyclic hydrocarbon ring includes a condensed cyclic hydrocarbon ring, such as perhydronaphthalene (decalin), perhydroanthracene, perhydrophenanthrene, perhydroacenaphthene, perhydrofluorene, perhydroindene, and A condensed ring in which a plurality of 5- to 8-membered cycloalkane rings are condensed, such as a perhydrophenalene ring, is also included.
The aliphatic group is preferably a saturated aliphatic group rather than an unsaturated aliphatic group. Further, the aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group. However, the aliphatic group does not have an acid group as a substituent.
 芳香族基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。また、芳香族基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基の例は、ハロゲン原子、脂肪族基、芳香族基及び複素環基が挙げられる。ただし、芳香族基は、置換基として酸基を有さない。 The carbon number of the aromatic group is preferably 6-20, more preferably 6-15, and still more preferably 6-10. The aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group. However, the aromatic group does not have an acid group as a substituent.
 複素環基は、複素環として5員環又は6員環を含有することが好ましい。複素環に他の複素環、脂肪族環又は芳香族環が縮合していてもよい。また、複素環基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基の例としては、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、オキソ基(=O)、チオキソ基(=S)、イミノ基(=NH)、置換イミノ基(=N-R32、ここでR32は脂肪族基、芳香族基又は複素環基)、脂肪族基、芳香族基及び複素環基が挙げられる。ただし、複素環基は、置換基として酸基を有さない。 It is preferable that a heterocyclic group contains a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring as a heterocyclic ring. Another heterocyclic ring, an aliphatic ring or an aromatic ring may be condensed with the heterocyclic ring. Further, the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of substituents include halogen atoms, hydroxy groups, oxo groups (═O), thioxo groups (═S), imino groups (═NH), substituted imino groups (═N—R 32 , where R 32 is a fatty acid Aromatic group, aromatic group or heterocyclic group), aliphatic group, aromatic group and heterocyclic group. However, the heterocyclic group does not have an acid group as a substituent.
 上記式(iii)中、R、R、及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子等)、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基等)、Z、又はL-Zを表す。ここでL及びZは、上記におけるものと同義である。R、R、及びRとしては、水素原子、又は炭素数が1~3のアルキル基が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。 In the above formula (iii), R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (eg, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, etc.), or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. (For example, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, etc.), Z, or LZ. Here, L and Z are as defined above. R 4 , R 5 and R 6 are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
 上記一般式(i)で表される単量体として、R、R、及びRが水素原子又はメチル基であって、Lが単結合又はアルキレン基もしくはオキシアルキレン構造を含有する2価の連結基であって、Xが酸素原子又はイミノ基であって、Zが脂肪族基、複素環基又は芳香族基である化合物が好ましい。
 また、上記一般式(ii)で表される単量体として、Rが水素原子又はメチル基であって、Lがアルキレン基であって、Zが脂肪族基、複素環基又は芳香族基である化合物が好ましい。また、上記一般式(iii)で表される単量体として、R、R、及びRが水素原子又はメチル基であって、Zが脂肪族基、複素環基又は芳香族基である化合物が好ましい。
As the monomer represented by the general formula (i), R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 are a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and L is a single bond or an alkylene group or an oxyalkylene structure. A compound in which X is an oxygen atom or an imino group, and Z is an aliphatic group, a heterocyclic group or an aromatic group is preferable.
Further, as the monomer represented by the general formula (ii), R 1 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, L is an alkylene group, and Z is an aliphatic group, a heterocyclic group or an aromatic group. Is preferred. Further, as the monomer represented by the general formula (iii), R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 are a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and Z is an aliphatic group, a heterocyclic group, or an aromatic group. Certain compounds are preferred.
 式(i)~(iii)で表される代表的な化合物の例としては、アクリル酸エステル類、メタクリル酸エステル類、及び、スチレン類等から選ばれるラジカル重合性化合物が挙げられる。
 なお、式(i)~(iii)で表される代表的な化合物の例としては、特開2013-249417号公報の段落0089~0093に記載の化合物を参照でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
Examples of typical compounds represented by formulas (i) to (iii) include radically polymerizable compounds selected from acrylic acid esters, methacrylic acid esters, styrenes, and the like.
As examples of typical compounds represented by formulas (i) to (iii), compounds described in paragraphs 0089 to 0093 of JP2013-249417A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are described in the present specification. Incorporated into.
 高分子化合物において、疎水性構造単位は、質量換算で、高分子化合物の総質量に対し10~90%の範囲で含まれることが好ましく、20~80%の範囲で含まれることがより好ましい。含有量が上記範囲において十分なパターン形成が得られる。 In the polymer compound, the hydrophobic structural unit is preferably contained in a range of 10 to 90%, more preferably in a range of 20 to 80% with respect to the total mass of the polymer compound in terms of mass. When the content is in the above range, sufficient pattern formation can be obtained.
(黒色顔料等と相互作用を形成しうる官能基)
 高分子化合物は、黒色顔料等の着色顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基を導入することができる。ここで、高分子化合物は、黒色顔料等の着色顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基を含有する構造単位を更に含有することが好ましい。
 この黒色顔料等の着色顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基としては、例えば、酸基、塩基性基、配位性基、及び、反応性を有する官能基等が挙げられる。
 高分子化合物が、酸基、塩基性基、配位性基、又は、反応性を有する官能基を含有する場合、それぞれ、酸基を含有する構造単位、塩基性基を含有する構造単位、配位性基を含有する構造単位、又は、反応性を有する構造単位を含有することが好ましい。
 特に、高分子化合物が、更に、酸基として、カルボン酸基等のアルカリ可溶性基を含有することで、高分子化合物に、アルカリ現像によるパターン形成のための現像性を付与することができる。
 すなわち、高分子化合物にアルカリ可溶性基を導入することで、上記組成物は、黒色顔料等の着色顔料の分散に寄与する分散剤としての高分子化合物がアルカリ可溶性を含有することになる。このような高分子化合物を含有する組成物は、露光部の遮光性に優れたものとなり、且つ、未露光部のアルカリ現像性が向上される。
 また、高分子化合物が酸基を含有する構造単位を含有することにより、高分子化合物が溶剤となじみやすくなり、塗布性も向上する傾向となる。
 これは、酸基を含有する構造単位における酸基が黒色顔料等の着色顔料と相互作用しやすく、高分子化合物が黒色顔料等の着色顔料を安定的に分散すると共に、黒色顔料等の着色顔料を分散する高分子化合物の粘度が低くなっており、高分子化合物自体も安定的に分散されやすいためであると推測される。
(Functional group capable of forming interaction with black pigment)
The polymer compound can introduce a functional group capable of forming an interaction with a colored pigment such as a black pigment. Here, the polymer compound preferably further contains a structural unit containing a functional group capable of interacting with a colored pigment such as a black pigment.
Examples of the functional group capable of forming an interaction with the colored pigment such as the black pigment include an acid group, a basic group, a coordination group, and a reactive functional group.
When the polymer compound contains an acid group, a basic group, a coordination group, or a reactive functional group, the structural unit containing an acid group, the structural unit containing a basic group, and a coordination group, respectively. It is preferable to contain a structural unit containing a coordinate group or a structural unit having reactivity.
In particular, when the polymer compound further contains an alkali-soluble group such as a carboxylic acid group as the acid group, developability for pattern formation by alkali development can be imparted to the polymer compound.
That is, by introducing an alkali-soluble group into the polymer compound, in the composition, the polymer compound as a dispersant that contributes to the dispersion of a colored pigment such as a black pigment contains alkali-solubility. A composition containing such a polymer compound has excellent light-shielding properties in the exposed area, and the alkali developability in the unexposed area is improved.
Moreover, when a high molecular compound contains the structural unit containing an acid group, a high molecular compound becomes easy to become compatible with a solvent, and there exists a tendency for applicability | paintability to improve.
This is because the acid group in the structural unit containing an acid group easily interacts with a colored pigment such as a black pigment, and the polymer compound stably disperses the colored pigment such as a black pigment, and the colored pigment such as a black pigment. It is presumed that the viscosity of the polymer compound in which the polymer is dispersed is low, and the polymer compound itself is easily dispersed stably.
 ただし、酸基としてのアルカリ可溶性基を含有する構造単位は、上記のグラフト鎖を含有する構造単位と同一の構造単位であっても、異なる構造単位であってもよいが、酸基としてのアルカリ可溶性基を含有する構造単位は、上記の疎水性構造単位とは異なる構造単位である(すなわち、上記の疎水性構造単位には相当しない)。 However, the structural unit containing an alkali-soluble group as an acid group may be the same structural unit as the structural unit containing the graft chain or a different structural unit. The structural unit containing a soluble group is a structural unit different from the hydrophobic structural unit described above (that is, does not correspond to the hydrophobic structural unit described above).
 黒色顔料等の着色顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基である酸基としては、例えば、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、又は、フェノール性水酸基等があり、好ましくは、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、及び、リン酸基のうち少なくとも1種であり、より好ましいものは、黒色顔料等の着色顔料への吸着力が良好で、且つ、着色顔料の分散性が高い点で、カルボン酸基である。
 すなわち、高分子化合物は、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、及び、リン酸基のうち少なくとも1種を含有する構造単位を更に含有することが好ましい。
Examples of the acid group that is a functional group capable of forming an interaction with a colored pigment such as a black pigment include a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, or a phenolic hydroxyl group, and preferably a carboxylic acid Group, sulfonic acid group, and at least one of phosphoric acid groups, and more preferable is that the adsorptive power to a colored pigment such as a black pigment is good and the dispersibility of the colored pigment is high, Carboxylic acid group.
That is, the polymer compound preferably further contains a structural unit containing at least one of a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group.
 高分子化合物は、酸基を含有する構造単位を1種又は2種以上有してもよい。
 高分子化合物は、酸基を含有する構造単位を含有してもしなくてもよいが、含有する場合、酸基を含有する構造単位の含有量は、質量換算で、高分子化合物の総質量に対して、好ましくは5~80%であり、より好ましくは、アルカリ現像による画像強度のダメージ抑制という観点から、10~60%である。
The polymer compound may have one or more structural units containing an acid group.
The polymer compound may or may not contain a structural unit containing an acid group. However, when it is contained, the content of the structural unit containing an acid group is calculated by mass conversion to the total mass of the polymer compound. On the other hand, it is preferably 5 to 80%, and more preferably 10 to 60% from the viewpoint of suppressing damage of image strength due to alkali development.
 黒色顔料等の着色顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基である塩基性基としては、例えば、第1級アミノ基、第2級アミノ基、第3級アミノ基、N原子を含有するヘテロ環、及び、アミド基等があり、好ましいものは、黒色顔料等の着色顔料への吸着力が良好で、且つ、着色顔料の分散性が高い点で、第3級アミノ基である。高分子化合物は、これらの塩基性基を1種或いは2種以上、含有することができる。
 高分子化合物は、塩基性基を含有する構造単位を含有してもしなくてもよいが、含有する場合、塩基性基を含有する構造単位の含有量は、質量換算で、高分子化合物の総質量に対して、好ましくは0.01%以上50%以下であり、より好ましくは、現像性阻害抑制という観点から、0.01%以上30%以下である。
Examples of the basic group that is a functional group capable of forming an interaction with a colored pigment such as a black pigment include a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, a tertiary amino group, and a heterocyclic ring containing an N atom. And an amide group, and the preferred is a tertiary amino group from the viewpoint of good adsorbing power to a colored pigment such as a black pigment and high dispersibility of the colored pigment. The polymer compound can contain one or more of these basic groups.
The polymer compound may or may not contain a structural unit containing a basic group, but when it is contained, the content of the structural unit containing a basic group is the total amount of the polymer compound in terms of mass. Preferably it is 0.01% or more and 50% or less with respect to mass, More preferably, it is 0.01% or more and 30% or less from a viewpoint of developability inhibition suppression.
 黒色顔料等の着色顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基である配位性基、及び反応性を有する官能基としては、例えば、アセチルアセトキシ基、トリアルコキシシリル基、イソシアネート基、酸無水物、及び、酸塩化物等が挙げられる。好ましいものは、黒色顔料等の着色顔料への吸着力が良好で、着色顔料の分散性が高い点で、アセチルアセトキシ基である。高分子化合物は、これらの基を1種又は2種以上有してもよい。
 高分子化合物は、配位性基を含有する構造単位、又は、反応性を有する官能基を含有する構造単位を含有してもしなくてもよいが、含有する場合、これらの構造単位の含有量は、質量換算で、高分子化合物の総質量に対して、好ましくは10%以上80%以下であり、より好ましくは、現像性阻害抑制という観点から、20%以上60%以下である。
As a coordinating group that is a functional group capable of forming an interaction with a colored pigment such as a black pigment, and a functional group having reactivity, for example, an acetylacetoxy group, a trialkoxysilyl group, an isocyanate group, an acid anhydride, And acid chloride etc. are mentioned. A preferable one is an acetylacetoxy group in terms of good adsorbing power to a colored pigment such as a black pigment and high dispersibility of the colored pigment. The polymer compound may have one or more of these groups.
The polymer compound may or may not contain a structural unit containing a coordinating group or a structural unit containing a reactive functional group, but if it contains, the content of these structural units Is preferably 10% or more and 80% or less, and more preferably 20% or more and 60% or less, in terms of mass, in terms of suppression of developability inhibition.
 上記高分子化合物が、グラフト鎖以外に、黒色顔料等の着色顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基を含有する場合、上記の各種の黒色顔料等の着色顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基を含有していればよく、これらの官能基がどのように導入されているかは特に限定はされないが、高分子化合物は、下記一般式(iv)~(vi)で表される単量体に由来の構造単位から選択された1種以上の構造単位を含有することが好ましい。 When the polymer compound contains a functional group capable of interacting with a colored pigment such as a black pigment in addition to the graft chain, the functional group capable of interacting with a colored pigment such as the various black pigments described above. However, there is no particular limitation on how these functional groups are introduced, but the polymer compound is a monomer represented by the following general formulas (iv) to (vi). It is preferable to contain one or more structural units selected from the derived structural units.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 一般式(iv)~一般式(vi)中、R11、R12、及びR13は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子等)、又は炭素数が1~6のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基等)を表す。
 一般式(iv)~一般式(vi)中、R11、R12、及びR13は、好ましくは、それぞれ独立に水素原子、又は炭素数が1~3のアルキル基であり、より好ましくは、それぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基である。一般式(iv)中、R12及びR13は、それぞれ水素原子であることが特に好ましい。
In general formula (iv) to general formula (vi), R 11 , R 12 , and R 13 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (eg, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, etc.), or a carbon number Represents an alkyl group of 1 to 6 (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, etc.).
In general formula (iv) to general formula (vi), R 11 , R 12 and R 13 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, more preferably Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. In general formula (iv), R 12 and R 13 are each particularly preferably a hydrogen atom.
 一般式(iv)中のXは、酸素原子(-O-)又はイミノ基(-NH-)を表し、酸素原子であることが好ましい。
 また、一般式(v)中のYは、メチン基又は窒素原子を表す。
X 1 in the general formula (iv) represents an oxygen atom (—O—) or an imino group (—NH—), and is preferably an oxygen atom.
Y in the general formula (v) represents a methine group or a nitrogen atom.
 また、一般式(iv)~一般式(v)中のLは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基の例としては、2価の脂肪族基(例えば、アルキレン基、置換アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、置換アルケニレン基、アルキニレン基、及び置換アルキニレン基)、2価の芳香族基(例えば、アリーレン基、及び置換アリーレン基)、2価の複素環基、酸素原子(-O-)、硫黄原子(-S-)、イミノ基(-NH-)、置換イミノ結合(-NR31’-、ここでR31’は脂肪族基、芳香族基又は複素環基)、カルボニル結合(-CO-)、及び、これらの組合せ等が挙げられる。 In the general formulas (iv) to (v), L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include a divalent aliphatic group (for example, an alkylene group, a substituted alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a substituted alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, and a substituted alkynylene group), a divalent aromatic group (for example, , Arylene groups and substituted arylene groups), divalent heterocyclic groups, oxygen atoms (—O—), sulfur atoms (—S—), imino groups (—NH—), substituted imino bonds (—NR 31 ′ — Here, R 31 ′ includes an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or a heterocyclic group), a carbonyl bond (—CO—), and combinations thereof.
 2価の脂肪族基は、環状構造又は分岐構造を有していてもよい。脂肪族基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~10が更に好ましい。脂肪族基は不飽和脂肪族基よりも飽和脂肪族基の方が好ましい。また、脂肪族基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基の例としては、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、芳香族基及び複素環基が挙げられる。 The divalent aliphatic group may have a cyclic structure or a branched structure. The aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The aliphatic group is preferably a saturated aliphatic group rather than an unsaturated aliphatic group. Further, the aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
 2価の芳香族基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15がより好ましく、6~10が更に好ましい。また、芳香族基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基の例は、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、脂肪族基、芳香族基及び複素環基が挙げられる。 The carbon number of the divalent aromatic group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 15, and still more preferably 6 to 10. The aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
 2価の複素環基は、複素環として5員環又は6員環を含有することが好ましい。複素環に他の複素環、脂肪族環又は芳香族環のうち1つ以上が縮合していてもよい。また、複素環基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基の例としては、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、オキソ基(=O)、チオキソ基(=S)、イミノ基(=NH)、置換イミノ基(=N-R32、ここでR32は脂肪族基、芳香族基又は複素環基)、脂肪族基、芳香族基及び複素環基が挙げられる。 The divalent heterocyclic group preferably contains a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring as the heterocyclic ring. One or more heterocycles, aliphatic rings or aromatic rings may be condensed with the heterocycle. Further, the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of substituents include halogen atoms, hydroxy groups, oxo groups (═O), thioxo groups (═S), imino groups (═NH), substituted imino groups (═N—R 32 , where R 32 is a fatty acid Aromatic group, aromatic group or heterocyclic group), aliphatic group, aromatic group and heterocyclic group.
 Lは、単結合、アルキレン基又はオキシアルキレン構造を含有する2価の連結基であることが好ましい。オキシアルキレン構造は、オキシエチレン構造又はオキシプロピレン構造であることがより好ましい。また、Lは、オキシアルキレン構造を2以上繰り返して含有するポリオキシアルキレン構造を含んでいてもよい。ポリオキシアルキレン構造としては、ポリオキシエチレン構造又はポリオキシプロピレン構造が好ましい。ポリオキシエチレン構造は、-(OCHCH)n-で表され、nは、2以上の整数が好ましく、2~10の整数であることがより好ましい。 L 1 is preferably a single bond, an alkylene group or a divalent linking group containing an oxyalkylene structure. The oxyalkylene structure is more preferably an oxyethylene structure or an oxypropylene structure. L 1 may contain a polyoxyalkylene structure containing two or more oxyalkylene structures. The polyoxyalkylene structure is preferably a polyoxyethylene structure or a polyoxypropylene structure. The polyoxyethylene structure is represented by — (OCH 2 CH 2 ) n—, where n is preferably an integer of 2 or more, and more preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
 一般式(iv)~一般式(vi)中、Zは、グラフト鎖以外に黒色顔料等の着色顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基を表し、カルボン酸基、及び、第三級アミノ基であることが好ましく、カルボン酸基であることがより好ましい。 In general formula (iv) to general formula (vi), Z 1 represents a functional group capable of forming an interaction with a colored pigment such as a black pigment in addition to the graft chain, and includes a carboxylic acid group and a tertiary amino group. It is preferable that it is a carboxylic acid group.
 一般式(vi)中、R14、R15、及びR16は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素、塩素、臭素等)、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基等)、-Z、又はL-Zを表す。ここでL及びZは、上記におけるL及びZと同義であり、好ましい例も同様である。R14、R15、及びR16としては、それぞれ独立に水素原子、又は炭素数が1~3のアルキル基が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。 In general formula (vi), R 14 , R 15 , and R 16 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (eg, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, etc.), or an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, etc.), - Z 1, or an L 1 -Z 1. Wherein L 1 and Z 1 are the same meaning as L 1 and Z 1 in the above, it is the preferable examples. R 14 , R 15 and R 16 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
 一般式(iv)で表される単量体として、R11、R12、及びR13がそれぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基であって、Lがアルキレン基又はオキシアルキレン構造を含有する2価の連結基であって、Xが酸素原子又はイミノ基であって、Zがカルボン酸基である化合物が好ましい。
 また、一般式(v)で表される単量体として、R11が水素原子又はメチル基であって、Lがアルキレン基であって、Zがカルボン酸基であって、Yがメチン基である化合物が好ましい。
 更に、一般式(vi)で表される単量体として、R14、R15、及びR16がそれぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基であって、Lが単結合又はアルキレン基であって、Zがカルボン酸基である化合物が好ましい。
As the monomer represented by the general formula (iv), R 11 , R 12 , and R 13 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and L 1 contains an alkylene group or an oxyalkylene structure. A compound in which X 1 is an oxygen atom or an imino group and Z 1 is a carboxylic acid group is preferable.
Further, as the monomer represented by the general formula (v), R 11 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, L 1 is an alkylene group, Z 1 is a carboxylic acid group, and Y is methine. Compounds that are groups are preferred.
Furthermore, as the monomer represented by the general formula (vi), R 14 , R 15 , and R 16 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and L 1 is a single bond or an alkylene group, A compound in which Z 1 is a carboxylic acid group is preferred.
 以下に、一般式(iv)~一般式(vi)で表される単量体(化合物)の代表的な例を示す。
 単量体の例としては、メタクリル酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸、分子内に付加重合性二重結合及び水酸基を含有する化合物(例えば、メタクリル酸2-ヒドロキシエチル)とコハク酸無水物との反応物、分子内に付加重合性二重結合及び水酸基を含有する化合物とフタル酸無水物との反応物、分子内に付加重合性二重結合及び水酸基を含有する化合物とテトラヒドロキシフタル酸無水物との反応物、分子内に付加重合性二重結合及び水酸基を含有する化合物と無水トリメリット酸との反応物、分子内に付加重合性二重結合及び水酸基を含有する化合物とピロメリット酸無水物との反応物、アクリル酸、アクリル酸ダイマー、アクリル酸オリゴマー、マレイン酸、イタコン酸、フマル酸、4-ビニル安息香酸、ビニルフェノール、及び、4-ヒドロキシフェニルメタクリルアミド等が挙げられる。
The following are typical examples of monomers (compounds) represented by general formula (iv) to general formula (vi).
Examples of monomers include methacrylic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, a reaction containing a compound having an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule (for example, 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate) and succinic anhydride. Product, a reaction product of a compound containing an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule with phthalic anhydride, a compound containing an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule and tetrahydroxyphthalic anhydride Reaction product, a reaction product of a compound containing an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule with trimellitic anhydride, a compound containing an addition polymerizable double bond and a hydroxyl group in the molecule and pyromellitic anhydride Reaction products with acrylic acid, acrylic acid dimer, acrylic acid oligomer, maleic acid, itaconic acid, fumaric acid, 4-vinylbenzoic acid, vinylphenol, and 4 Hydroxyphenyl methacrylamide.
 黒色顔料等の着色顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基を含有する構造単位の含有量は、黒色顔料等の着色顔料との相互作用、経時安定性、及び現像液への浸透性の観点から、高分子化合物の全質量に対して、0.05質量%~90質量%が好ましく、1.0質量%~80質量%がより好ましく、10質量%~70質量%が更に好ましい。 The content of the structural unit containing a functional group capable of forming an interaction with a colored pigment such as a black pigment is from the viewpoint of interaction with the colored pigment such as a black pigment, stability over time, and permeability to a developer. The amount is preferably 0.05% by mass to 90% by mass, more preferably 1.0% by mass to 80% by mass, and still more preferably 10% by mass to 70% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer compound.
(その他の構造単位)
 更に、高分子化合物は、画像強度等の諸性能を向上する目的で、本発明の効果を損なわない限りにおいて、グラフト鎖を含有する構造単位、疎水性構造単位、及び、黒色顔料等の着色顔料と相互作用を形成しうる官能基を含有する構造単位とは異なる、種々の機能を有する他の構造単位(例えば、分散物に用いられる分散媒との親和性を有する官能基等を含有する構造単位)を更に有していてもよい。
 このような、他の構造単位としては、例えば、アクリロニトリル類、及び、メタクリロニトリル類等から選ばれるラジカル重合性化合物に由来の構造単位が挙げられる。
 高分子化合物は、これらの他の構造単位を1種或いは2種以上用いることができ、その含有量は、質量換算で、高分子化合物の総質量に対して、好ましくは0%以上80%以下であり、特に好ましくは、10%以上60%以下である。含有量が上記範囲において、十分なパターン形成性が維持される。
(Other structural units)
Furthermore, the polymer compound is a coloring unit such as a structural unit containing a graft chain, a hydrophobic structural unit, and a black pigment, for the purpose of improving various performances such as image strength, as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired. Different from structural units containing functional groups capable of forming interactions with other structural units having various functions (for example, structures containing functional groups having affinity with the dispersion medium used in the dispersion) (Unit) may further be included.
Examples of such other structural units include structural units derived from radically polymerizable compounds selected from acrylonitriles, methacrylonitriles, and the like.
The polymer compound may use one or more of these other structural units, and the content thereof is preferably 0% or more and 80% or less in terms of mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer compound. Especially preferably, it is 10% or more and 60% or less. When the content is in the above range, sufficient pattern formability is maintained.
(高分子化合物の物性)
 高分子化合物の酸価は、0mgKOH/g以上160mgKOH/g以下の範囲であることが好ましく、より好ましくは10mgKOH/g以上140mgKOH/g以下の範囲であり、更に好ましくは20mgKOH/g以上120mgKOH/g以下の範囲である。
 高分子化合物の酸価が160mgKOH/g以下であれば、硬化膜を形成する際の現像時におけるパターン剥離がより効果的に抑えられる。また、高分子化合物の酸価が10mgKOH/g以上であればアルカリ現像性がより良好となる。また、高分子化合物の酸価が20mgKOH/g以上であれば、黒色顔料等の着色顔料の沈降をより抑制でき、粗大粒子数をより少なくすることができ、組成物の経時安定性をより向上できる。
(Physical properties of polymer compounds)
The acid value of the polymer compound is preferably in the range of 0 mgKOH / g to 160 mgKOH / g, more preferably in the range of 10 mgKOH / g to 140 mgKOH / g, and still more preferably in the range of 20 mgKOH / g to 120 mgKOH / g. The range is as follows.
When the acid value of the polymer compound is 160 mgKOH / g or less, pattern peeling during development when forming a cured film is more effectively suppressed. Moreover, if the acid value of a high molecular compound is 10 mgKOH / g or more, alkali developability will become more favorable. Further, if the acid value of the polymer compound is 20 mgKOH / g or more, precipitation of colored pigments such as black pigments can be further suppressed, the number of coarse particles can be reduced, and the temporal stability of the composition is further improved. it can.
 高分子化合物の酸価は、例えば、高分子化合物中における酸基の平均含有量から算出することができる。また、高分子化合物の構成成分である酸基を含有する構造単位の含有量を変化させることで所望の酸価を有する樹脂を得ることができる。 The acid value of the polymer compound can be calculated, for example, from the average content of acid groups in the polymer compound. Moreover, the resin which has a desired acid value can be obtained by changing content of the structural unit containing the acid group which is a structural component of a high molecular compound.
 高分子化合物の重量平均分子量は、硬化膜を形成する際において、現像時のパターン剥離抑制と現像性の観点から、GPC(Gel Permeation Chromatography:ゲル浸透クロマトグラフィー)法によるポリスチレン換算値として、4,000以上300,000以下であることが好ましく、5,000以上200,000以下であることがより好ましく、6,000以上100,000以下であることが更に好ましく、10,000以上50,000以下であることが特に好ましい。
 GPC法は、HLC-8020GPC(東ソー製)を用い、カラムとしてTSKgel SuperHZM-H、TSKgel SuperHZ4000、TSKgel SuperHZ2000(東ソー製、4.6mmID×15cm)を、溶離液としてTHF(テトラヒドロフラン)を用いる方法に基づく。
When forming a cured film, the weight average molecular weight of the polymer compound is 4 in terms of polystyrene converted by GPC (Gel Permeation Chromatography) method from the viewpoint of pattern peeling inhibition during development and developability. It is preferably 000 or more and 300,000 or less, more preferably 5,000 or more and 200,000 or less, further preferably 6,000 or more and 100,000 or less, and 10,000 or more and 50,000 or less. It is particularly preferred that
The GPC method is based on a method using HLC-8020GPC (manufactured by Tosoh), TSKgel SuperHZM-H, TSKgel SuperHZ4000, TSKgel SuperHZ2000 (manufactured by Tosoh, 4.6 mm ID × 15 cm) as a column and THF (tetrahydrofuran) as an eluent. .
 高分子化合物は、公知の方法に基づいて合成でき、高分子化合物を合成する際に用いられる溶剤としては、例えば、エチレンジクロリド、シクロヘキサノン、メチルエチルケトン、アセトン、メタノール、エタノール、プロパノール、ブタノール、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、2-メトキシエチルアセテート、1-メトキシ-2-プロパノール、1-メトキシ-2-プロピルアセテート、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、ジメチルスルホキシド、トルエン、酢酸エチル、乳酸メチル、及び、乳酸エチル等が挙げられる。これらの溶剤は単独で用いても2種以上混合して用いてもよい。 The polymer compound can be synthesized based on a known method, and examples of the solvent used when synthesizing the polymer compound include ethylene dichloride, cyclohexanone, methyl ethyl ketone, acetone, methanol, ethanol, propanol, butanol, and ethylene glycol monomethyl. Ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, 2-methoxyethyl acetate, 1-methoxy-2-propanol, 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, toluene, Examples include ethyl acetate, methyl lactate, and ethyl lactate. These solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 高分子化合物の具体例としては、楠木化成社製「DA-7301」、BYKChemie社製「Disperbyk-101(ポリアミドアミン燐酸塩)、107(カルボン酸エステル)、110(酸基を含有する共重合物)、111(リン酸系分散剤)、130(ポリアミド)、161、162、163、164、165、166、170、190(高分子共重合物)」、「BYK-P104、P105(高分子量不飽和ポリカルボン酸)」、EFKA社製「EFKA4047、4050~4010~4165(ポリウレタン系)、EFKA4330~4340(ブロック共重合体)、4400~4402(変性ポリアクリレート)、5010(ポリエステルアミド)、5765(高分子量ポリカルボン酸塩)、6220(脂肪酸ポリエステル)、6745(フタロシアニン誘導体)、6750(アゾ顔料誘導体)」、味の素ファインテクノ社製「アジスパーPB821、PB822、PB880、PB881」、共栄社化学社製「フローレンTG-710(ウレタンオリゴマー)」、「ポリフローNo.50E、No.300(アクリル系共重合体)」、楠本化成社製「ディスパロンKS-860、873SN、874、#2150(脂肪族多価カルボン酸)、#7004(ポリエーテルエステル)、DA-703-50、DA-705、DA-725」、花王社製「デモールRN、N(ナフタレンスルホン酸ホルマリン重縮合物)、MS、C、SN-B(芳香族スルホン酸ホルマリン重縮合物)」、「ホモゲノールL-18(高分子ポリカルボン酸)」、「エマルゲン920、930、935、985(ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル)」、「アセタミン86(ステアリルアミンアセテート)」、日本ルーブリゾール製「ソルスパース5000(フタロシアニン誘導体)、22000(アゾ顔料誘導体)、13240(ポリエステルアミン)、3000、12000、17000、20000、27000(末端部に機能部を含有する高分子)、24000、28000、32000、38500(グラフト共重合体)」、日光ケミカルズ社製「ニッコールT106(ポリオキシエチレンソルビタンモノオレート)、MYS-IEX(ポリオキシエチレンモノステアレート)」、川研ファインケミカル製 ヒノアクトT-8000E等、信越化学工業製、オルガノシロキサンポリマーKP341、裕商製「W001:カチオン系界面活性剤」、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル等のノニオン系界面活性剤、「W004、W005、W017」等のアニオン系界面活性剤、森下産業製「EFKA-46、EFKA-47、EFKA-47EA、EFKAポリマー100、EFKAポリマー400、EFKAポリマー401、EFKAポリマー450」、サンノプコ製「ディスパースエイド6、ディスパースエイド8、ディスパースエイド15、ディスパースエイド9100」等の高分子分散剤、ADEKA製「アデカプルロニックL31、F38、L42、L44、L61、L64、F68、L72、P95、F77、P84、F87、P94、L101、P103、F108、L121、P-123」、及び三洋化成製「イオネット(商品名)S-20」等が挙げられる。また、アクリベースFFS-6752、アクリベースFFS-187、アクリキュア-RD-F8、及び、サイクロマーPを用いることもできる。
 また、両性樹脂の市販品としては、例えば、ビックケミー社製のDISPERBYK-130、DISPERBYK-140、DISPERBYK-142、DISPERBYK-145、DISPERBYK-180、DISPERBYK-187、DISPERBYK-191、DISPERBYK-2001、DISPERBYK-2010、DISPERBYK-2012、DISPERBYK-2025、BYK-9076、味の素ファインテクノ社製のアジスパーPB821、アジスパーPB822、及び、アジスパーPB881等が挙げられる。
 これらの高分子化合物は、単独で使用してもよく、2種以上を組み合わせて使用してもよい。
Specific examples of the polymer compound include “DA-7301” manufactured by Kashiwagi Kasei Co., Ltd., “Disperbyk-101 (polyamideamine phosphate), 107 (carboxylic acid ester)” manufactured by BYK Chemie, and 110 (copolymers containing acid groups). ), 111 (phosphate dispersant), 130 (polyamide), 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 170, 190 (polymer copolymer) ”,“ BYK-P104, P105 (non-high molecular weight) Saturated polycarboxylic acid) ”,“ EFKA 4047, 4050 to 4010 to 4165 (polyurethane) ”, EFKA 4330 to 4340 (block copolymer), 4400 to 4402 (modified polyacrylate), 5010 (polyesteramide), 5765 (polyester), manufactured by EFKA High molecular weight polycarboxylate), 6220 (fatty acid polyester) ), 6745 (phthalocyanine derivative), 6750 (azo pigment derivative), “Ajisper PB821, PB822, PB880, PB881” manufactured by Ajinomoto Fine Techno Co., Ltd., “Floren TG-710 (urethane oligomer)” manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd., “Polyflow” No. 50E, No. 300 (acrylic copolymer) ”,“ Disparon KS-860, 873SN, 874, # 2150 (aliphatic polycarboxylic acid), # 7004 (polyether ester), DA, manufactured by Enomoto Kasei Co., Ltd. -703-50, DA-705, DA-725 "," Demol RN, N (Naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin polycondensate), MS, C, SN-B (aromatic sulfonic acid formalin polycondensate) "manufactured by Kao Corporation "Homogenol L-18 (polymeric polycarboxylic acid)", "Emulgen 920" 930, 935, 985 (polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether) ”,“ acetamine 86 (stearylamine acetate) ”,“ Solsperse 5000 (phthalocyanine derivative), 22000 (azo pigment derivative), 13240 (polyesteramine), manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol, 3000, 12000, 17000, 20000, 27000 (polymers containing a functional part at the end), 24000, 28000, 32000, 38500 (graft copolymer) ”,“ Nikkor T106 (polyoxyethylene sorbitan mono) manufactured by Nikko Chemicals Olate), MYS-IEX (polyoxyethylene monostearate) ”, Kawaken Fine Chemical's Hinoact T-8000E, Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., Organosiloxane Polymer KP341, Yusho W001: Cationic surfactant ", polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate Nonionic surfactants such as sorbitan fatty acid esters, anionic surfactants such as “W004, W005, W017”, “EFKA-46, EFKA-47, EFKA-47EA, EFKA polymer 100, EFKA polymer 400 manufactured by Morishita Sangyo , EFKA Polymer 401, EFKA Polymer 450 ", Sannopco" Disperse Aid 6, Disperse Aid 8, Disperse Aid 15, Disper Polymer dispersants such as Suede 9100, manufactured by ADEKA "Adeka Pluronic L31, F38, L42, L44, L61, L64, F68, L72, P95, F77, P84, F87, P94, L101, P103, F108, L121, P -123 ", Sanyo Kasei" Ionet (trade name) S-20 ", and the like. Also, Acrybase FFS-6752, Acrybase FFS-187, Acrycure-RD-F8, and Cyclomer P can be used.
Commercially available amphoteric resins include, for example, DISPERBYK-130, DISPERBYK-140, DISPERBYK-142, DISPERBYK-145, DISPERBYK-180, DISPERBYK-187, DISPERBYK-191, DISPERBYK-2001, DISPERB manufactured by BYK Chemie. 2010, DISPERBYK-2012, DISPERBYK-2025, BYK-9976, Ajisper PB821, Azisper PB822, Azisper PB881, etc. manufactured by Ajinomoto Fine Techno Co., Ltd.
These polymer compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 なお、高分子化合物の具体例としては、特開2013-249417号公報の段落0127~0129に記載の高分子化合物を参照でき、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 As specific examples of the polymer compound, reference can be made to the polymer compounds described in paragraphs 0127 to 0129 of JP2013-249417A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 また、分散剤としては、上記の高分子化合物以外に、特開2010-106268号公報の段落0037~0115(対応するUS2011/0124824の段落0075~0133欄)のグラフト共重合体が使用でき、これらの内容は援用でき、本明細書に組み込まれる。
 また、上記以外にも、特開2011-153283号公報の段落0028~0084(対応するUS2011/0279759の段落0075~0133欄)の酸性基が連結基を介して結合してなる側鎖構造を含有する構成成分を含有する高分子化合物が使用でき、これらの内容は援用でき、本明細書に組み込まれる。
As the dispersant, in addition to the above-described polymer compound, graft copolymers described in JP-A 2010-106268, paragraphs 0037 to 0115 (corresponding to columns 0075 to 0133 in US2011 / 0124824) can be used. Is incorporated herein by reference.
In addition to the above, it contains a side chain structure in which acidic groups in paragraphs 0028 to 0084 of JP 2011-153283 A (corresponding to paragraphs 0075 to 0133 of US2011 / 0279759) are bonded via a linking group. High molecular compounds containing the constituents to be used can be used, the contents of which can be incorporated and incorporated herein.
 組成物が分散剤を含有する場合において、分散剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.1~50質量%が好ましく、0.5~30質量%がより好ましい。
 分散剤は、1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上併用してもよい。2種以上を併用する場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
In the case where the composition contains a dispersant, the content of the dispersant is preferably from 0.1 to 50% by mass, more preferably from 0.5 to 30% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
A dispersing agent may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used together 2 or more types. When using 2 or more types together, it is preferable that a total amount becomes the said range.
 上記組成物において、上記金属窒化物含有粒子に対する上記分散剤の質量比(すなわち(組成物中の分散剤の含有量)/(組成物中の金属窒化物含有粒子の含有量)以下、「D/P」ともいう。)は、0.05~0.30であることが好ましく、0.10~0.30であることがより好ましく、0.12~0.30であることが更に好ましい。上記D/Pが0.30以下であると、上記組成物により形成された硬化膜はより優れた解像性を有する。上記D/Pが0.05以上であると、上記組成物は、より優れた経時安定性を有する。 In the composition, the mass ratio of the dispersant to the metal nitride-containing particles (that is, (the content of the dispersant in the composition) / (the content of the metal nitride-containing particles in the composition) or less, “D / P ”) is preferably 0.05 to 0.30, more preferably 0.10 to 0.30, and still more preferably 0.12 to 0.30. When the D / P is 0.30 or less, the cured film formed from the composition has more excellent resolution. When the D / P is 0.05 or more, the composition has more excellent temporal stability.
 上記組成物において、上記原子Aに対する上記分散剤の質量比(すなわち、(組成物中の分散剤の含有量)/(組成物中のFe原子の含有量))の下限値は、0.8以上が好ましく、1.0以上がより好ましく、1.5以上が更に好ましい。上限値は、270以下が好ましく、150以下がより好ましく、50以下が更に好ましい。
 原子Aに対する分散剤の質量比が上記範囲内にあることで、上記組成物は、より優れた本発明の効果を有する。特に、上記質量比が1.5~50の範囲内にあることで、上記組成物は、更に優れた本発明の効果を有する。この理由は明らかではないが、組成物中の原子Aと分散剤とが相互に作用し、パターニング性(硬化性及び解像性)に影響を与えていることによると考えられる。
In the composition, the lower limit value of the mass ratio of the dispersant to the atom A (that is, (content of dispersant in the composition) / (content of Fe atom in the composition)) is 0.8. The above is preferable, 1.0 or more is more preferable, and 1.5 or more is more preferable. The upper limit is preferably 270 or less, more preferably 150 or less, and even more preferably 50 or less.
The said composition has the effect of this invention more excellent because the mass ratio of the dispersing agent with respect to the atom A exists in the said range. In particular, when the mass ratio is in the range of 1.5 to 50, the composition has a further excellent effect of the present invention. The reason for this is not clear, but it is considered that the atom A in the composition and the dispersing agent interact with each other and affect patterning properties (curability and resolution).
 上記組成物において、上記原子Aに対する下記重合性化合物の質量比(すなわち、(組成物中の重合性化合物の含有量)/(組成物中の原子Aの含有量))の下限値は、0.7以上が好ましく、0.85以上がより好ましく、1.0以上が更に好ましい。上限値は、50以下が好ましく、11以下がより好ましく、7.0以下が更に好ましい。
 原子Aに対する重合性化合物の質量比が上記範囲内にあることで、組成物はより優れた本発明の効果を有する。上記含有割合が1.0~7.0の範囲内にあることで、組成物は更に優れた本発明の効果を有する。この理由は明らかではないが、組成物中の原子Aと重合性化合物とが相互に作用し、パターニング性(硬化性及び解像性)に影響を与えていることによると考えられる。
In the composition, the lower limit of the mass ratio of the following polymerizable compound to the atom A (that is, (content of polymerizable compound in the composition) / (content of atom A in the composition)) is 0. 0.7 or more, preferably 0.85 or more, and more preferably 1.0 or more. The upper limit is preferably 50 or less, more preferably 11 or less, and even more preferably 7.0 or less.
A composition has the effect of this invention more excellent because the mass ratio of the polymeric compound with respect to the atom A exists in the said range. When the content ratio is in the range of 1.0 to 7.0, the composition has a further excellent effect of the present invention. The reason for this is not clear, but it is considered that the atom A in the composition and the polymerizable compound interact with each other and affect the patternability (curability and resolution).
〔バインダー樹脂〕
 上記組成物は、バインダー樹脂を含有することが好ましい。
 バインダー樹脂としては、線状有機ポリマーを用いることが好ましい。このような線状有機ポリマーとしては、公知のものを任意に使用することができる。好ましくは、水現像又は弱アルカリ水現像を可能とするために、水又は弱アルカリ水に可溶性又は膨潤性である線状有機ポリマーが選択される。なかでも、バインダー樹脂としては、アルカリ可溶性樹脂(アルカリ可溶性を促進する基を含有する樹脂)が特に好ましい。
 バインダー樹脂としては、線状有機ポリマーであって、分子(好ましくは、(メタ)アクリル系共重合体、又は、スチレン系共重合体を主鎖とする分子)中に少なくとも1つのアルカリ可溶性を促進する基を含有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂の中から適宜選択することができる。耐熱性の観点からは、ポリヒドロキシスチレン系樹脂、ポリシロキサン系樹脂、(メタ)アクリル系樹脂、(メタ)アクリルアミド系樹脂、(メタ)アクリル/(メタ)アクリルアミド共重合体樹脂、エポキシ系樹脂及びポリイミド系樹脂が好ましく、現像性制御の観点からは、(メタ)アクリル系樹脂、(メタ)アクリルアミド系樹脂、(メタ)アクリル/(メタ)アクリルアミド共重合体樹脂又はポリイミド系樹脂がより好ましい。
 アルカリ可溶性を促進する基(以下、酸基ともいう)としては、例えば、カルボン酸基、リン酸基、スルホン酸基、及び、フェノール性水酸基等が挙げられる。なかでも、有機溶剤に可溶で弱アルカリ水溶液により現像可能なものが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸由来の構造単位を含有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂がより好ましいものとして挙げられる。これら酸基は、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。
[Binder resin]
The composition preferably contains a binder resin.
As the binder resin, a linear organic polymer is preferably used. As such a linear organic polymer, a well-known thing can be used arbitrarily. Preferably, a linear organic polymer that is soluble or swellable in water or weak alkaline water is selected to enable water development or weak alkaline water development. Especially, as binder resin, alkali-soluble resin (resin containing group which accelerates | stimulates alkali solubility) is especially preferable.
The binder resin is a linear organic polymer that promotes at least one alkali solubility in the molecule (preferably a molecule having a (meth) acrylic copolymer or styrene copolymer as the main chain). It can be suitably selected from alkali-soluble resins containing a group to be used. From the viewpoint of heat resistance, polyhydroxystyrene resins, polysiloxane resins, (meth) acrylic resins, (meth) acrylamide resins, (meth) acrylic / (meth) acrylamide copolymer resins, epoxy resins and Polyimide resins are preferred, and (meth) acrylic resins, (meth) acrylamide resins, (meth) acryl / (meth) acrylamide copolymer resins, or polyimide resins are more preferred from the viewpoint of control of developability.
Examples of the group that promotes alkali solubility (hereinafter also referred to as an acid group) include a carboxylic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group. Especially, what is soluble in an organic solvent and can be developed with a weak alkaline aqueous solution is preferable, and an alkali-soluble resin containing a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid is more preferable. These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 バインダー樹脂としては、例えば、側鎖にカルボン酸基を含有するラジカル重合体が挙げられる。側鎖にカルボン酸基を含有するラジカル重合体としては、例えば、特開昭59-44615号、特公昭54-34327号、特公昭58-12577号、特公昭54-25957号、特開昭54-92723号、特開昭59-53836号、及び、特開昭59-71048号に記載されているものが挙げられる。側鎖にカルボン酸基を含有するラジカル重合体としては、カルボン酸基を含有するモノマーを単独又は共重合させた樹脂、酸無水物を含有するモノマーを単独又は共重合させて得た酸無水物ユニットを、加水分解、ハーフエステル化又はハーフアミド化させた樹脂、及び、エポキシ樹脂を不飽和モノカルボン酸及び酸無水物で変性させたエポキシアクリレート等が挙げられる。
 カルボン酸基を含有するモノマーとしては、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、マレイン酸、フマル酸、及び、4-カルボキシルスチレン等が挙げられる。また、側鎖にカルボン酸基を含有する酸性セルロース誘導体も例として挙げられる。
 酸無水物を含有するモノマーとしては、無水マレイン酸等が挙げられる。この他に水酸基を含有する重合体に環状酸無水物を付加させたもの等が有用である。
 また、酸基を含有するアセタール変性ポリビニルアルコール系バインダー樹脂が、欧州特許第993966号、欧州特許第1204000号、及び、特開2001-318463号等の各公報に記載されている。酸基を含有するアセタール変性ポリビニルアルコール系バインダー樹脂は、膜強度、及び、現像性のバランスに優れており、好適である。
 更に、水溶性線状有機ポリマーとして、ポリビニルピロリドン、又はポリエチレンオキサイド等が有用である。また、硬化皮膜の強度を上げるために、アルコール可溶性ナイロン、及び、2,2-ビス-(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)-プロパンとエピクロロヒドリンとの反応物であるポリエーテル等も有用である。
 また、国際公開第2008/123097号に記載のポリイミド樹脂も有用である。
Examples of the binder resin include a radical polymer containing a carboxylic acid group in the side chain. Examples of the radical polymer containing a carboxylic acid group in the side chain include, for example, JP-A-59-44615, JP-B-54-34327, JP-B-58-12777, JP-B-54-25957, JP-A-54-54. -92723, JP-A-59-53836, and JP-A-59-71048. As a radical polymer containing a carboxylic acid group in the side chain, a resin obtained by singly or copolymerizing a monomer containing a carboxylic acid group, an acid anhydride obtained by singly or copolymerizing a monomer containing an acid anhydride Examples thereof include resins obtained by hydrolysis, half-esterification or half-amidation of units, and epoxy acrylates obtained by modifying epoxy resins with unsaturated monocarboxylic acids and acid anhydrides.
Examples of the monomer containing a carboxylic acid group include acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, and 4-carboxylstyrene. Moreover, the acidic cellulose derivative which contains a carboxylic acid group in a side chain is also mentioned as an example.
Examples of the monomer containing an acid anhydride include maleic anhydride. In addition, a polymer containing a hydroxyl group added to a polymer containing a hydroxyl group is useful.
Further, acetal-modified polyvinyl alcohol-based binder resins containing acid groups are described in European Patent Nos. 993966, 1204000 and JP-A 2001-318463. An acetal-modified polyvinyl alcohol-based binder resin containing an acid group is suitable because of its excellent balance of film strength and developability.
Furthermore, polyvinyl pyrrolidone or polyethylene oxide is useful as the water-soluble linear organic polymer. In addition, in order to increase the strength of the cured film, alcohol-soluble nylon and polyether which is a reaction product of 2,2-bis- (4-hydroxyphenyl) -propane and epichlorohydrin are also useful.
In addition, a polyimide resin described in International Publication No. 2008/123097 is also useful.
 特に、これらの中でも、〔ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート/(メタ)アクリル酸/必要に応じてその他の付加重合性ビニルモノマー〕共重合体、及び〔アリル(メタ)アクリレート/(メタ)アクリル酸/必要に応じてその他の付加重合性ビニルモノマー〕共重合体は、膜強度、感度、及び、現像性のバランスに優れており、好適である。
 市販品としては、例えばアクリベースFF-187、FF-426(藤倉化成社製)、アクリキュア-RD-F8(日本触媒)、及び、ダイセルオルネクス製サイクロマーP(ACA)230AA等が挙げられる。
In particular, among these, [benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid / other addition-polymerizable vinyl monomer as required] copolymer, and [allyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid / necessary The other addition-polymerizable vinyl monomer] copolymer is suitable because it is excellent in the balance of film strength, sensitivity, and developability.
Examples of commercially available products include Acrybase FF-187, FF-426 (manufactured by Fujikura Kasei Co., Ltd.), Acrycure-RD-F8 (Nippon Shokubai), and Daicel Ornex Cyclomer P (ACA) 230AA.
 バインダー樹脂の製造には、例えば、公知のラジカル重合法による方法を適用することができる。ラジカル重合法でアルカリ可溶性樹脂を製造する際の温度、圧力、ラジカル開始剤の種類及びその量、並びに、溶剤の種類等々の重合条件は、当業者において容易に設定可能である。 For the production of the binder resin, for example, a known radical polymerization method can be applied. Those skilled in the art can easily set the polymerization conditions such as temperature, pressure, the type and amount of the radical initiator, the type of solvent, and the like when producing the alkali-soluble resin by the radical polymerization method.
 また、バインダー樹脂として、グラフト鎖を含有する構造単位と、酸基(アルカリ可溶性基)を含有する構造単位と、を含有するポリマーを使用することも好ましい。
 グラフト鎖を含有する構造単位の定義は、上記の分散剤が含有するグラフト鎖を含有する構造単位と同義であり、また好適範囲も同様である。
 酸基としては、例えば、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基、又は、フェノール性水酸基等があり、好ましくは、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、及び、リン酸基のうち少なくとも1種であり、より好ましいものは、カルボン酸基である。
It is also preferable to use a polymer containing a structural unit containing a graft chain and a structural unit containing an acid group (alkali-soluble group) as the binder resin.
The definition of the structural unit containing the graft chain is synonymous with the structural unit containing the graft chain contained in the dispersant, and the preferred range is also the same.
Examples of the acid group include a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, a phosphoric acid group, or a phenolic hydroxyl group, and preferably at least one of a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group. More preferred is a carboxylic acid group.
<酸基を含有する構造単位>
 酸基を含有する構造単位としては、下記一般式(vii)~一般式(ix)で表される単量体に由来の構造単位から選択された1種以上の構造単位を含有することが好ましい。
<Structural unit containing acid group>
The structural unit containing an acid group preferably contains at least one structural unit selected from structural units derived from monomers represented by the following general formulas (vii) to (ix). .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
 一般式(vii)~一般式(ix)中、R21、R22、及びR23は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子等)、又は炭素数が1~6のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基等)を表す。
 一般式(vii)~一般式(ix)中、R21、R22、及びR23は、好ましくは、それぞれ独立に水素原子、又は炭素数が1~3のアルキル基であり、より好ましくは、それぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基である。一般式(vii)中、R21及びR23は、それぞれ水素原子であることが特に好ましい。
In the general formulas (vii) to (ix), R 21 , R 22 , and R 23 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (eg, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, etc.), or a carbon number Represents an alkyl group of 1 to 6 (for example, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, etc.).
In general formula (vii) to general formula (ix), R 21 , R 22 , and R 23 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and more preferably Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group. In general formula (vii), R 21 and R 23 are each particularly preferably a hydrogen atom.
 一般式(vii)中のXは、酸素原子(-O-)又はイミノ基(-NH-)を表し、酸素原子であることが好ましい。
 また、一般式(viii)中のYは、メチン基又は窒素原子を表す。
X 2 in the general formula (vii) represents an oxygen atom (—O—) or an imino group (—NH—), and is preferably an oxygen atom.
Y in the general formula (viii) represents a methine group or a nitrogen atom.
 また、一般式(vii)~一般式(ix)中のLは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。2価の連結基の例としては、2価の脂肪族基(例えば、アルキレン基、置換アルキレン基、アルケニレン基、置換アルケニレン基、アルキニレン基、及び置換アルキニレン基)、2価の芳香族基(例えば、アリーレン基、及び置換アリーレン基)、2価の複素環基、酸素原子(-O-)、硫黄原子(-S-)、イミノ基(-NH-)、置換イミノ結合(-NR41’-、ここでR41’は脂肪族基、芳香族基又は複素環基)、カルボニル結合(-CO-)、及び、これらの組合せ等が挙げられる。 In the general formulas (vii) to (ix), L 2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Examples of the divalent linking group include a divalent aliphatic group (for example, an alkylene group, a substituted alkylene group, an alkenylene group, a substituted alkenylene group, an alkynylene group, and a substituted alkynylene group), a divalent aromatic group (for example, , Arylene group, and substituted arylene group), divalent heterocyclic group, oxygen atom (—O—), sulfur atom (—S—), imino group (—NH—), substituted imino bond (—NR 41 ′ — Here, R 41 ′ includes an aliphatic group, an aromatic group or a heterocyclic group), a carbonyl bond (—CO—), and combinations thereof.
 2価の脂肪族基は、環状構造又は分岐構造を有していてもよい。脂肪族基の炭素数は、1~20が好ましく、1~15がより好ましく、1~10が更に好ましい。脂肪族基は不飽和脂肪族基よりも飽和脂肪族基の方が好ましい。また、脂肪族基は、置換基を有していてもよい。置換基の例としては、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、芳香族基及び複素環基が挙げられる。 The divalent aliphatic group may have a cyclic structure or a branched structure. The aliphatic group preferably has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The aliphatic group is preferably a saturated aliphatic group rather than an unsaturated aliphatic group. Further, the aliphatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
 2価の芳香族基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~15が更に好ましく、6~10が最も好ましい。また、芳香族基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基の例は、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、脂肪族基、芳香族基及び複素環基が挙げられる。 The carbon number of the divalent aromatic group is preferably 6 to 20, more preferably 6 to 15, and most preferably 6 to 10. The aromatic group may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, an aliphatic group, an aromatic group, and a heterocyclic group.
 2価の複素環基は、複素環として5員環又は6員環を含有することが好ましい。複素環に他の複素環、脂肪族環又は芳香族環のうち1つ以上が縮合していてもよい。また、複素環基は置換基を有していてもよい。置換基の例としては、ハロゲン原子、ヒドロキシ基、オキソ基(=O)、チオキソ基(=S)、イミノ基(=NH)、置換イミノ基(=N-R42、ここでR42は脂肪族基、芳香族基又は複素環基)、脂肪族基、芳香族基及び複素環基が挙げられる。 The divalent heterocyclic group preferably contains a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring as the heterocyclic ring. One or more heterocycles, aliphatic rings or aromatic rings may be condensed with the heterocycle. Further, the heterocyclic group may have a substituent. Examples of substituents include halogen atoms, hydroxy groups, oxo groups (═O), thioxo groups (═S), imino groups (═NH), substituted imino groups (═N—R 42 , where R 42 represents a fatty acid Aromatic group, aromatic group or heterocyclic group), aliphatic group, aromatic group and heterocyclic group.
 Lは、単結合、アルキレン基又はオキシアルキレン構造を含有する2価の連結基であることが好ましい。オキシアルキレン構造は、オキシエチレン構造又はオキシプロピレン構造であることがより好ましい。また、Lは、オキシアルキレン構造を2以上繰り返して含有するポリオキシアルキレン構造を含んでいてもよい。ポリオキシアルキレン構造としては、ポリオキシエチレン構造又はポリオキシプロピレン構造が好ましい。ポリオキシエチレン構造は、-(OCHCH)n-で表され、nは、2以上の整数が好ましく、2~10の整数であることがより好ましい。 L 2 is preferably a single bond, an alkylene group or a divalent linking group containing an oxyalkylene structure. The oxyalkylene structure is more preferably an oxyethylene structure or an oxypropylene structure. L 2 may also contain a polyoxyalkylene structure containing two or more oxyalkylene structures. The polyoxyalkylene structure is preferably a polyoxyethylene structure or a polyoxypropylene structure. The polyoxyethylene structure is represented by — (OCH 2 CH 2 ) n—, where n is preferably an integer of 2 or more, and more preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
 一般式(vii)~一般式(ix)中、Zは、酸基であり、カルボン酸基であることが好ましい。 In the general formulas (vii) to (ix), Z 2 is an acid group, preferably a carboxylic acid group.
 一般式(ix)中、R24、R25、及びR26は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素、塩素、臭素等)、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基(例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基等)、-Z、又はL-Zを表す。ここでL及びZは、上記におけるL及びZと同義であり、好ましい例も同様である。R24、R25、及びR26としては、それぞれ独立に水素原子、又は炭素数が1~3のアルキル基が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。 In the general formula (ix), R 24 , R 25 , and R 26 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom (eg, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, etc.), an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (eg, methyl group, ethyl group, propyl group, etc.), - represents a Z 2, or L 2 -Z 2. Here L 2 and Z 2 has the same meaning as L 2 and Z 2 in the above, and preferred examples are also the same. R 24 , R 25 and R 26 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
 一般式(vii)で表される単量体として、R21、R22、及びR23がそれぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基であって、Lがアルキレン基又はオキシアルキレン構造を含有する2価の連結基であって、Xが酸素原子又はイミノ基であって、Zがカルボン酸基である化合物が好ましい。
 また、一般式(vii)で表される単量体として、R21が水素原子又はメチル基であって、Lがアルキレン基であって、Zがカルボン酸基であって、Yがメチン基である化合物が好ましい。
 更に、一般式(ix)で表される単量体として、R24、R25、及びR26がそれぞれ独立に水素原子又はメチル基であって、Zがカルボン酸基である化合物が好ましい。
As the monomer represented by the general formula (vii), R 21 , R 22 , and R 23 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and L 2 contains an alkylene group or an oxyalkylene structure. A compound in which X 2 is an oxygen atom or an imino group and Z 2 is a carboxylic acid group is preferred.
Further, as the monomer represented by the general formula (vii), R 21 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, L 2 is an alkylene group, Z 2 is a carboxylic acid group, and Y is methine. Compounds that are groups are preferred.
Furthermore, as the monomer represented by the general formula (ix), a compound in which R 24 , R 25 , and R 26 are each independently a hydrogen atom or a methyl group and Z 2 is a carboxylic acid group is preferable.
 上記バインダー樹脂は、上記のグラフト鎖を含有する構造単位を含有する分散剤と同様の方法により合成することができ、また、その好ましい酸価、重量平均分子量も同じである。 The binder resin can be synthesized by the same method as the dispersant containing the structural unit containing the graft chain, and the preferred acid value and weight average molecular weight are the same.
 上記バインダー樹脂は、酸基を含有する構造単位を1種又は2種以上有してもよい。
 酸基を含有する構造単位の含有量は、質量換算で、上記バインダー樹脂の総質量に対して、好ましくは5~95%であり、より好ましくは、アルカリ現像による画像強度のダメージ抑制という観点から、10~90%である。
The binder resin may have one or more structural units containing an acid group.
The content of the structural unit containing an acid group is preferably 5 to 95%, in terms of mass, with respect to the total mass of the binder resin, and more preferably from the viewpoint of suppressing damage to image strength due to alkali development. 10 to 90%.
 上記組成物におけるバインダー樹脂の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.1~30質量%であることが好ましく、0.3~25質量%であることがより好ましい。
 バインダー樹脂は、1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上併用してもよい。2種以上を併用する場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
The content of the binder resin in the composition is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass and more preferably 0.3 to 25% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
Binder resin may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used together 2 or more types. When using 2 or more types together, it is preferable that a total amount becomes the said range.
 金属窒化物含有粒子に対するバインダー樹脂の質量比(すなわち、(組成物中のバインダー樹脂の含有量)/(組成物中の金属酸化物含有粒子の含有量))は、0.3以下が好ましく、0.25以下がより好ましく、0.20以下が更に好ましい。なお、下限値については特に制限されないが、一般に0.01以上であり、0.02以上が好ましく、0.07以上がより好ましい。
 上限値が、0.25以下であると、組成物はより優れた経時安定性を有し、0.014以上であると、組成物を用いて得られる硬化膜はより優れた解像性を有する。
The mass ratio of the binder resin to the metal nitride-containing particles (that is, (the content of the binder resin in the composition) / (the content of the metal oxide-containing particles in the composition)) is preferably 0.3 or less, 0.25 or less is more preferable and 0.20 or less is still more preferable. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but is generally 0.01 or more, preferably 0.02 or more, and more preferably 0.07 or more.
When the upper limit is 0.25 or less, the composition has more excellent temporal stability, and when it is 0.014 or more, the cured film obtained using the composition has more excellent resolution. Have.
〔重合性化合物〕
 上記組成物は、重合性化合物を含有することが好ましい。
 重合性化合物は、エチレン性不飽和結合を含有する基を1個以上含有する化合物が好ましく、2個以上含有する化合物がより好ましく、3個以上含有することが更に好ましく、5個以上含有することが特に好ましい。上限は、たとえば、15個以下である。エチレン性不飽和結合を含有する基としては、例えば、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、及び、(メタ)アクリロイル基等が挙げられる。
(Polymerizable compound)
The composition preferably contains a polymerizable compound.
The polymerizable compound is preferably a compound containing at least one group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, more preferably a compound containing 2 or more, further preferably containing 3 or more, and containing 5 or more. Is particularly preferred. The upper limit is 15 or less, for example. Examples of the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
 重合性化合物は、例えば、モノマー、プレポリマー、オリゴマー、及び、これらの混合物、並びに、これらの多量体等の化学的形態のいずれであってもよい。モノマーが好ましい。
 重合性化合物の分子量は、100~3000が好ましく、250~1500がより好ましい。
 重合性化合物は、3~15官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが好ましく、3~6官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることがより好ましい。
 モノマー、プレポリマーの例としては、不飽和カルボン酸(例えば、アクリル酸、メタクリル酸、イタコン酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸、マレイン酸等)やそのエステル類、アミド類、並びにこれらの多量体が挙げられ、好ましくは、不飽和カルボン酸と脂肪族多価アルコール化合物とのエステル、及び不飽和カルボン酸と脂肪族多価アミン化合物とのアミド類、並びにこれらの多量体である。また、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、メルカプト基等の求核性置換基を含有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル或いはアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能イソシアネート類或いはエポキシ類との付加反応物、及び、上記不飽和カルボン酸エステル或いはアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能のカルボン酸との脱水縮合反応物等も好適に使用される。また、イソシアネート基、エポキシ基等の親電子性置換基を含有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル或いはアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との反応物、ハロゲン基やトシルオキシ基等の脱離性置換基を含有する不飽和カルボン酸エステル或いはアミド類と、単官能若しくは多官能のアルコール類、アミン類、チオール類との反応物も好適である。また、上記の不飽和カルボン酸の代わりに、不飽和ホスホン酸、スチレン等のビニルベンゼン誘導体、ビニルエーテル、アリルエーテル等に置き換えた化合物群を使用することも可能である。
 これらの具体的な化合物としては、特開2009-288705号公報の段落0095~0108に記載されている化合物を本発明においても好適に用いることができる。
The polymerizable compound may be in any of chemical forms such as a monomer, a prepolymer, an oligomer, a mixture thereof, and a multimer thereof. Monomers are preferred.
The molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100 to 3000, and more preferably 250 to 1500.
The polymerizable compound is preferably a 3 to 15 functional (meth) acrylate compound, more preferably a 3 to 6 functional (meth) acrylate compound.
Examples of monomers and prepolymers include unsaturated carboxylic acids (eg, acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, itaconic acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, maleic acid, etc.), esters, amides, and multimers thereof Preferred are esters of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyhydric alcohol compounds, amides of unsaturated carboxylic acids and aliphatic polyvalent amine compounds, and multimers thereof. Further, an addition reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide containing a nucleophilic substituent such as a hydroxy group, an amino group or a mercapto group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional isocyanate or epoxy, and A dehydration condensation reaction product of a saturated carboxylic acid ester or amide with a monofunctional or polyfunctional carboxylic acid is also preferably used. Also, a reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide containing an electrophilic substituent such as an isocyanate group or an epoxy group with a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol, a halogen group or tosyloxy A reaction product of an unsaturated carboxylic acid ester or amide containing a leaving substituent such as a group and a monofunctional or polyfunctional alcohol, amine or thiol is also suitable. Moreover, it is also possible to use a compound group in which the unsaturated carboxylic acid is replaced with an unsaturated phosphonic acid, a vinylbenzene derivative such as styrene, vinyl ether, allyl ether or the like.
As these specific compounds, the compounds described in paragraphs 0095 to 0108 of JP-A-2009-288705 can also be suitably used in the present invention.
 重合性化合物は、エチレン性不飽和結合を含有する基を1個以上含有する、常圧下で100℃以上の沸点を持つ化合物も好ましい。例えば、特開2013-29760号公報の段落0227、特開2008-292970号公報の段落0254~0257に記載の化合物を参酌でき、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。 The polymerizable compound is also preferably a compound having one or more groups containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond and having a boiling point of 100 ° C. or higher under normal pressure. For example, compounds described in JP-A-2013-29760, paragraph 0227, and JP-A-2008-292970, paragraphs 0254 to 0257 can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated herein.
 重合性化合物は、ジペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-330;日本化薬社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-320;日本化薬社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD D-310;日本化薬社製)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート(市販品としてはKAYARAD DPHA;日本化薬社製、A-DPH-12E;新中村化学社製)、及びこれらの(メタ)アクリロイル基がエチレングリコール残基又はプロピレングリコール残基を介している構造(例えば、サートマー社から市販されている、SR454、SR499)が好ましい。これらのオリゴマータイプも使用できる。また、NKエステルA-TMMT(ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート、新中村化学社製)、及び、KAYARAD RP-1040(日本化薬社製)等を使用することもできる。
 以下に好ましい重合性化合物の態様を示す。
Polymerizable compounds are dipentaerythritol triacrylate (KAYARAD D-330 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (KAYARAD D-320 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku), di Pentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate (KAYARAD D-310 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate (KAYARAD DPHA as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., A-DPH- 12E; manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.) and a structure in which these (meth) acryloyl groups are mediated by an ethylene glycol residue or a propylene glycol residue (for example, SR454, SR499, commercially available from Sartomer). These oligomer types can also be used. Further, NK ester A-TMMT (pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), KAYARAD RP-1040 (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and the like can also be used.
Preferred embodiments of the polymerizable compound are shown below.
 重合性化合物は、カルボン酸基、スルホン酸基、及び、リン酸基等の酸基を有していてもよい。酸基を含有する重合性化合物としては、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物と不飽和カルボン酸とのエステルが好ましく、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物の未反応のヒドロキシ基に非芳香族カルボン酸無水物を反応させて酸基を持たせた重合性化合物がより好ましく、更に好ましくは、このエステルにおいて、脂肪族ポリヒドロキシ化合物がペンタエリスリトール及び/又はジペンタエリスリトールであるものである。市販品としては、例えば、東亞合成社製の、アロニックスTO-2349、M-305、M-510、及び、M-520等が挙げられる。 The polymerizable compound may have an acid group such as a carboxylic acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group. As the polymerizable compound containing an acid group, an ester of an aliphatic polyhydroxy compound and an unsaturated carboxylic acid is preferable, and a non-aromatic carboxylic acid anhydride is reacted with an unreacted hydroxy group of the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound. A polymerizable compound having an acid group is more preferable, and in this ester, the aliphatic polyhydroxy compound is pentaerythritol and / or dipentaerythritol. Examples of commercially available products include Aronix TO-2349, M-305, M-510, and M-520 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.
 酸基を含有する重合性化合物の好ましい酸価としては、0.1~40mgKOH/gであり、より好ましくは5~30mgKOH/gである。重合性化合物の酸価が0.1mgKOH/g以上であれば、現像溶解特性が良好であり、40mgKOH/g以下であれば、製造や取扱い上、有利である。更には、光重合性能が良好で、硬化性に優れる。 The preferred acid value of the polymerizable compound containing an acid group is 0.1 to 40 mgKOH / g, more preferably 5 to 30 mgKOH / g. If the acid value of the polymerizable compound is 0.1 mgKOH / g or more, the development and dissolution characteristics are good, and if it is 40 mgKOH / g or less, it is advantageous in production and handling. Furthermore, the photopolymerization performance is good and the curability is excellent.
 重合性化合物は、カプロラクトン構造を含有する化合物も好ましい態様である。
 カプロラクトン構造を含有する化合物としては、分子内にカプロラクトン構造を含有する限り特に限定されるものではないが、例えば、トリメチロールエタン、ジトリメチロールエタン、トリメチロールプロパン、ジトリメチロールプロパン、ペンタエリスリトール、ジペンタエリスリトール、トリペンタエリスリトール、グリセリン、ジグリセロール、トリメチロールメラミン等の多価アルコールと、(メタ)アクリル酸及びε-カプロラクトンとをエステル化することにより得られる、ε-カプロラクトン変性多官能(メタ)アクリレートを挙げることができる。なかでも下記一般式(Z-1)で表されるカプロラクトン構造を含有する化合物が好ましい。
The polymerizable compound is also preferably a compound containing a caprolactone structure.
The compound containing a caprolactone structure is not particularly limited as long as it contains a caprolactone structure in the molecule. For example, trimethylolethane, ditrimethylolethane, trimethylolpropane, ditrimethylolpropane, pentaerythritol, dipenta Ε-caprolactone-modified polyfunctional (meth) acrylate obtained by esterifying polyhydric alcohol such as erythritol, tripentaerythritol, glycerin, diglycerol, trimethylolmelamine, (meth) acrylic acid and ε-caprolactone Can be mentioned. Of these, compounds containing a caprolactone structure represented by the following general formula (Z-1) are preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
 一般式(Z-1)中、6個のRは全てが下記一般式(Z-2)で表される基であるか、又は6個のRのうち1~5個が下記一般式(Z-2)で表される基であり、残余が下記一般式(Z-3)で表される基である。 In the general formula (Z-1), all six R are groups represented by the following general formula (Z-2), or 1 to 5 of the six R are represented by the following general formula (Z -2), and the remainder is a group represented by the following general formula (Z-3).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 一般式(Z-2)中、R1は水素原子又はメチル基を示し、mは1又は2の数を示し、「*」は結合手であることを示す。 In general formula (Z-2), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, m represents a number of 1 or 2, and “*” represents a bond.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
 一般式(Z-3)中、R1は水素原子又はメチル基を示し、「*」は結合手であることを示す。) In the formula (Z-3), R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, "*" indicates a bond. )
 カプロラクトン構造を含有する重合性化合物は、例えば、日本化薬からKAYARAD DPCAシリーズとして市販されており、DPCA-20(上記式(Z-1)~(Z-3)においてm=1、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=2、R1が全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-30(同式、m=1、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=3、R1が全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-60(同式、m=1、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=6、R1が全て水素原子である化合物)、DPCA-120(同式においてm=2、式(Z-2)で表される基の数=6、R1が全て水素原子である化合物)等が挙げられる。 Polymerizable compounds containing a caprolactone structure are commercially available, for example, from Nippon Kayaku as the KAYARAD DPCA series, and DPCA-20 (m = 1 in the above formulas (Z-1) to (Z-3), the formula (Z -2) = 2, a compound in which R 1 is all hydrogen atoms), DPCA-30 (formula, m = 1, number of groups represented by formula (Z-2) = 3) , Compounds in which R 1 is all hydrogen atoms), DPCA-60 (formula, m = 1, number of groups represented by formula (Z-2) = 6, compounds in which R 1 are all hydrogen atoms), DPCA-120 (a compound in which m = 2 in the formula, the number of groups represented by formula (Z-2) = 6, and all R 1 are hydrogen atoms).
 重合性化合物は、下記一般式(Z-4)又は(Z-5)で表される化合物を用いることもできる。 As the polymerizable compound, a compound represented by the following general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5) can also be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 一般式(Z-4)及び(Z-5)中、Eは、各々独立に、-((CH2yCH2O)-、又は((CH2yCH(CH3)O)-を表し、yは、各々独立に0~10の整数を表し、Xは、各々独立に、(メタ)アクリロイル基、水素原子、又はカルボン酸基を表す。
 一般式(Z-4)中、(メタ)アクリロイル基の合計は3個又は4個であり、mは各々独立に0~10の整数を表し、各mの合計は0~40の整数である。
 一般式(Z-5)中、(メタ)アクリロイル基の合計は5個又は6個であり、nは各々独立に0~10の整数を表し、各nの合計は0~60の整数である。
In general formulas (Z-4) and (Z-5), each E independently represents — ((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O) — or ((CH 2 ) y CH (CH 3 ) O) —. Each represents independently an integer of 0 to 10, and each X independently represents a (meth) acryloyl group, a hydrogen atom, or a carboxylic acid group.
In the general formula (Z-4), the total of (meth) acryloyl groups is 3 or 4, each m independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the total of each m is an integer of 0 to 40 .
In general formula (Z-5), the total number of (meth) acryloyl groups is 5 or 6, each n independently represents an integer of 0 to 10, and the total of each n is an integer of 0 to 60 .
 一般式(Z-4)中、mは、0~6の整数が好ましく、0~4の整数がより好ましい。
 また、各mの合計は、2~40の整数が好ましく、2~16の整数がより好ましく、4~8の整数が更に好ましい。
 一般式(Z-5)中、nは、0~6の整数が好ましく、0~4の整数がより好ましい。
 また、各nの合計は、3~60の整数が好ましく、3~24の整数がより好ましく、6~12の整数が更に好ましい。
 また、一般式(Z-4)又は一般式(Z-5)中の-((CH2yCH2O)-又は((CH2yCH(CH3)O)-は、酸素原子側の末端がXに結合する形態が好ましい。
In general formula (Z-4), m is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
The total of each m is preferably an integer of 2 to 40, more preferably an integer of 2 to 16, and further preferably an integer of 4 to 8.
In general formula (Z-5), n is preferably an integer of 0 to 6, and more preferably an integer of 0 to 4.
The total of each n is preferably an integer of 3 to 60, more preferably an integer of 3 to 24, and still more preferably an integer of 6 to 12.
In the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5), — ((CH 2 ) y CH 2 O) — or ((CH 2 ) y CH (CH 3 ) O) — represents an oxygen atom A form in which the terminal on the side is bonded to X is preferred.
 一般式(Z-4)又は一般式(Z-5)で表される化合物は1種単独で用いてもよいし、2種以上併用してもよい。特に、一般式(Z-5)において、6個のX全てがアクリロイル基である形態、一般式(Z-5)において、6個のX全てがアクリロイル基である化合物と、6個のXのうち、少なくとも1個が水素原子ある化合物との混合物である態様が好ましい。このような構成とすることにより、現像性をより向上できる。 The compounds represented by formula (Z-4) or formula (Z-5) may be used alone or in combination of two or more. In particular, in the general formula (Z-5), a form in which all six Xs are acryloyl groups, in the general formula (Z-5), a compound in which all six Xs are acryloyl groups, Among these, an embodiment in which at least one is a mixture with a compound having a hydrogen atom is preferable. With such a configuration, the developability can be further improved.
 また、一般式(Z-4)又は一般式(Z-5)で表される化合物の重合性化合物中における全含有量としては、20質量%以上が好ましく、50質量%以上がより好ましい。 The total content of the compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5) in the polymerizable compound is preferably 20% by mass or more, and more preferably 50% by mass or more.
 一般式(Z-4)又は一般式(Z-5)で表される化合物は、従来公知の工程である、ペンタエリスリト-ル又はジペンタエリスリト-ルにエチレンオキシド又はプロピレンオキシドを開環付加反応により開環骨格を結合する工程と、開環骨格の末端ヒドロキシ基に、例えば(メタ)アクリロイルクロライドを反応させて(メタ)アクリロイル基を導入する工程と、から合成することができる。各工程はよく知られた工程であり、当業者は容易に一般式(Z-4)又は(Z-5)で表される化合物を合成することができる。 The compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5) is a conventionally known process, which is a ring-opening addition of ethylene oxide or propylene oxide to pentaerythritol or dipentaerythritol. It can be synthesized from a step of bonding a ring-opening skeleton by a reaction and a step of introducing a (meth) acryloyl group by reacting, for example, (meth) acryloyl chloride with a terminal hydroxy group of the ring-opening skeleton. Each step is a well-known step, and a person skilled in the art can easily synthesize a compound represented by the general formula (Z-4) or (Z-5).
 一般式(Z-4)又は一般式(Z-5)で表される化合物の中でも、ペンタエリスリトール誘導体及び/又はジペンタエリスリトール誘導体がより好ましい。
 具体的には、下記式(a)~(f)で表される化合物(以下、「例示化合物(a)~(f)」とも称する。)が挙げられ、中でも、例示化合物(a)、(b)、(e)、(f)が好ましい。
Among the compounds represented by the general formula (Z-4) or the general formula (Z-5), a pentaerythritol derivative and / or a dipentaerythritol derivative are more preferable.
Specific examples include compounds represented by the following formulas (a) to (f) (hereinafter also referred to as “exemplary compounds (a) to (f)”). Among them, exemplary compounds (a), (f) b), (e) and (f) are preferred.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 一般式(Z-4)、(Z-5)で表される重合性化合物の市販品としては、例えばサートマー社製のエチレンオキシ鎖を4個含有する4官能アクリレートであるSR-494、日本化薬社製のペンチレンオキシ鎖を6個含有する6官能アクリレートであるDPCA-60、イソブチレンオキシ鎖を3個含有する3官能アクリレートであるTPA-330等が挙げられる。 Examples of commercially available polymerizable compounds represented by the general formulas (Z-4) and (Z-5) include SR-494, a tetrafunctional acrylate containing four ethyleneoxy chains manufactured by Sartomer, Nippon Kayaku. Examples thereof include DPCA-60, which is a hexafunctional acrylate containing six pentyleneoxy chains, and TPA-330, which is a trifunctional acrylate containing three isobutyleneoxy chains.
 重合性化合物としては、特公昭48-41708号公報、特開昭51-37193号公報、特公平2-32293号公報、特公平2-16765号公報に記載されたウレタンアクリレート類;特公昭58-49860号公報、特公昭56-17654号公報、特公昭62-39417号公報、及び特公昭62-39418号公報に記載されたエチレンオキサイド系骨格を含有するウレタン化合物類;も好適である。また、特開昭63-277653号公報、特開昭63-260909号公報、及び特開平1-105238号公報に記載された、分子内にアミノ構造及び/又はスルフィド構造を含有する付加重合性化合物類を用いることによって、非常に感光スピードに優れた組成物を得ることができる。
 市販品としては、ウレタンオリゴマーUAS-10、UAB-140(山陽国策パルプ社製)、UA-7200(新中村化学社製)、DPHA-40H(日本化薬社製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、及び、AI-600(共栄社製)等が挙げられる。
Examples of the polymerizable compound include urethane acrylates described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, and JP-B-2-16765; Urethane compounds containing an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP-A-49860, JP-B-56-17654, JP-B-62-39417, and JP-B-62-39418 are also suitable. Further, addition-polymerizable compounds containing an amino structure and / or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238 By using a kind, it is possible to obtain a composition excellent in the photosensitive speed.
Commercially available products include urethane oligomers UAS-10, UAB-140 (Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd.), UA-7200 (Shin Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA- Examples thereof include 306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, and AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha).
 また、重合性化合物は、SP(Solubility Parameter:溶解パラメータ)値が、9.50以上であることが好ましく、10.40以上であることがより好ましく、10.60以上が更に好ましい。
 なお、本明細書においてSP値は、特に断らない限り、Hoy法によって求める(H.L.Hoy Journal of Painting,1970,Vol.42,76-118)。また、SP値については単位を省略して示しているが、その単位はcal1/2cm-3/2である。
The polymerizable compound preferably has an SP (Solubility Parameter) value of 9.50 or more, more preferably 10.40 or more, and still more preferably 10.60 or more.
In this specification, the SP value is determined by the Hoy method unless otherwise specified (HL Hoy Journal of Paining, 1970, Vol. 42, 76-118). The SP value is shown with the unit omitted, but the unit is cal 1/2 cm −3/2 .
 また、組成物は、現像残渣改善の観点から、カルド骨格を含有する重合性化合物を含有することも好ましい。
 カルド骨格を含有する重合性化合物としては、9,9-ビスアリールフルオレン骨格を含有する重合性化合物が好ましく、下記式(Q3)で表される化合物がより好ましい。
The composition preferably contains a polymerizable compound containing a cardo skeleton from the viewpoint of improving development residue.
As the polymerizable compound containing a cardo skeleton, a polymerizable compound containing a 9,9-bisarylfluorene skeleton is preferable, and a compound represented by the following formula (Q3) is more preferable.
一般式(Q3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
General formula (Q3)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
 上記一般式(Q3)中、Ar11~Ar14はそれぞれ独立に破線で囲まれたベンゼン環を含有するアリール基を表す。X~Xはそれぞれ独立に重合性基を含有する置換基を表し、上記置換基中の炭素原子はヘテロ原子によって置換されていてもよい。a及びbはそれぞれ独立に1~5の整数を表し、c及びdはそれぞれ独立に0~4の整数を表す。R~Rはそれぞれ独立に置換基を表し、e、f、g及びhはそれぞれ独立に0以上の整数を表し、e、f、g及びhの上限値はそれぞれAr11~Ar14が含有することができる置換基の数からa、b、c又はdを減じた値である。但し、Ar11~Ar14がそれぞれ独立に破線で囲まれたベンゼン環を縮合環のひとつとして含有する多環芳香族炭化水素基である場合は、X~X及びR~Rはそれぞれ独立に破線で囲まれたベンゼン環に置換していても、破線で囲まれたベンゼン環以外の環に置換していてもよい。 In the general formula (Q3), Ar 11 to Ar 14 each independently represents an aryl group containing a benzene ring surrounded by a broken line. X 1 to X 4 each independently represents a substituent containing a polymerizable group, and the carbon atom in the substituent may be substituted with a hetero atom. a and b each independently represents an integer of 1 to 5, and c and d each independently represents an integer of 0 to 4. R 1 to R 4 each independently represents a substituent, e, f, g and h each independently represents an integer of 0 or more, and the upper limit values of e, f, g and h are Ar 11 to Ar 14 respectively. This is a value obtained by subtracting a, b, c, or d from the number of substituents that can be contained. However, when Ar 11 to Ar 14 are each independently a polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group containing a benzene ring surrounded by a broken line as one of the condensed rings, X 1 to X 4 and R 1 to R 4 are Each may be independently substituted with a benzene ring surrounded by a broken line, or may be substituted with a ring other than the benzene ring surrounded by a broken line.
 上記一般式(Q3)中、Ar11~Ar14が表す破線で囲まれたベンゼン環を含有するアリール基は、炭素数6~14のアリール基であることが好ましく、炭素数6~10のアリール基(例えば、フェニル基、ナフチル基)であることがより好ましく、フェニル基(破線で囲まれたベンゼン環のみ)であることが更に好ましい。 In the general formula (Q3), the aryl group containing a benzene ring surrounded by a broken line represented by Ar 11 to Ar 14 is preferably an aryl group having 6 to 14 carbon atoms, and an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms. A group (for example, a phenyl group or a naphthyl group) is more preferable, and a phenyl group (only a benzene ring surrounded by a broken line) is further preferable.
 上記一般式(Q3)中、X~Xはそれぞれ独立に重合性基を含有する置換基を表し、上記置換基中の炭素原子はヘテロ原子によって置換されていてもよい。X~Xが表す重合性基を含有する置換基としては特に制限はないが、重合性基を含有する脂肪族基であることが好ましい。
 X~Xが表す重合性基を含有する脂肪族基としては、特に制限はないが、重合性基以外における炭素数が1~12のアルキレン基であることが好ましく、炭素数2~10のアルキレン基であることがより好ましく、炭素数2~5のアルキレン基であることが更に好ましい。
 また、X~Xが表す重合性基を含有する脂肪族基において、上記脂肪族基がヘテロ原子によって置換される場合は、-NR-(Rは置換基)、酸素原子、硫黄原子によって置換されていることが好ましく、上記脂肪族基中の隣り合わない-CH-が酸素原子又は硫黄原子で置換されていることがより好ましく、上記脂肪族基中の隣り合わない-CH-が酸素原子で置換されていることが更に好ましい。X~Xが表す重合性基を含有する脂肪族基は、ヘテロ原子によって1~2箇所置換されていることが好ましく、ヘテロ原子によって1箇所置換されていることがより好ましく、Ar11~Ar14が表す破線で囲まれたベンゼン環を含有するアリール基に隣接する1箇所がヘテロ原子によって置換されていることが更に好ましい。
 X~Xが表す重合性基を含有する脂肪族基に含まれる重合性基としては、ラジカル重合又はカチオン重合可能な重合性基(以下、それぞれラジカル重合性基及びカチオン重合性基とも言う)が好ましい。
 ラジカル重合性基としては、一般に知られているラジカル重合性基を用いることができ、好適なものとしてラジカル重合可能なエチレン性不飽和結合を含有する重合性基を挙げることができ、具体的にはビニル基、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基等を挙げることができる。中でも、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基が好ましく、アクリロイルオキシ基がより好ましい。
 カチオン重合性基としては、一般に知られているカチオン重合性を用いることができ、具体的には、脂環式エーテル基、環状アセタール基、環状ラクトン基、環状チオエーテル基、スピロオルソエステル基、ビニルオキシ基等を挙げることができる。中でも、脂環式エーテル基、ビニルオキシ基が好適であり、エポキシ基、オキセタニル基、ビニルオキシ基が特に好ましい。
 Ar~Arが含有する置換基が含有する上記重合性基は、ラジカル重合性基であることが好ましい。
 Ar~Arのうち2つ以上は重合性基を含有する置換基を含み、Ar~Arのうち2~4個が重合性基を含有する置換基を含有することが好ましく、Ar~Arのうち2又は3個が重合性基を含有する置換基を含有することがより好ましく、Ar~Arのうち2個が重合性基を含有する置換基を含有することが更に好ましい。
 Ar11~Ar14がそれぞれ独立に破線で囲まれたベンゼン環を縮合環のひとつとして含有する多環芳香族炭化水素基である場合は、X~Xはそれぞれ独立に破線で囲まれたベンゼン環に置換していても、破線で囲まれたベンゼン環以外の環に置換していてもよい。
In the general formula (Q3), X 1 to X 4 each independently represent a substituent containing a polymerizable group, and the carbon atom in the substituent may be substituted with a hetero atom. The substituent containing a polymerizable group represented by X 1 to X 4 is not particularly limited, but is preferably an aliphatic group containing a polymerizable group.
The aliphatic group containing a polymerizable group represented by X 1 to X 4 is not particularly limited, but is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms other than the polymerizable group, and 2 to 10 carbon atoms. And more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms.
Further, in the aliphatic group containing a polymerizable group represented by X 1 to X 4 , when the aliphatic group is substituted with a hetero atom, it is represented by —NR— (R is a substituent), an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom. It is preferable that a non-adjacent —CH 2 — in the aliphatic group is substituted with an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and a non-adjacent —CH 2 — in the aliphatic group is preferable. More preferably, is substituted with an oxygen atom. The aliphatic group containing a polymerizable group represented by X 1 to X 4 is preferably substituted at one or two positions with a hetero atom, more preferably at one position with a hetero atom, and Ar 11 to More preferably, one position adjacent to the aryl group containing a benzene ring surrounded by a broken line represented by Ar 14 is substituted with a hetero atom.
The polymerizable group contained in the aliphatic group containing the polymerizable group represented by X 1 to X 4 is a radically polymerizable or cationically polymerizable group (hereinafter also referred to as a radically polymerizable group and a cationically polymerizable group, respectively). ) Is preferred.
As the radically polymerizable group, generally known radically polymerizable groups can be used, and preferable examples thereof include a polymerizable group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond capable of radical polymerization, Can include a vinyl group, a (meth) acryloyloxy group, and the like. Among these, a (meth) acryloyloxy group is preferable, and an acryloyloxy group is more preferable.
As the cationic polymerizable group, generally known cationic polymerizable groups can be used. Specifically, alicyclic ether group, cyclic acetal group, cyclic lactone group, cyclic thioether group, spiro orthoester group, vinyloxy group Groups and the like. Of these, alicyclic ether groups and vinyloxy groups are preferable, and epoxy groups, oxetanyl groups, and vinyloxy groups are particularly preferable.
The polymerizable group contained in the substituent contained in Ar 1 to Ar 4 is preferably a radical polymerizable group.
Two or more of Ar 1 ~ Ar 4 comprises a substituent containing a polymerizable group, preferably contains a substituent 2-4 of Ar 1 ~ Ar 4 contains a polymerizable group, Ar More preferably, two or three of 1 to Ar 4 contain a substituent containing a polymerizable group, and two of Ar 1 to Ar 4 contain a substituent containing a polymerizable group. Further preferred.
When Ar 11 to Ar 14 are each independently a polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group containing a benzene ring surrounded by a broken line as one of the condensed rings, X 1 to X 4 are each independently surrounded by a broken line Even if it is substituted with a benzene ring, it may be substituted with a ring other than the benzene ring surrounded by a broken line.
 上記一般式(Q3)中、a及びbはそれぞれ独立に1~5の整数を表し、1又は2であることが好ましく、a及びbがいずれも1であることがより好ましい。
 上記一般式(Q3)中、c及びdはそれぞれ独立に0~5の整数を表し、0又は1であることが好ましく、c及びdがいずれも0であることがより好ましい。
In the general formula (Q3), a and b each independently represent an integer of 1 to 5, preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably a and b are all 1.
In the general formula (Q3), c and d each independently represent an integer of 0 to 5, preferably 0 or 1, and more preferably c and d are both 0.
 上記一般式(Q3)中、R~Rはそれぞれ独立に置換基を表す。R~Rが表す置換基としては特に制限はないが、例えば、ハロゲン原子、ハロゲン化アルキル基、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アシル基、ヒドロキシ基、ヒドロキシアルキル基、アルコキシ基、アリール基、ヘテロアリール基、脂環基等を挙げることができる。R~Rが表す置換基はアルキル基、アルコキシ基又はアリール基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~5のアルキル基、炭素数1~5のアルコキシ基又はフェニル基であることがより好ましく、メチル基、メトキシ基又はフェニル基であることが更に好ましい。
 上記一般式(Q3)中、Ar11~Ar14がそれぞれ独立に破線で囲まれたベンゼン環を縮合環のひとつとして含有する多環芳香族炭化水素基である場合は、R~Rはそれぞれ独立に破線で囲まれたベンゼン環に置換していても、破線で囲まれたベンゼン環以外の環に置換していてもよい。
In the general formula (Q3), R 1 to R 4 each independently represents a substituent. The substituent represented by R 1 to R 4 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include halogen atoms, halogenated alkyl groups, alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, acyl groups, hydroxy groups, hydroxyalkyl groups, alkoxy groups, aryl groups, hetero groups. An aryl group, an alicyclic group, etc. can be mentioned. The substituent represented by R 1 to R 4 is preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group or an aryl group, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms or a phenyl group. And more preferably a methyl group, a methoxy group or a phenyl group.
In the general formula (Q3), when Ar 11 to Ar 14 are each independently a polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group containing a benzene ring surrounded by a broken line as one of the condensed rings, R 1 to R 4 are Each may be independently substituted with a benzene ring surrounded by a broken line, or may be substituted with a ring other than the benzene ring surrounded by a broken line.
 上記一般式(Q3)中、e、f、g及びhはそれぞれ独立に0以上の整数を表し、e、f、g及びhの上限値はそれぞれAr11~Ar14が含有することができる置換基の数からa、b、c又はdを減じた値である。
 e、f、g及びhはそれぞれ独立に0~8であることが好ましく、0~2であることがより好ましく、0であることが更に好ましい。
 Ar11~Ar14がそれぞれ独立に破線で囲まれたベンゼン環を縮合環のひとつとして含有する多環芳香族炭化水素基である場合、e、f、g及びhは0又は1であることが好ましく、0であることがより好ましい。
In the general formula (Q3), e, f, g, and h each independently represent an integer of 0 or more, and the upper limit values of e, f, g, and h can be substituted by Ar 11 to Ar 14, respectively. A value obtained by subtracting a, b, c, or d from the number of groups.
e, f, g and h are each independently preferably 0 to 8, more preferably 0 to 2, and still more preferably 0.
When Ar 11 to Ar 14 are each independently a polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon group containing a benzene ring surrounded by a broken line as one of the condensed rings, e, f, g and h may be 0 or 1 Preferably, it is 0.
 上記式(Q3)で表される化合物としては、例えば、9,9-ビス[4-(2-アクリロイルオキシエトキシ)フェニル]フルオレン等が挙げられる。9,9-ビスアリールフルオレン骨格を含有する重合性化合物としては、特開2010-254732号公報記載の化合物類も好適に用いることができる。 Examples of the compound represented by the formula (Q3) include 9,9-bis [4- (2-acryloyloxyethoxy) phenyl] fluorene. As the polymerizable compound containing a 9,9-bisarylfluorene skeleton, compounds described in JP 2010-254732 A can also be suitably used.
 このようなカルド骨格を含有する重合性化合物としては、限定されないが、例えば、オンコートEXシリーズ(長瀬産業社製)及びオグソール(大阪ガスケミカル社製)等が挙げられる。 Examples of the polymerizable compound containing a cardo skeleton include, but are not limited to, on-coat EX series (manufactured by Nagase Sangyo Co., Ltd.) and Ogsol (manufactured by Osaka Gas Chemical Co., Ltd.).
 組成物が重合性化合物を含有する場合において、重合性化合物の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対し、0.1~40質量%が好ましい。下限は、例えば0.5質量%以上がより好ましく、1質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、例えば、30質量%以下がより好ましく、20質量%以下が更に好ましい。
 重合性化合物は、1種単独であってもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。2種以上を併用する場合は、合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
In the case where the composition contains a polymerizable compound, the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 0.1 to 40% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. For example, the lower limit is more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and further preferably 1% by mass or more. For example, the upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less, and still more preferably 20% by mass or less.
One type of polymerizable compound may be used alone, or two or more types may be used in combination. When using 2 or more types together, it is preferable that a total amount becomes the said range.
〔重合開始剤〕
 上記組成物は、重合開始剤を含有することが好ましい。
 重合開始剤としては特に制限されず、公知の重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができ、例えば、感光性を有するもの(いわゆる、光重合開始剤)が好ましい。
 上記組成物は、金属窒化物含有粒子の他に、光重合開始剤及び上記の重合性化合物を含有する場合には、活性光線又は放射線の照射により硬化することから、「感光性組成物」と呼ばれることがある。
 光重合開始剤としては、重合性化合物の重合を開始する能力を有する限り、特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、紫外線領域から可視の光線に対して感光性を有するものが好ましい。また、光励起された増感剤と何らかの作用を生じ、活性ラジカルを生成する活性剤であってもよく、重合性化合物の種類に応じてカチオン重合を開始させるような開始剤であってもよい。
 また、光重合開始剤は、約300nm~800nm(330nm~500nmがより好ましい。)の範囲内に少なくとも約50のモル吸光係数を有する化合物を、少なくとも1種含有していることが好ましい。
(Polymerization initiator)
The composition preferably contains a polymerization initiator.
It does not restrict | limit especially as a polymerization initiator, It can select suitably from well-known polymerization initiators, For example, what has photosensitivity (what is called a photoinitiator) is preferable.
When the composition contains a photopolymerization initiator and the polymerizable compound in addition to the metal nitride-containing particles, the composition is cured by irradiation with actinic rays or radiation. Sometimes called.
The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of a polymerizable compound, and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, those having photosensitivity to visible light from the ultraviolet region are preferable. Further, it may be an activator that generates an active radical by causing some action with a photoexcited sensitizer, and may be an initiator that initiates cationic polymerization according to the type of the polymerizable compound.
The photopolymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molar extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 nm to 800 nm (more preferably 330 nm to 500 nm).
 光重合開始剤としては、例えば、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を含有するもの、オキサジアゾール骨格を含有するもの、等)、アシルホスフィンオキサイド等のアシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール、オキシム誘導体等のオキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、ケトオキシムエーテル、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、ヒドロキシアセトフェノン等が挙げられる。
 上記トリアジン骨格を含有するハロゲン化炭化水素化合物としては、例えば、若林ら著、Bull.Chem.Soc.Japan,42、2924(1969)記載の化合物、英国特許1388492号明細書記載の化合物、特開昭53-133428号公報記載の化合物、独国特許3337024号明細書記載の化合物、F.C.Schaefer等によるJ.Org.Chem.;29、1527(1964)記載の化合物、特開昭62-58241号公報記載の化合物、特開平5-281728号公報記載の化合物、特開平5-34920号公報記載化合物、米国特許第4212976号明細書に記載されている化合物、等が挙げられる。
Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those containing a triazine skeleton, those containing an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, Examples include oxime compounds such as oxime derivatives, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, and hydroxyacetophenones.
Examples of the halogenated hydrocarbon compound containing the triazine skeleton include those described in Wakabayashi et al., Bull. Chem. Soc. Japan, 42, 2924 (1969), a compound described in British Patent No. 1388492, a compound described in JP-A-53-133428, a compound described in German Patent No. 3337024, F.I. C. J. Schaefer et al. Org. Chem. 29, 1527 (1964), compound described in JP-A-62-258241, compound described in JP-A-5-281728, compound described in JP-A-5-34920, US Pat. No. 4,221,976 And the compounds described in the book.
 また、露光感度の観点から、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、ベンジルジメチルケタール化合物、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、フォスフィンオキサイド化合物、メタロセン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリルイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、アセトフェノン化合物及びその誘導体、シクロペンタジエン-ベンゼン-鉄錯体及びその塩、ハロメチルオキサジアゾール化合物、並びに3-アリール置換クマリン化合物からなる群より選択される化合物が好ましい。 From the viewpoint of exposure sensitivity, trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, α-hydroxyketone compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers, oniums Preferred are compounds selected from the group consisting of compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds and derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, halomethyloxadiazole compounds, and 3-aryl-substituted coumarin compounds. .
 更に好ましくは、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、アシルホスフィン化合物、フォスフィンオキサイド化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリルイミダゾールダイマー、オニウム化合物、ベンゾフェノン化合物、又はアセトフェノン化合物であり、トリハロメチルトリアジン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物、オキシム化合物、トリアリルイミダゾールダイマー、及びベンゾフェノン化合物からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも一種の化合物が特に好ましい。 More preferred are trihalomethyltriazine compounds, α-aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, oxime compounds, triallylimidazole dimers, onium compounds, benzophenone compounds, or acetophenone compounds, trihalomethyltriazine compounds, α- Particularly preferred is at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an aminoketone compound, an oxime compound, a triallylimidazole dimer, and a benzophenone compound.
 特に、上記組成物を遮光膜の作製に使用する場合には、微細なパターンをシャープな形状で形成する必要があるために、硬化性と共に未露光部に残渣がなく現像されることが重要である。このような観点からは、光重合開始剤としてはオキシム化合物を使用することが特に好ましい。特に、微細なパターンを形成する場合、硬化用露光にステッパー露光を用いるが、この露光機はハロゲンにより損傷される場合があり、光重合開始剤の添加量も低く抑える必要がある。これらの点を考慮すれば、微細パターンを形成するには、光重合開始剤としては、オキシム化合物を用いるのが特に好ましい。
 光重合開始剤の具体例としては、例えば、特開2013-29760号公報の段落0265~0268を参酌することができ、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
In particular, when the above composition is used for the production of a light-shielding film, it is necessary to form a fine pattern with a sharp shape. is there. From such a viewpoint, it is particularly preferable to use an oxime compound as the photopolymerization initiator. In particular, when a fine pattern is formed, stepper exposure is used for exposure for curing, but this exposure machine may be damaged by halogen, and the amount of photopolymerization initiator added must be kept low. Considering these points, it is particularly preferable to use an oxime compound as a photopolymerization initiator in order to form a fine pattern.
As specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator, for example, paragraphs 0265 to 0268 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
 光重合開始剤としては、ヒドロキシアセトフェノン化合物、アミノアセトフェノン化合物、及び、アシルホスフィン化合物も好適に用いることができる。より具体的には、例えば、特開平10-291969号公報に記載のアミノアセトフェノン系開始剤、及び特許第4225898号公報に記載のアシルホスフィン系開始剤も用いることができる。
 ヒドロキシアセトフェノン系開始剤としては、IRGACURE-184、DAROCUR-1173、IRGACURE-500、IRGACURE-2959、及びIRGACURE-127(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)を用いることができる。
 アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤としては、市販品であるIRGACURE-907、IRGACURE-369、又はIRGACURE-379EG(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)を用いることができる。アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤は、365nm又は405nm等の長波光源に吸収波長がマッチングされた特開2009-191179公報に記載の化合物も用いることができる。
 アシルホスフィン系開始剤としては、市販品であるIRGACURE-819、又はDAROCUR-TPO(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)を用いることができる。
As the photopolymerization initiator, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds can also be suitably used. More specifically, for example, an aminoacetophenone initiator described in JP-A-10-291969 and an acylphosphine initiator described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can also be used.
As the hydroxyacetophenone-based initiator, IRGACURE-184, DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, and IRGACURE-127 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used.
As the aminoacetophenone-based initiator, commercially available IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, or IRGACURE-379EG (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used. As the aminoacetophenone-based initiator, a compound described in JP-A-2009-191179 in which an absorption wavelength is matched with a long wave light source such as 365 nm or 405 nm can also be used.
As the acylphosphine-based initiator, commercially available IRGACURE-819 or DAROCUR-TPO (trade name: all manufactured by BASF) can be used.
(オキシム化合物)
 光重合開始剤として、より好ましくはオキシム化合物(オキシム系開始剤)が挙げられる。特にオキシム化合物は高感度で重合効率が高く、色材濃度によらず硬化でき、色材の濃度を高く設計しやすいため好ましい。
 オキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2001-233842号公報記載の化合物、特開2000-80068号公報記載の化合物、又は特開2006-342166号公報記載の化合物を用いることができる。
 本発明において、好適に用いることのできるオキシム化合物としては、例えば、3-ベンゾイロキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-アセトキシイミノブタン-2-オン、3-プロピオニルオキシイミノブタン-2-オン、2-アセトキシイミノペンタン-3-オン、2-アセトキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、2-ベンゾイロキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、3-(4-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)イミノブタン-2-オン、及び2-エトキシカルボニルオキシイミノ-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン等が挙げられる。
 また、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)pp.1653-1660)、J.C.S.Perkin II(1979年)pp.156-162、Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology(1995年)pp.202-232、特開2000-66385号公報記載の化合物、特開2000-80068号公報、特表2004-534797号公報、及び特開2006-342166号公報の各公報に記載の化合物等も挙げられる。
 市販品ではIRGACURE-OXE01(BASF社製)、IRGACURE-OXE02(BASF社製)、IRGACURE-OXE03(BASF社製)、又はIRGACURE-OXE04(BASF社製)も好適に用いられる。また、TR-PBG-304(常州強力電子新材料有限公司社製)、アデカアークルズNCI-831及びアデカアークルズNCI-930(ADEKA社製)、又はN-1919(カルバゾール・オキシムエステル骨格含有光開始剤(ADEKA社製)も用いることができる。
(Oxime compounds)
More preferred examples of the photopolymerization initiator include oxime compounds (oxime initiators). In particular, an oxime compound is preferable because it has high sensitivity and high polymerization efficiency, can be cured regardless of the color material concentration, and can be easily designed with a high color material concentration.
As specific examples of the oxime compound, a compound described in JP-A No. 2001-233842, a compound described in JP-A No. 2000-80068, or a compound described in JP-A No. 2006-342166 can be used.
Examples of the oxime compound that can be suitably used in the present invention include 3-benzoyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-acetoxyiminobutan-2-one, 3-propionyloxyiminobutan-2-one, 2-acetoxyiminopentan-3-one, 2-acetoxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 2-benzoyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one, 3- (4-toluenesulfonyloxy) iminobutane Examples include -2-one and 2-ethoxycarbonyloxyimino-1-phenylpropan-1-one.
In addition, J.H. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 1653-1660), J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 156-162, Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995) pp. Examples thereof include compounds described in 202-232, JP-A No. 2000-66385, JP-A No. 2000-80068, JP-T 2004-534797, and JP-A No. 2006-342166. .
IRGACURE-OXE01 (manufactured by BASF), IRGACURE-OXE02 (manufactured by BASF), IRGACURE-OXE03 (manufactured by BASF), or IRGACURE-OXE04 (manufactured by BASF) are also suitably used as commercial products. Also, TR-PBG-304 (manufactured by Changzhou Power Electronics New Materials Co., Ltd.), Adeka Arcles NCI-831 and Adeka Arcles NCI-930 (manufactured by ADEKA), or N-1919 (carbazole oxime ester containing light An initiator (manufactured by ADEKA) can also be used.
 また上記記載以外のオキシム化合物として、カルバゾールN位にオキシムが連結した特表2009-519904号公報に記載の化合物;ベンゾフェノン部位にヘテロ置換基が導入された米国特許第7626957号公報に記載の化合物;色素部位にニトロ基が導入された特開2010-15025号公報及び米国特許公開2009-292039号記載の化合物;国際公開特許2009-131189号公報に記載のケトオキシム化合物;トリアジン骨格とオキシム骨格を同一分子内に含有する米国特許7556910号公報に記載の化合物;405nmに吸収極大を有しg線光源に対して良好な感度を有する特開2009-221114号公報記載の化合物;等を用いてもよい。
 好ましくは、例えば、特開2013-29760号公報の段落0274~0275を参酌することができ、この内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
 具体的には、オキシム化合物としては、下記式(OX-1)で表される化合物が好ましい。なお、オキシムのN-O結合が(E)体のオキシム化合物であっても、(Z)体のオキシム化合物であっても、(E)体と(Z)体との混合物であってもよい。
Further, as oxime compounds other than those described above, compounds described in JP-A-2009-519904 in which an oxime is linked to the carbazole N-position; compounds described in US Pat. No. 7,626,957 in which a hetero substituent is introduced into the benzophenone moiety; Compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-15025 and US Patent Publication No. 2009-292039 in which a nitro group is introduced at the dye moiety; Ketooxime compounds described in International Patent Publication No. 2009-131189; Triazine skeleton and oxime skeleton are the same molecule A compound described in US Pat. No. 7,556,910 contained therein; a compound described in JP-A-2009-221114 having an absorption maximum at 405 nm and good sensitivity to a g-line light source; and the like may be used.
Preferably, for example, paragraphs 0274 to 0275 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
Specifically, the oxime compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (OX-1). The oxime N—O bond may be an (E) oxime compound, a (Z) oxime compound, or a mixture of (E) and (Z) isomers. .
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 一般式(OX-1)中、R及びBは各々独立に一価の置換基を表し、Aは二価の有機基を表し、Arはアリール基を表す。
 一般式(OX-1)中、Rで表される一価の置換基としては、一価の非金属原子団であることが好ましい。
 一価の非金属原子団としては、アルキル基、アリール基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、複素環基、アルキルチオカルボニル基、及び、アリールチオカルボニル基等が挙げられる。また、これらの基は、1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。また、前述した置換基は、更に他の置換基で置換されていてもよい。
 置換基としてはハロゲン原子、アリールオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基又はアリールオキシカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、アシル基、アルキル基、及び、アリール基等が挙げられる。
 一般式(OX-1)中、Bで表される一価の置換基としては、アリール基、複素環基、アリールカルボニル基、又は、複素環カルボニル基が好ましい。これらの基は1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、前述した置換基が例示できる。
 一般式(OX-1)中、Aで表される二価の有機基としては、炭素数1~12のアルキレン基、シクロアルキレン基、又は、アルキニレン基が好ましい。これらの基は1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、前述した置換基が例示できる。
In general formula (OX-1), R and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent, A represents a divalent organic group, and Ar represents an aryl group.
In the general formula (OX-1), the monovalent substituent represented by R is preferably a monovalent nonmetallic atomic group.
Examples of the monovalent nonmetallic atomic group include an alkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylthiocarbonyl group, and an arylthiocarbonyl group. Moreover, these groups may have one or more substituents. Moreover, the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent.
Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, an acyl group, an alkyl group, and an aryl group.
In General Formula (OX-1), the monovalent substituent represented by B is preferably an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an arylcarbonyl group, or a heterocyclic carbonyl group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
In the general formula (OX-1), the divalent organic group represented by A is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, a cycloalkylene group, or an alkynylene group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
 光重合開始剤として、フッ素原子を含有するオキシム化合物を用いることもできる。フッ素原子を含有するオキシム化合物の具体例としては、特開2010-262028号公報記載の化合物;特表2014-500852号公報記載の化合物24、36~40;特開2013-164471号公報記載の化合物(C-3);等が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 An oxime compound containing a fluorine atom can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator. Specific examples of the oxime compound containing a fluorine atom include compounds described in JP2010-262028; compounds 24 and 36 to 40 described in JP2014-500852; compounds described in JP2013-164471A (C-3); and the like. This content is incorporated herein.
 光重合開始剤として、下記一般式(1)~(4)で表される化合物を用いることもできる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, compounds represented by the following general formulas (1) to (4) can also be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 式(1)において、R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数4~20の脂環式炭化水素基、炭素数6~30のアリール基、又は、炭素数7~30のアリールアルキル基を表し、R及びRがフェニル基の場合、フェニル基同士が結合してフルオレン基を形成してもよく、R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数6~30のアリール基、炭素数7~30のアリールアルキル基又は炭素数4~20の複素環基を表し、Xは、直接結合又はカルボニル基を示す。 In Formula (1), R 1 and R 2 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, R 1 and R 2 is a phenyl group, may form a fluorene group together a phenyl group are bonded to, R 3 and R 4 are each independently, Represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, and X represents a direct bond or carbonyl Indicates a group.
 式(2)において、R、R、R及びRは、式(1)におけるR、R、R及びRと同義であり、Rは、-R、-OR、-SR、-COR、-CONR、-NRCOR、-OCOR、-COOR、-SCOR、-OCSR、-COSR、-CSOR、-CN、ハロゲン原子又は水酸基を表し、Rは、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数6~30のアリール基、炭素数7~30のアリールアルキル基又は炭素数4~20の複素環基を表し、Xは、直接結合又はカルボニル基を表し、aは0~4の整数を表す。 In the formula (2), R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 have the same meanings as R 1, R 2, R 3 and R 4 in Formula (1), R 5 is -R 6, -OR 6 , —SR 6 , —COR 6 , —CONR 6 R 6 , —NR 6 COR 6 , —OCOR 6 , —COOR 6 , —SCOR 6 , —OCSR 6 , —COSR 6 , —CSOR 6 , —CN, halogen represents an atom or a hydroxyl group, R 6 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group or a heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms having 7 to 30 carbon atoms having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, X represents a direct bond or a carbonyl group, and a represents an integer of 0 to 4.
 式(3)において、Rは、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数4~20の脂環式炭化水素基、炭素数6~30のアリール基、又は、炭素数7~30のアリールアルキル基を表し、R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数6~30のアリール基、炭素数7~30のアリールアルキル基又は炭素数4~20の複素環基を表し、Xは、直接結合又はカルボニル基を示す。 In Formula (3), R 1 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms. R 3 and R 4 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms or a carbon number of 4 Represents a heterocyclic group of ˜20, and X represents a direct bond or a carbonyl group.
 式(4)において、R、R及びRは、式(3)におけるR、R及びRと同義であり、Rは、-R、-OR、-SR、-COR、-CONR、-NRCOR、-OCOR、-COOR、-SCOR、-OCSR、-COSR、-CSOR、-CN、ハロゲン原子又は水酸基を表し、Rは、炭素数1~20のアルキル基、炭素数6~30のアリール基、炭素数7~30のアリールアルキル基又は炭素数4~20の複素環基を表し、Xは、直接結合又はカルボニル基を表し、aは0~4の整数を表す。 In the formula (4), R 1, R 3 and R 4 have the same meanings as R 1, R 3 and R 4 in the formula (3), R 5 is, -R 6, -OR 6, -SR 6, Represents —COR 6 , —CONR 6 R 6 , —NR 6 COR 6 , —OCOR 6 , —COOR 6 , —SCOR 6 , —OCSR 6 , —COSR 6 , —CSOR 6 , —CN, a halogen atom or a hydroxyl group; R 6 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylalkyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms or a heterocyclic group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms, and X is a direct bond or Represents a carbonyl group, and a represents an integer of 0 to 4.
 上記式(1)及び式(2)において、R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、i-プロピル、シクロヘキシル基又はフェニル基が好ましい。Rはメチル基、エチル基、フェニル基、トリル基又はキシリル基が好ましい。Rは炭素数1~6のアルキル基又はフェニル基が好ましい。Rはメチル基、エチル基、フェニル基、トリル基又はナフチル基が好ましい。Xは直接結合が好ましい。
 また、上記式(3)及び(4)において、Rは、それぞれ独立に、メチル基、エチル基、n-プロピル基、i-プロピル、シクロヘキシル基又はフェニル基が好ましい。Rはメチル基、エチル基、フェニル基、トリル基又はキシリル基が好ましい。Rは炭素数1~6のアルキル基又はフェニル基が好ましい。Rはメチル基、エチル基、フェニル基、トリル基又はナフチル基が好ましい。Xは直接結合が好ましい。
 式(1)及び式(2)で表される化合物の具体例としては、例えば、特開2014-137466号公報の段落番号0076~0079に記載された化合物が挙げられる。この内容は本明細書に組み込まれることとする。
In the above formulas (1) and (2), R 1 and R 2 are preferably each independently a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an i-propyl group, a cyclohexyl group, or a phenyl group. R 3 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a tolyl group or a xylyl group. R 4 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms or a phenyl group. R 5 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a tolyl group or a naphthyl group. X is preferably a direct bond.
In the above formulas (3) and (4), R 1 is preferably each independently a methyl group, ethyl group, n-propyl group, i-propyl, cyclohexyl group or phenyl group. R 3 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a tolyl group or a xylyl group. R 4 is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms or a phenyl group. R 5 is preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, a phenyl group, a tolyl group or a naphthyl group. X is preferably a direct bond.
Specific examples of the compounds represented by formula (1) and formula (2) include, for example, compounds described in paragraph numbers 0076 to 0079 of JP-A No. 2014-137466. This content is incorporated herein.
 上記組成物に好ましく使用されるオキシム化合物の具体例を以下に示す。 Specific examples of oxime compounds preferably used in the above composition are shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 オキシム化合物は、350nm~500nmの波長領域に極大吸収波長を有するものが好ましく、360nm~480nmの波長領域に極大吸収波長を有するものがより好ましく、365nm及び405nmの吸光度が高いものが更に好ましい。
 オキシム化合物は、365nm又は405nmにおけるモル吸光係数は、感度の観点から、1,000~300,000であることが好ましく、2,000~300,000であることがより好ましく、5,000~200,000であることが更に好ましい。
 化合物のモル吸光係数は、公知の方法を用いることができるが、例えば、紫外可視分光光度計(Varian社製Cary-5 spctrophotometer)にて、酢酸エチル溶媒を用い、0.01g/Lの濃度で測定することが好ましい。
 光重合開始剤は、必要に応じて2種以上を組み合わせて使用してもよい。
The oxime compound preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 350 nm to 500 nm, more preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength region of 360 nm to 480 nm, and more preferably has a high absorbance at 365 nm and 405 nm.
The molar extinction coefficient at 365 nm or 405 nm of the oxime compound is preferably from 1,000 to 300,000, more preferably from 2,000 to 300,000, more preferably from 5,000 to 200, from the viewpoint of sensitivity. Is more preferable.
For the molar extinction coefficient of the compound, a known method can be used. For example, in a UV-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spctrophotometer manufactured by Varian), an ethyl acetate solvent is used at a concentration of 0.01 g / L. It is preferable to measure.
You may use a photoinitiator in combination of 2 or more type as needed.
 上記組成物が重合開始剤を含有する場合、重合開始剤の含有量は、組成物中の全固形分に対して、0.1~30質量%であることが好ましく、1~25質量%であることがより好ましく、1~10質量%であることが更に好ましい。上記組成物は、重合開始剤を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含有する場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 When the composition contains a polymerization initiator, the content of the polymerization initiator is preferably 0.1 to 30% by mass with respect to the total solid content in the composition, preferably 1 to 25% by mass. More preferably, it is 1 to 10% by mass. The composition may contain only one kind of polymerization initiator, or may contain two or more kinds. When two or more types are contained, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
〔その他の任意成分〕
 上記組成物は、以下の任意成分を更に含有してもよい。
[Other optional ingredients]
The composition may further contain the following optional components.
<界面活性剤>
 上記組成物は、塗布性をより向上させる観点から、各種の界面活性剤を含有させてもよい。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、及び、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用できる。
<Surfactant>
The said composition may contain various surfactant from a viewpoint of improving applicability | paintability more. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
 上記組成物にフッ素系界面活性剤を含有させることで、塗布液として調製したときの液特性(特に、流動性)がより向上し、塗布厚の均一性や省液性をより改善することができる。即ち、フッ素系界面活性剤を含有する組成物を適用した塗布液を用いて膜形成する場合においては、被塗布面と塗布液との界面張力が低下して、被塗布面への濡れ性が改善され、被塗布面への塗布性が向上する。このため、厚みムラの小さい均一厚の膜形成をより好適に行うことができる。 By including a fluorosurfactant in the above composition, the liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating liquid can be further improved, and the uniformity of coating thickness and liquid saving can be further improved. it can. That is, in the case of forming a film using a coating liquid to which a composition containing a fluorosurfactant is applied, the interfacial tension between the coated surface and the coating liquid decreases, and the wettability to the coated surface is reduced. It improves and the applicability | paintability to a to-be-coated surface improves. For this reason, it is possible to more suitably form a film having a uniform thickness with small thickness unevenness.
 フッ素系界面活性剤中のフッ素含有率は、3~40質量%が好適であり、より好ましくは5~30質量%であり、更に好ましくは7~25質量%である。フッ素含有率がこの範囲内であるフッ素系界面活性剤は、塗布膜の厚さの均一性や省液性の点で効果的であり、組成物中における溶解性も良好である。 The fluorine content in the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and still more preferably 7 to 25% by mass. A fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and has good solubility in the composition.
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、例えば、メガファックF171、同F172、同F173、同F176、同F177、同F141、同F142、同F143、同F144、同R30、同F437、同F475、同F479、同F482、同F554、同F780、RS-72-K(以上、DIC(株)製)、フロラードFC430、同FC431、同FC171(以上、住友スリーエム(株)製)、サーフロンS-382、同SC-101、同SC-103、同SC-104、同SC-105、同SC-1068、同SC-381、同SC-383、同S-393、同KH-40(以上、旭硝子(株)製)、PF636、PF656、PF6320、PF6520、PF7002(OMNOVA社製)等が挙げられる。フッ素系界面活性剤は、特開2015-117327号公報の段落0015~0158に記載の化合物を用いることもできる。フッ素系界面活性剤としてブロックポリマーを用いることもでき、具体例としては、例えば特開2011-89090号公報に記載された化合物が挙げられる。
 フッ素系界面活性剤は、フッ素原子を含有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくはエチレンオキシ基、プロピレンオキシ基)を2以上(好ましくは5以上)含有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、を含有する含フッ素高分子化合物も好ましく用いることができ、下記化合物も本発明で用いられるフッ素系界面活性剤として例示される。
Examples of the fluorosurfactant include MegaFuck F171, F172, F173, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, RS-72-K (above DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC -101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, SC-1068, SC-381, SC-383, S-393, KH-40 (above, manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.) PF636, PF656, PF6320, PF6520, PF7002 (manufactured by OMNOVA), and the like. As the fluorine-based surfactant, compounds described in paragraphs 0015 to 0158 of JP-A No. 2015-117327 can also be used. A block polymer can also be used as the fluorosurfactant, and specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A-2011-89090.
The fluorine-containing surfactant contains a repeating unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound containing a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy group or propyleneoxy group) ( A fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound can also be preferably used, and the following compounds are also exemplified as the fluorine-based surfactant used in the present invention.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 上記の化合物の重量平均分子量は、好ましくは3,000~50,000であり、例えば、14,000である。
 また、エチレン性不飽和基を側鎖に含有する含フッ素重合体をフッ素系界面活性剤として用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2010-164965号公報0050~0090段落及び0289~0295段落に記載された化合物、例えばDIC社製のメガファックRS-101、RS-102、RS-718K、RS-72-K等が挙げられる。
The weight average molecular weight of the above compound is preferably 3,000 to 50,000, for example, 14,000.
In addition, a fluoropolymer containing an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain can also be used as the fluorosurfactant. Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A 2010-164965, paragraphs 0050 to 0090 and 0289 to 0295, for example, MegaFac RS-101, RS-102, RS-718K, RS-72- manufactured by DIC. K etc. are mentioned.
 ノニオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、グリセロール、トリメチロールプロパン、トリメチロールエタン並びにそれらのエトキシレート及びプロポキシレート(例えば、グリセロールプロポキシレート、グリセリンエトキシレート等)、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル(BASF社製のプルロニックL10、L31、L61、L62、10R5、17R2、25R2、テトロニック304、701、704、901、904、150R1)、ソルスパース20000(日本ルーブリゾール(株)製)等が挙げられる。また、和光純薬工業社製の、NCW-101、NCW-1001、NCW-1002を使用することもできる。 Specific examples of nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane, and ethoxylates and propoxylates thereof (for example, glycerol propoxylate, glycerin ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene Stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester (Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62 manufactured by BASF, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2, Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1), Rusupasu 20000 (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Corporation), and the like. Also, NCW-101, NCW-1001, NCW-1002 manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd. can be used.
 カチオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、フタロシアニン誘導体(商品名:EFKA-745、森下産業(株)製)、オルガノシロキサンポリマーKP341(信越化学工業(株)製)、(メタ)アクリル酸系(共)重合体ポリフローNo.75、No.90、No.95(共栄社化学(株)製)、W001(裕商(株)製)等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the cationic surfactant include phthalocyanine derivatives (trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.), organosiloxane polymer KP341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), W001 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 アニオン系界面活性剤として具体的には、W004、W005、W017(裕商(株)社製)、サンデットBL(三洋化成(株)社製)等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of anionic surfactants include W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.), Sandet BL (manufactured by Sanyo Chemical Co., Ltd.), and the like.
 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、例えば、トーレシリコーンDC3PA、トーレシリコーンSH7PA、トーレシリコーンDC11PA、トーレシリコーンSH21PA、トーレシリコーンSH28PA、トーレシリコーンSH29PA、トーレシリコーンSH30PA、トーレシリコーンSH8400(以上、東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製)、TSF-4440、TSF-4300、TSF-4445、TSF-4460、TSF-4452(以上、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製)、KP341、KF6001、KF6002(以上、信越シリコーン株式会社製)、BYK307、BYK323、BYK330(以上、ビックケミー社製)等が挙げられる。 Examples of silicone-based surfactants include Torre Silicone DC3PA, Torre Silicone SH7PA, Torre Silicone DC11PA, Torresilicone SH21PA, Torree Silicone SH28PA, Torree Silicone SH29PA, Torree Silicone SH30PA, Torree Silicone SH8400 (above, Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.) )), TSF-4440, TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4442 (above, manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), KP341, KF6001, KF6002 (above, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.) , BYK307, BYK323, BYK330 (above, manufactured by BYK Chemie) and the like.
 界面活性剤は、1種のみを用いてもよいし、2種類以上を組み合わせてもよい。界面活性剤の含有量は、上記組成物の全固形分に対して、0.001~2.0質量%が好ましく、0.005~1.0質量%がより好ましい。 Only one type of surfactant may be used, or two or more types may be combined. The content of the surfactant is preferably 0.001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005 to 1.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
<着色剤>
 上記組成物は、金属窒化物含有粒子以外の着色剤(以下、単に「着色剤」ともいう。)を含有してもよい。着色剤は、例えば、組成物の色度調整のために用いられ、OD(Optical Density)値が低下しない範囲で、金属窒化物含有粒子の一部を着色剤に置き換えることが可能である。このような着色剤としては、顔料(黒色有機顔料及び有彩色の有機顔料、並びに、無機顔料)及び染料等が挙げられる。
<Colorant>
The composition may contain a colorant other than the metal nitride-containing particles (hereinafter also simply referred to as “colorant”). The colorant is used, for example, for adjusting the chromaticity of the composition, and it is possible to replace a part of the metal nitride-containing particles with the colorant as long as the OD (Optical Density) value does not decrease. Examples of such a colorant include pigments (black organic pigments and chromatic organic pigments, and inorganic pigments) and dyes.
(顔料)
 顔料としては、特に制限されず、公知の顔料を用いることができる。有彩色の有機顔料としては、例えば、カラーインデックス(C.I.)ピグメントイエロー1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35:1,36,36:1,37,37:1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97,98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139,147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214等;
 C.I.ピグメントオレンジ 2,5,13,16,17:1,31,34,36,38,43,46,48,49,51,52,55,59,60,61,62,64,71,73等;
 C.I.ピグメントレッド 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48:2,48:3,48:4,49,49:1,49:2,52:1,52:2,53:1,57:1,60:1,63:1,66,67,81:1,81:2,81:3,83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184,185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,270,272,279等;
 C.I.ピグメントグリーン 7,10,36,37,58,59等;
 C.I.ピグメントバイオレット 1,19,23,27,32,37,42等;
 C.I.ピグメントブルー 1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:6,16,22,60,64,66,79,80等;
が挙げられる。
(Pigment)
The pigment is not particularly limited, and a known pigment can be used. Examples of chromatic organic pigments include, for example, Color Index (CI) Pigment Yellow 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 24, 31, 32, 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36: 1, 37, 37: 1, 40, 42, 43, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 63, 65, 73, 74, 77, 81, 83, 86, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 123, 125, 126, 127, 128, 129, 137, 138, 139, 147, 148, 150, 151, 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 161, 162, 164, 166, 167 Etc. 168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214;
C. I. Pigment Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, etc. ;
C. I. Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 14, 17, 22, 23, 31, 38, 41, 48: 1, 48: 2, 48: 3, 48: 4 49, 49: 1, 49: 2, 52: 1, 52: 2, 53: 1, 57: 1, 60: 1, 63: 1, 66, 67, 81: 1, 81: 2, 81: 3 83, 88, 90, 105, 112, 119, 122, 123, 144, 146, 149, 150, 155, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 184 185, 187, 188, 190, 200, 202, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 216, 220, 224, 226, 242, 246, 254, 255, 264, 270, 272, 279, etc .;
C. I. Pigment green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59, etc .;
C. I. Pigment violet 1, 19, 23, 27, 32, 37, 42, etc .;
C. I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 6, 16, 22, 60, 64, 66, 79, 80, etc .;
Is mentioned.
 また、緑色顔料として、分子中のハロゲン原子数が平均10~14個であり、臭素原子が平均8~12個であり、塩素原子が平均2~5個であるハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料を用いることも可能である。具体例としては、国際公開第2015/118720号に記載の化合物が挙げられる。
 これら有機顔料は、単独若しくは色純度を上げるため種々組合せて用いることができる。
Further, as the green pigment, a zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment having an average number of halogen atoms in the molecule of 10 to 14, bromine atoms on average 8 to 12, and chlorine atoms on average 2 to 5 should be used. Is also possible. Specific examples include the compounds described in International Publication No. 2015/118720.
These organic pigments can be used alone or in various combinations in order to increase color purity.
 黒色顔料は、各種公知の黒色顔料を用いることができる。たとえば、カーボンブラック及び/又は以下に示す黒色金属含有無機顔料が挙げられる。黒色金属含有無機顔料としては、Co、Cr、Cu、Mn、Ru、Fe、Ni、Sn、Ti及びAgからなる群より選ばれた1種又は2種以上の金属元素を含有する金属酸化物が挙げられる。これらは1種のみを用いてもよく、また、2種以上の混合物として用いることもできる。また、黒色顔料に、更に、他の色相の無機顔料を組み合わせて用いることで、所望の遮光性を有するように、調製してもよい。組みあわせて用いうる具体的な無機顔料の例として、例えば、亜鉛華、鉛白、リトポン、酸化チタン、酸化クロム、酸化鉄、沈降性硫酸バリウム及びバライト粉、鉛丹、酸化鉄赤、黄鉛、亜鉛黄(亜鉛黄1種、亜鉛黄2種)、ウルトラマリン青、プロシア青(フェロシアン化鉄カリ)ジルコングレー、プラセオジムイエロー、クロムチタンイエロー、クロムグリーン、ピーコック、ビクトリアグリーン、紺青(プルシアンブルーとは無関係)、バナジウムジルコニウム青、クロム錫ピンク、陶試紅、サーモンピンク等が挙げられる。特に、紫外から赤外までの広い波長域での遮光性を発現する目的で、これら黒色顔料や他の色相を有する無機顔料を、単独のみならず、複数種の顔料を混合し、使用することが可能である。 Various known black pigments can be used as the black pigment. Examples thereof include carbon black and / or black metal-containing inorganic pigments shown below. Examples of the black metal-containing inorganic pigment include metal oxides containing one or more metal elements selected from the group consisting of Co, Cr, Cu, Mn, Ru, Fe, Ni, Sn, Ti, and Ag. Can be mentioned. These may be used alone or as a mixture of two or more. Moreover, you may prepare so that it may have desired light-shielding property by combining and using the inorganic pigment of another hue further in a black pigment. Examples of specific inorganic pigments that can be used in combination include, for example, zinc white, lead white, lithopone, titanium oxide, chromium oxide, iron oxide, precipitated barium sulfate and barite powder, red lead, iron oxide red, and yellow lead. , Zinc yellow (1 type of zinc yellow, 2 types of zinc yellow), ultramarine blue, prussian blue (potassium ferrocyanide) zircon gray, praseodymium yellow, chrome titanium yellow, chrome green, peacock, victoria green, bitumen blue (Prussian blue) ), Vanadium zirconium blue, chrome tin pink, pottery red, salmon pink and the like. In particular, these black pigments and other inorganic pigments having other hues are used not only independently but also in combination with a plurality of types of pigments for the purpose of expressing light-shielding properties in a wide wavelength range from ultraviolet to infrared. Is possible.
 黒色顔料は、平均一次粒子径が5nm以上であることが好ましく、10nm以上であることが好ましい。同様の観点から、上限としては10μm以下であることが好ましく、1μm以下であることがより好ましく、100nm以下であることが更に好ましい。黒色顔料の平均一次粒子径は、金属窒化物含有粒子の平均一次粒子径と同様の方法で測定した平均一次粒子径を意図する。 The average primary particle diameter of the black pigment is preferably 5 nm or more, and preferably 10 nm or more. From the same viewpoint, the upper limit is preferably 10 μm or less, more preferably 1 μm or less, and still more preferably 100 nm or less. The average primary particle diameter of the black pigment is intended to be the average primary particle diameter measured by the same method as the average primary particle diameter of the metal nitride-containing particles.
(染料)
 染料としては、例えば特開昭64-90403号公報、特開昭64-91102号公報、特開平1-94301号公報、特開平6-11614号公報、特登2592207号、米国特許4808501号明細書、米国特許5667920号明細書、米国特許505950号明細書、特開平5-333207号公報、特開平6-35183号公報、特開平6-51115号公報、及び特開平6-194828号公報等に開示されている色素を使用できる。化学構造として区分すると、ピラゾールアゾ化合物、ピロメテン化合物、アニリノアゾ化合物、トリフェニルメタン化合物、アントラキノン化合物、ベンジリデン化合物、オキソノール化合物、ピラゾロトリアゾールアゾ化合物、ピリドンアゾ化合物、シアニン化合物、フェノチアジン化合物、及びピロロピラゾールアゾメチン化合物等を使用できる。また、染料としては色素多量体を用いてもよい。色素多量体としては、特開2011-213925号公報、及び特開2013-041097号公報に記載されている化合物が挙げられる。
(dye)
Examples of the dye include, for example, JP-A No. 64-90403, JP-A No. 64-91102, JP-A No. 1-94301, JP-A No. 6-11614, No. 2592207, and US Pat. No. 4,808,501. Disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,667,920, U.S. Pat. No. 505950, JP-A-5-333207, JP-A-6-35183, JP-A-6-51115, and JP-A-6-194828. Can be used. When classified as chemical structures, pyrazole azo compounds, pyromethene compounds, anilinoazo compounds, triphenylmethane compounds, anthraquinone compounds, benzylidene compounds, oxonol compounds, pyrazolotriazole azo compounds, pyridone azo compounds, cyanine compounds, phenothiazine compounds, and pyrrolopyrazole azomethine compounds Etc. can be used. A dye multimer may be used as the dye. Examples of the dye multimer include compounds described in JP2011-213925A and JP2013-041097A.
 上記組成物は、着色剤に加えて、必要に応じて体質顔料を含んでいてもよい。このような体質顔料としては、例えば、硫酸バリウム、炭酸バリウム、炭酸カルシウム、シリカ、塩基性炭酸マグネシウム、アルミナ白、グロス白、チタンホワイト、及びハイドロタルサイト等を挙げることができる。これらの体質顔料は、単独で又は2種以上を混合して使用することができる。体質顔料の使用量は、着色剤100質量部に対して、通常、0~100質量部、好ましくは5~50質量部、より好ましくは10~40質量部である。着色剤及び体質顔料は、それらの表面をポリマーで改質して使用することができる。 The above composition may contain extender pigments as necessary in addition to the colorant. Examples of such extender pigments include barium sulfate, barium carbonate, calcium carbonate, silica, basic magnesium carbonate, alumina white, gloss white, titanium white, and hydrotalcite. These extender pigments can be used alone or in admixture of two or more. The amount of extender used is usually 0 to 100 parts by weight, preferably 5 to 50 parts by weight, and more preferably 10 to 40 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the colorant. Colorants and extenders can be used with their surfaces modified with polymers.
 着色剤は1種を単独で用いても、2種以上を併用してもよい。着色剤としては、赤色、青色、黄色、緑色、及び、紫色等の着色有機顔料を含有してもよい。遮光性顔料(具体的には、金属窒化物含有粒子)と着色有機顔料とを併用する場合には、着色有機顔料を遮光性顔料に対して1~40質量%用いることが好ましい。色味を調整する観点から赤色顔料と遮光性顔料とを併用することが好ましく、特に限定はされないが赤色顔料としてはピグメントレッド254であることが好ましい。また、遮光性を高める観点から黄色顔料と遮光性顔料とを併用することが好ましく、特に限定はされないが黄色顔料としてはピグメントイエロー150であることが好ましい。 Coloring agents may be used alone or in combination of two or more. As a coloring agent, you may contain colored organic pigments, such as red, blue, yellow, green, and purple. When a light-shielding pigment (specifically, metal nitride-containing particles) and a colored organic pigment are used in combination, it is preferable to use the colored organic pigment in an amount of 1 to 40% by mass based on the light-shielding pigment. From the viewpoint of adjusting the color, it is preferable to use a red pigment and a light-shielding pigment in combination. Pigment Red 254 is preferable as the red pigment, although not particularly limited. Moreover, it is preferable to use a yellow pigment and a light-shielding pigment in combination from the viewpoint of enhancing the light-shielding property, and although it is not particularly limited, Pigment Yellow 150 is preferable as the yellow pigment.
 上記組成物が着色剤を含有する場合には、着色剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、20~80質量%が好ましく、30~70質量%がより好ましく、35~60質量%が更に好ましい。 When the composition contains a colorant, the content of the colorant is preferably from 20 to 80% by mass, more preferably from 30 to 70% by mass, and more preferably from 35 to 60% based on the total solid content of the composition. More preferred is mass%.
<顔料誘導体>
 上記組成物は、顔料誘導体を含有することができる。顔料誘導体としては、例えば、有機顔料の一部分を、酸性基、塩基性基又はフタルイミドメチル基で置換した構造を含有する化合物が挙げられる。
 顔料誘導体を構成するための有機顔料としては、ジケトピロロピロール系顔料、アゾ系顔料、フタロシアニン系顔料、アントラキノン系顔料、キナクリドン系顔料、ジオキサジン系顔料、ペリノン系顔料、ペリレン系顔料、チオインジゴ系顔料、イソインドリン系顔料、イソインドリノン系顔料、キノフタロン系顔料、スレン系顔料、及び金属錯体系顔料等が挙げられる。
 また、顔料誘導体が含有する酸性基としては、スルホン酸基、カルボン酸基及びその4級アンモニウム塩基が好ましく、カルボン酸基又はスルホン酸基が更に好ましく、スルホン酸基が特に好ましい。顔料誘導体が含有する塩基性基としては、アミノ基が好ましく、三級アミノ基がより好ましい。
 顔料誘導体の具体例としては、例えば下記化合物が挙げられる。また、特開2011-252065号公報の段落0162~0183の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Pigment derivative>
The composition can contain a pigment derivative. Examples of the pigment derivative include a compound containing a structure in which a part of an organic pigment is substituted with an acidic group, a basic group, or a phthalimidomethyl group.
Examples of the organic pigment for constituting the pigment derivative include diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments, azo pigments, phthalocyanine pigments, anthraquinone pigments, quinacridone pigments, dioxazine pigments, perinone pigments, perylene pigments, thioindigo pigments , Isoindoline pigments, isoindolinone pigments, quinophthalone pigments, selenium pigments, metal complex pigments, and the like.
Moreover, as an acidic group which a pigment derivative contains, a sulfonic acid group, a carboxylic acid group, and its quaternary ammonium base are preferable, a carboxylic acid group or a sulfonic acid group is still more preferable, and a sulfonic acid group is especially preferable. The basic group contained in the pigment derivative is preferably an amino group, more preferably a tertiary amino group.
Specific examples of the pigment derivative include the following compounds. In addition, the descriptions in paragraphs 0162 to 0183 of JP2011-252065 A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in this specification.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 上記組成物が顔料誘導体を含有する場合、顔料誘導体の含有量は、着色剤の全質量に対し、1~30質量%が好ましく、3~20質量%が更に好ましい。上記組成物は、顔料誘導体を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含有する場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 When the composition contains a pigment derivative, the content of the pigment derivative is preferably 1 to 30% by mass, and more preferably 3 to 20% by mass with respect to the total mass of the colorant. The composition may contain only one type of pigment derivative or two or more types of pigment derivatives. When two or more types are contained, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
<シランカップリング剤>
 シランカップリング剤とは、分子中に加水分解性基とそれ以外の官能基を含有する化合物である。なお、アルコキシ基等の加水分解性基は、珪素原子に結合している。
 加水分解性基とは、珪素原子に直結し、加水分解反応及び/又は縮合反応によってシロキサン結合を生じ得る置換基をいう。加水分解性基としては、例えば、ハロゲン原子、アルコキシ基、アシルオキシ基、及びアルケニルオキシ基が挙げられる。加水分解性基が炭素原子を含有する場合、その炭素数は6以下であることが好ましく、4以下であることがより好ましい。特に、炭素数4以下のアルコキシ基又は炭素数4以下のアルケニルオキシ基が好ましい。
 また、基板上に硬化膜を形成する場合、シランカップリング剤は基板と硬化膜間の密着性を向上させるため、フッ素原子及び珪素原子(ただし、加水分解性基が結合した珪素原子は除く)を含まないことが好ましく、フッ素原子、珪素原子(ただし、加水分解性基が結合した珪素原子は除く)、珪素原子で置換されたアルキレン基、炭素数8以上の直鎖アルキル基、及び、炭素数3以上の分鎖アルキル基は含まないことが望ましい。
<Silane coupling agent>
A silane coupling agent is a compound containing a hydrolyzable group and other functional groups in the molecule. Note that a hydrolyzable group such as an alkoxy group is bonded to a silicon atom.
The hydrolyzable group refers to a substituent that is directly bonded to a silicon atom and can form a siloxane bond by a hydrolysis reaction and / or a condensation reaction. Examples of the hydrolyzable group include a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, an acyloxy group, and an alkenyloxy group. When the hydrolyzable group contains a carbon atom, the number of carbon atoms is preferably 6 or less, and more preferably 4 or less. In particular, an alkoxy group having 4 or less carbon atoms or an alkenyloxy group having 4 or less carbon atoms is preferable.
In addition, when forming a cured film on the substrate, the silane coupling agent improves the adhesion between the substrate and the cured film, so fluorine atoms and silicon atoms (however, excluding silicon atoms to which hydrolyzable groups are bonded) It is preferable that it does not contain, a fluorine atom, a silicon atom (except a silicon atom to which a hydrolyzable group is bonded), an alkylene group substituted with a silicon atom, a linear alkyl group having 8 or more carbon atoms, and carbon It is desirable not to include a branched alkyl group of several or more.
 シランカップリング剤は、以下の式(Z)で表される基を含有することが好ましい。*は結合位置を表す。
 式(Z) *-Si-(RZ1
 式(Z)中、RZ1は加水分解性基を表し、その定義は上記のとおりである。
The silane coupling agent preferably contains a group represented by the following formula (Z). * Represents a bonding position.
Formula (Z) * -Si- (R Z1 ) 3
In formula (Z), R Z1 represents a hydrolyzable group, and the definition thereof is as described above.
 シランカップリング剤は、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基、エポキシ基、及び、オキセタニル基からなる群から選択される1種以上の硬化性官能基を含有することが好ましい。硬化性官能基は、直接、珪素原子に結合してもよく、連結基を介して珪素原子に結合していてもよい。
 なお、上記シランカップリング剤に含まれる硬化性官能基の好適態様としては、ラジカル重合性基も挙げられる。
The silane coupling agent preferably contains one or more curable functional groups selected from the group consisting of a (meth) acryloyloxy group, an epoxy group, and an oxetanyl group. The curable functional group may be directly bonded to the silicon atom, or may be bonded to the silicon atom via a linking group.
In addition, a radically polymerizable group is also mentioned as a suitable aspect of the curable functional group contained in the said silane coupling agent.
 シランカップリング剤の分子量は特に制限されず、取り扱い性の点から、100~1000の場合が多く、270以上が好ましく、270~1000がより好ましい。 The molecular weight of the silane coupling agent is not particularly limited, and is often 100 to 1000 from the viewpoint of handleability, preferably 270 or more, and more preferably 270 to 1000.
 シランカップリング剤の好適態様の一つとしては、式(W)で表されるシランカップリング剤Xが挙げられる。
 式(W)   RZ2-Lz-Si-(RZ1
 Rz1は、加水分解性基を表し、定義は上記のとおりである。
 Rz2は、硬化性官能基を表し、定義は上記のとおりであり、好適範囲も上記のとおりである。
 Lzは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。Lzが2価の連結基を表す場合、2価の連結基としては、ハロゲン原子が置換していてもよいアルキレン基、ハロゲン原子が置換していてもよいアリーレン基、-NR12-、-CONR12-、-CO-、-CO-、SONR12-、-O-、-S-、-SO-、又は、これらの組み合わせが挙げられる。なかでも、炭素数2~10のハロゲン原子が置換していてもよいアルキレン基及び炭素数6~12のハロゲン原子が置換していてもよいアリーレン基からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種、又は、これらの基と-NR12-、-CONR12-、-CO-、-CO-、SONR12-、-O-、-S-、及びSO-からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の基との組み合わせからなる基が好ましく、炭素数2~10のハロゲン原子が置換していてもよいアルキレン基、-CO-、-O-、-CO-、-CONR12-、又は、これらの基の組み合わせからなる基がより好ましい。ここで、上記R12は、水素原子又はメチル基を表す。
One preferred embodiment of the silane coupling agent is a silane coupling agent X represented by the formula (W).
Formula (W) R Z2 -Lz-Si- (R Z1 ) 3
R z1 represents a hydrolyzable group, and the definition is as described above.
R z2 represents a curable functional group, the definition is as described above, and the preferred range is also as described above.
Lz represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. When Lz represents a divalent linking group, examples of the divalent linking group include an alkylene group which may be substituted with a halogen atom, an arylene group which may be substituted with a halogen atom, —NR 12 —, —CONR 12 -, - CO -, - CO 2 -, SO 2 NR 12 -, - O -, - S -, - SO 2 -, or combinations thereof. Among them, at least one selected from the group consisting of an alkylene group which may be substituted with a halogen atom having 2 to 10 carbon atoms and an arylene group which may be substituted with a halogen atom having 6 to 12 carbon atoms, or At least selected from the group consisting of these groups and —NR 12 —, —CONR 12 —, —CO—, —CO 2 —, SO 2 NR 12 —, —O—, —S—, and SO 2 —. A group composed of a combination with one kind of group is preferable, an alkylene group which may be substituted by a halogen atom having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, —CO 2 —, —O—, —CO—, —CONR 12 —, or A group consisting of a combination of these groups is more preferred. Here, R 12 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
 シランカップリング剤Xとしては、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピル-メチルジメトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製商品名 KBM-602)、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピル-トリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製商品名 KBM-603)、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピル-トリエトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製商品名 KBE-602)、γ-アミノプロピル-トリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製商品名 KBM-903)、γ-アミノプロピル-トリエトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製商品名 KBE-903)、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製商品名 KBM-503)、及び、グリシドキシオクチルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製商品名 KBM-4803)等が挙げられる。 As the silane coupling agent X, N-β-aminoethyl-γ-aminopropyl-methyldimethoxysilane (trade name KBM-602 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), N-β-aminoethyl-γ-aminopropyl-trimethoxy Silane (trade name KBM-603 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), N-β-aminoethyl-γ-aminopropyl-triethoxysilane (trade name KBE-602 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), γ-aminopropyl-trimethoxysilane (Trade name KBM-903 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), γ-aminopropyl-triethoxysilane (trade name KBE-903 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane (trade name manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) KBM-503) and glycidoxyoctyltrimethoxysilane (trade name, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) KBM-4803) and the like.
 シランカップリング剤の他の好適態様としては、分子内に少なくとも珪素原子と窒素原子と硬化性官能基とを有し、かつ、珪素原子に結合した加水分解性基を含有するシランカップリング剤Yが挙げられる。
 このシランカップリング剤Yは、分子内に少なくとも1つの珪素原子を有すればよく、珪素原子は、以下の原子、置換基と結合できる。それらは同じ原子、置換基であっても異なっていてもよい。結合しうる原子、置換基は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、水酸基、炭素数1から20のアルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、アルキル基及び/又はアリール基で置換可能なアミノ基、シリル基、炭素数1から20のアルコキシ基、アリーロキシ基等が挙げられる。これらの置換基は更に、シリル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリーロキシ基、チオアルコキシ基、アルキル基及び/又はアリール基で置換可能なアミノ基、ハロゲン原子、スルホンアミド基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アミド基、ウレア基、アンモニウム基、アルキルアンモニウム基、カルボン酸基、又はその塩、スルホ基、又はその塩等で置換されていてもよい。
 なお、珪素原子には少なくとも一つの加水分解性基が結合している。加水分解性基の定義は、上記のとおりである。
 シランカップリング剤Yには、式(Z)で表される基が含まれていてもよい。
As another preferred embodiment of the silane coupling agent, a silane coupling agent Y having at least a silicon atom, a nitrogen atom, and a curable functional group in the molecule and containing a hydrolyzable group bonded to the silicon atom. Is mentioned.
The silane coupling agent Y only needs to have at least one silicon atom in the molecule, and the silicon atom can be bonded to the following atoms and substituents. They may be the same atom, substituent or different. Atoms and substituents that can be bonded are a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, an alkyl group and / or an aryl group, a silyl group Group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an aryloxy group, and the like. These substituents further include an amino group, a halogen atom, a sulfonamide group, a silyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a thioalkoxy group, an alkyl group and / or an aryl group. It may be substituted with an alkoxycarbonyl group, an amide group, a urea group, an ammonium group, an alkylammonium group, a carboxylic acid group, or a salt thereof, a sulfo group, or a salt thereof.
Note that at least one hydrolyzable group is bonded to the silicon atom. The definition of the hydrolyzable group is as described above.
The silane coupling agent Y may contain a group represented by the formula (Z).
 シランカップリング剤Yは、分子内に窒素原子を少なくとも1つ以上有し、窒素原子は、2級アミノ基或いは3級アミノ基の形態で存在することが好ましく、即ち、窒素原子は置換基として少なくとも1つの有機基を含有することが好ましい。なお、アミノ基の構造としては、含窒素ヘテロ環の部分構造の形態で分子内に存在してもよく、アニリン等置換アミノ基として存在していてもよい。
 ここで、有機基としては、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、又は、これらの組み合わせ等が挙げられる。これらは更に置換基を有してもよく、導入可能な置換基としては、シリル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、アルコキシ基、アリーロキシ基、チオアルコキシ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子、スルホンアミド基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルボニルオキシ基、アミド基、ウレア基、アルキレンオキシ基アンモニウム基、アルキルアンモニウム基、カルボン酸基、又はその塩、スルホ基等が挙げられる。
 また、窒素原子は、任意の有機連結基を介して硬化性官能基と結合していることが好ましい。好ましい有機連結基としては、上記の窒素原子及びそれに結合する有機基に導入可能な置換基を挙げることができる。
The silane coupling agent Y has at least one nitrogen atom in the molecule, and the nitrogen atom is preferably present in the form of a secondary amino group or a tertiary amino group, that is, the nitrogen atom is used as a substituent. It preferably contains at least one organic group. The amino group structure may be present in the molecule in the form of a partial structure of a nitrogen-containing heterocycle, or may be present as a substituted amino group such as aniline.
Here, examples of the organic group include an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, or a combination thereof. These may further have a substituent. Examples of the substituent that can be introduced include a silyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a thioalkoxy group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and a sulfonamide. Group, alkoxycarbonyl group, carbonyloxy group, amide group, urea group, alkyleneoxy group ammonium group, alkylammonium group, carboxylic acid group, or a salt thereof, sulfo group and the like.
Moreover, it is preferable that the nitrogen atom is couple | bonded with the curable functional group through arbitrary organic coupling groups. Preferred examples of the organic linking group include a substituent that can be introduced into the nitrogen atom and the organic group bonded thereto.
 シランカップリング剤Yに含まれる硬化性官能基の定義は、上記のとおりであり、好適範囲も上記のとおりである。
 シランカップリング剤Yには、硬化性官能基は一分子中に少なくとも一つ以上有していればよいが、硬化性官能基を2以上含有する態様をとることも可能であり、感度、安定性の観点からは、硬化性官能基を2~20含有することが好ましく、4~15含有することが更に好ましく、最も好ましくは分子内に硬化性官能基を6~10含有する態様である。
The definition of the curable functional group contained in the silane coupling agent Y is as described above, and the preferred range is also as described above.
The silane coupling agent Y only needs to have at least one curable functional group in one molecule, but it is also possible to take an embodiment in which two or more curable functional groups are contained. From the viewpoint of property, it is preferable to contain 2 to 20 curable functional groups, more preferably 4 to 15 and most preferably 6 to 10 curable functional groups in the molecule.
 シランカップリング剤X及びシランカップリング剤Yの分子量は特に制限されないが、上記の範囲(270以上が好ましい)が挙げられる。 The molecular weights of the silane coupling agent X and the silane coupling agent Y are not particularly limited, but include the above ranges (preferably 270 or more).
 上記組成物中におけるシランカップリング剤の含有量は、組成物中の全固形分に対して、0.1~10質量%が好ましく、0.5~8質量%がより好ましく、1.0~6質量%が更に好ましい。 The content of the silane coupling agent in the composition is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, more preferably 0.5 to 8% by mass, and more preferably 1.0 to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content in the composition. 6 mass% is still more preferable.
 上記組成物は、シランカップリング剤を1種単独で含んでいてもよく、2種以上を含んでいてもよい。組成物がシランカップリング剤を2種以上含有する場合は、その合計が上記範囲内であればよい。 The above composition may contain one silane coupling agent or two or more silane coupling agents. When a composition contains 2 or more types of silane coupling agents, the sum should just be in the said range.
<紫外線吸収剤>
 上記組成物は、紫外線吸収剤を含有してもよい。これにより、硬化膜のパターンの形状をより優れた(精細な)ものにすることができる。
 紫外線吸収剤としては、サリシレート系、ベンゾフェノン系、ベンゾトリアゾール系、置換アクリロニトリル系、及びトリアジン系の紫外線吸収剤を使用することができる。これらの具体例としては、特開2012-068418号公報の段落0137~0142(対応するUS2012/0068292の段落0251~0254)の化合物が使用でき、これらの内容が援用でき、本明細書に組み込まれる。
 他にジエチルアミノ-フェニルスルホニル系紫外線吸収剤(大東化学社製、商品名:UV-503)なども好適に用いられる。
 紫外線吸収剤としては、特開2012-32556号公報の段落0134~0148に例示される化合物が挙げられる。
 紫外線吸収剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.001~15質量%が好ましく、0.01~10質量%がより好ましく、0.1~5質量%が更に好ましい。
<Ultraviolet absorber>
The composition may contain an ultraviolet absorber. Thereby, the shape of the pattern of a cured film can be made more excellent (fine).
As the ultraviolet absorber, salicylate, benzophenone, benzotriazole, substituted acrylonitrile, and triazine ultraviolet absorbers can be used. As specific examples thereof, compounds of paragraphs 0137 to 0142 (corresponding to paragraphs 0251 to 0254 of US2012 / 0068292) of JP2012-068418A can be used, and the contents thereof can be incorporated and incorporated in the present specification. .
In addition, a diethylamino-phenylsulfonyl-based ultraviolet absorber (manufactured by Daito Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: UV-503) is also preferably used.
Examples of the ultraviolet absorber include compounds exemplified in paragraphs 0134 to 0148 of JP2012-32556A.
The content of the ultraviolet absorber is preferably 0.001 to 15% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 10% by mass, and still more preferably 0.1 to 5% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
<重合禁止剤>
 上記組成物は、重合禁止剤を含有してもよい。重合禁止剤としては、ハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ジ-t-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、t-ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、4,4’-チオビス(3-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、2,2’-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミン第一セリウム塩等が挙げられる。
 重合禁止剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~5質量%が好ましい。上記組成物は、重合禁止剤を、1種類のみを含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含有する場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。
 また必要に応じて、酸素による重合阻害を防止するためにベヘン酸及び/又はベヘン酸アミド等の高級脂肪酸誘導体等を添加して、塗布後の乾燥の過程で塗布膜の表面に偏在させてもよい。高級脂肪酸誘導体の含有量は、組成物の全固形分に対して、0.5~10質量%が好ましい。
<Polymerization inhibitor>
The composition may contain a polymerization inhibitor. Polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis (3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine primary cerium salt and the like.
The content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. The composition may contain only one type of polymerization inhibitor, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are contained, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
If necessary, higher fatty acid derivatives such as behenic acid and / or behenic acid amide may be added to prevent polymerization inhibition due to oxygen and unevenly distributed on the surface of the coating film during the drying process after coating. Good. The content of the higher fatty acid derivative is preferably 0.5 to 10% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
 上記成分以外にも、上記組成物には、以下の成分を更に添加してもよい。例えば、増感剤、共増感剤、架橋剤、硬化促進剤、フィラー、熱硬化促進剤、可塑剤、希釈剤、及び感脂化剤などが挙げられ、更に、基板表面への密着促進剤及びその他の助剤類(例えば、導電性粒子、充填剤、消泡剤、難燃剤、レベリング剤、剥離促進剤、酸化防止剤、香料、表面張力調整剤、及び、連鎖移動剤など)等の公知の添加剤を必要に応じて加えてもよい。
 これらの成分は、例えば、特開2012-003225号公報の段落番号0183~0228(対応する米国特許出願公開第2013/0034812号明細書の<0237>~<0309>)、特開2008-250074号公報の段落番号0101~0102、段落番号0103~0104、段落番号0107~0109、及び特開2013-195480号公報の段落番号0159~0184等の記載を参酌でき、これらの内容は本願明細書に組み込まれる。
In addition to the above components, the following components may be further added to the composition. Examples include sensitizers, co-sensitizers, crosslinking agents, curing accelerators, fillers, thermosetting accelerators, plasticizers, diluents, and sensitizers, and further adhesion promoters to the substrate surface. And other auxiliaries (for example, conductive particles, fillers, antifoaming agents, flame retardants, leveling agents, peeling accelerators, antioxidants, fragrances, surface tension modifiers, chain transfer agents, etc.) You may add a well-known additive as needed.
These components include, for example, paragraph numbers 0183 to 0228 of JP2012-003225A (corresponding <0237> to <0309> of US Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0034812) and JP2008-250074. The descriptions of paragraph numbers 0101 to 0102, paragraph numbers 0103 to 0104, paragraph numbers 0107 to 0109, and paragraph numbers 0159 to 0184 of JP 2013-195480 A can be taken into consideration, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. It is.
〔組成物の製造方法〕
 上記組成物の製造方法は以下の混合及び分散工程を含有する。また、静置工程及び/又はろ過工程を含有することがより好ましい。以下では、各工程について好適態様を詳述する。
[Production Method of Composition]
The manufacturing method of the said composition contains the following mixing and dispersion | distribution processes. Moreover, it is more preferable to contain a stationary process and / or a filtration process. Below, a suitable aspect is explained in full detail about each process.
<混合及び分散工程>
 混合及び分散工程は、上記成分を公知の混合方法(例えば、攪拌機、ホモジナイザー、高圧乳化装置、湿式粉砕機、及び湿式分散機)により混合し、組成物を得る工程である。
 混合及び分散工程においては、組成物を構成する各成分を一括配合してもよいし、各成分を有機溶剤に溶解又は分散した後に逐次配合してもよい。また、配合する際の投入順序及び作業条件は、特に制限されない。又、混合及び分散工程は、分散液を作製する工程を含有してもよい。
<Mixing and dispersing process>
A mixing and dispersion | distribution process is a process of mixing the said component with a well-known mixing method (For example, a stirrer, a homogenizer, a high-pressure emulsifier, a wet pulverizer, and a wet disperser), and obtaining a composition.
In the mixing and dispersing step, each component constituting the composition may be mixed at once, or may be sequentially added after each component is dissolved or dispersed in an organic solvent. Moreover, the order of input and the working conditions when blending are not particularly limited. Further, the mixing and dispersing step may include a step of producing a dispersion.
(分散液を作製する工程)
 分散液を作製する工程は、金属窒化物含有粒子と、分散剤と、溶剤とを混合し、金属窒化物含有粒子を上記の方法により分散させて、分散液を作製する工程である。作製した分散液に、その余の成分を混合し、組成物を製造することができる。
 上記分散液を作製する工程において、顔料の分散に用いる機械力としては、圧縮、圧搾、衝撃、剪断及びキャビテーションなどが挙げられる。これらプロセスの具体例としては、ビーズミル、サンドミル、ロールミル、高速インペラー、サンドグラインダー、フロージェットミキサー、高圧湿式微粒化及び超音波分散などが挙げられる。また、「分散技術大全、株式会社情報機構発行、2005年7月15日」及び「サスペンション(固/液分散系)を中心とした分散技術と工業的応用の実際 総合資料集、経営開発センター出版部発行、1978年10月10日」に記載のプロセス及び分散機を好適に使用することができる。
 また、上記分散液を作製する工程においては、ソルトミリング工程による顔料の微細化処理を行ってもよい。ソルトミリング工程に用いられる素材、機器及び処理条件等は、例えば、特開2015-194521号及び特開2012-046629号に記載のものを使用することができる。
 また、上記組成物の製造方法は、熱プラズマ法によって上記金属窒化物含有粒子を得る工程を含有することが好ましい。金属窒化物含有粒子を得る工程は、上記の各成分を混合する前に実施される。熱プラズマ法による金属窒化物含有粒子の具体的な製造工程の態様は上記のとおりである。
(Process for producing dispersion)
The step of preparing the dispersion is a step of preparing the dispersion by mixing the metal nitride-containing particles, the dispersant, and the solvent, and dispersing the metal nitride-containing particles by the above method. The remaining components can be mixed with the prepared dispersion to produce a composition.
In the step of preparing the dispersion, the mechanical force used for dispersing the pigment includes compression, squeezing, impact, shearing and cavitation. Specific examples of these processes include a bead mill, a sand mill, a roll mill, a high speed impeller, a sand grinder, a flow jet mixer, high pressure wet atomization, and ultrasonic dispersion. In addition, “Dispersion Technology Encyclopedia, Issued by Information Technology Corporation, July 15, 2005” and “Distribution technology and industrial application centered on suspension (solid / liquid dispersion system) and comprehensive application data collection, Management Development Center publication. The process and the dispersing machine described in “Issuance of the Department, October 10, 1978” can be preferably used.
Moreover, in the process of producing the said dispersion liquid, you may perform the refinement | miniaturization process of the pigment by a salt milling process. For example, materials described in JP-A-2015-194521 and JP-A-2012-046629 can be used as materials, equipment and processing conditions used in the salt milling process.
Moreover, it is preferable that the manufacturing method of the said composition contains the process of obtaining the said metal nitride containing particle | grains by a thermal plasma method. The step of obtaining metal nitride-containing particles is performed before mixing the above-described components. The embodiment of the specific manufacturing process of the metal nitride-containing particles by the thermal plasma method is as described above.
<静置工程>
 上記金属窒化物含有粒子は、混合及び分散工程、又は分散液を作製する工程に供される前に、以下の静置工程を経ることが好ましい。
 静置工程とは、熱プラズマ法によって得られた金属窒化物含有粒子を、その製造後に大気に暴露せず、酸素濃度が制御された密閉容器内において、所定時間(好ましくは12~72時間、より好ましくは12~48時間、更に好ましくは12~24時間)静置する工程である。この際、密閉容器内における水分の含有量が制御されているとより好ましい。
<Standing process>
The metal nitride-containing particles are preferably subjected to the following stationary step before being subjected to the mixing and dispersing step or the step of producing a dispersion.
The standing step refers to a predetermined time (preferably 12 to 72 hours) in a sealed container in which the metal nitride-containing particles obtained by the thermal plasma method are not exposed to the atmosphere after their production and the oxygen concentration is controlled. (More preferably 12 to 48 hours, still more preferably 12 to 24 hours). At this time, it is more preferable that the moisture content in the sealed container is controlled.
 この際、密閉容器内における酸素(O)濃度及び水分の含有量は、それぞれ100ppm以下であることが好ましく、10ppm以下であることがより好ましく、1ppm以下であることが更に好ましい。
 密閉容器内における酸素(O)濃度及び水分の含有量は、密閉容器内に供給する不活性ガス中の酸素濃度及び水分量を調整することによって行うことができる。不活性ガスとしては、窒素ガス及びアルゴンガスが好ましく用いられ、この中でも窒素ガスを用いることがより好ましい。
 上記静置工程を経ると、金属窒化物含有粒子の表面及び結晶粒界が安定となる。これにより、組成物を用いて得られる硬化膜のピンホールの発生を抑制できる。
 なお、上記静置工程は、金属窒化物含有粒子の製造方法において説明した工程Hで代えることが可能であり、組成物がより優れた本発明の効果を有する点で、工程Hで代えることが好ましい。
At this time, the oxygen (O 2 ) concentration and the water content in the sealed container are each preferably 100 ppm or less, more preferably 10 ppm or less, and still more preferably 1 ppm or less.
The content of oxygen (O 2) concentration and moisture in the sealed container can be performed by adjusting the oxygen concentration and water content in the inert gas supplied in a sealed container. As the inert gas, nitrogen gas and argon gas are preferably used, and among these, it is more preferable to use nitrogen gas.
After the standing step, the surface and crystal grain boundaries of the metal nitride-containing particles become stable. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the pinhole of the cured film obtained using a composition can be suppressed.
The standing step can be replaced with step H described in the method for producing metal nitride-containing particles, and can be replaced with step H in that the composition has a more excellent effect of the present invention. preferable.
<ろ過工程>
 ろ過工程は、上記混合及び分散工程により製造された組成物をフィルタでろ過する工程である。ろ過工程では、組成物から異物を除去及び/又は欠陥を低減することができる。
 フィルタとしては、従来からろ過用途等に用いられているものであれば特に限定されることなく用いることができる。例えば、PTFE(polytetrafluoroethylene:ポリテトラフルオロエチレン)等のフッ素樹脂、ナイロン等のポリアミド系樹脂、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン(PP)等のポリオレフィン樹脂(高密度、超高分子量を含有する)等によるフィルタが挙げられる。これら素材の中でもポリプロピレン(高密度ポリプロピレンを含有する)、ナイロンが好ましい。
 フィルタの孔径は、0.1~7.0μm程度が適しており、好ましくは0.2~2.5μm程度、より好ましくは0.2~1.5μm程度、更に好ましくは0.3~0.7μmである。この範囲とすることにより、顔料のろ過詰まりを抑えつつ、顔料に含まれる不純物や凝集物など、微細な異物を確実に除去することが可能となる。
 フィルタを使用する際、異なるフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。その際、第1のフィルタでのフィルタリングは、1回のみでもよいし、2回以上行ってもよい。異なるフィルタを組み合わせて2回以上フィルタリングを行う場合は1回目のフィルタリングの孔径より2回目以降の孔径が同じ、又は、大きい方が好ましい。また、上記の範囲内で異なる孔径の第1のフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。ここでの孔径は、フィルタメーカーの公称値を参照することができる。市販のフィルタとしては、例えば、日本ポール株式会社、アドバンテック東洋株式会社、日本インテグリス株式会社(旧日本マイクロリス株式会社)又は株式会社キッツマイクロフィルタ等が提供する各種フィルタの中から選択することができる。
 第2のフィルタは、上記の第1のフィルタと同様の材料等で形成されたものを使用することができる。第2のフィルタの孔径は、0.2~10.0μm程度が適しており、好ましくは0.2~7.0μm程度、更に好ましくは0.3~6.0μm程度である。
<Filtration process>
A filtration process is a process of filtering the composition manufactured by the said mixing and dispersion | distribution process with a filter. In the filtration step, foreign substances can be removed from the composition and / or defects can be reduced.
Any filter can be used without particular limitation as long as it has been conventionally used for filtration. For example, a filter made of a fluororesin such as PTFE (polytetrafluoroethylene), a polyamide resin such as nylon, or a polyolefin resin such as polyethylene or polypropylene (PP) (containing high density and ultra high molecular weight) can be used. . Among these materials, polypropylene (containing high density polypropylene) and nylon are preferable.
The filter has a pore diameter of about 0.1 to 7.0 μm, preferably about 0.2 to 2.5 μm, more preferably about 0.2 to 1.5 μm, and still more preferably 0.3 to 0.0 μm. 7 μm. By setting it within this range, it is possible to reliably remove fine foreign matters such as impurities and aggregates contained in the pigment while suppressing filtration clogging of the pigment.
When using filters, different filters may be combined. At that time, the filtering by the first filter may be performed only once or may be performed twice or more. When filtering two or more times by combining different filters, it is preferable that the second and subsequent pore diameters are the same or larger than the pore diameter of the first filtering. Moreover, you may combine the 1st filter of a different hole diameter within said range. The pore diameter here can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer. As a commercially available filter, for example, it can be selected from various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd., Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Entegris Co., Ltd. (formerly Japan Microlith Co., Ltd.) or KITZ Micro Filter Co., Ltd. .
As the second filter, a filter formed of the same material as the first filter can be used. The pore size of the second filter is suitably about 0.2 to 10.0 μm, preferably about 0.2 to 7.0 μm, and more preferably about 0.3 to 6.0 μm.
[硬化膜(遮光膜)]
 上記硬化膜は、上記組成物を用いて得られる。上記硬化膜には、金属窒化物含有粒子が含まれる。上記硬化膜は、遮光膜として好適に用いられ、具体的にはイメージセンサの受光部周辺部分の遮光に好適に用いられる。
 以下、硬化膜がイメージセンサの受光部周辺部分の遮光膜として使用された場合を一例として説明する。
 上記遮光膜は、上記組成物(特に、上記感光性組成物)を用いて形成されたものである。上記組成物を用いて得られる遮光膜は、解像性及び電極の防食性に優れる。
[Curing film (light-shielding film)]
The cured film is obtained using the composition. The cured film contains metal nitride-containing particles. The cured film is preferably used as a light-shielding film, and specifically used for light-shielding the periphery of the light receiving portion of the image sensor.
Hereinafter, a case where the cured film is used as a light shielding film around the light receiving portion of the image sensor will be described as an example.
The said light shielding film is formed using the said composition (especially the said photosensitive composition). The light-shielding film obtained by using the above composition is excellent in resolution and corrosion resistance of the electrode.
 遮光膜の膜厚としては特に限定はないが、遮光膜がより優れた本発明の効果を有する点で、乾燥後の膜厚で、0.2μm以上50μm以下が好ましく、0.3μm以上10μm以下がより好ましく、0.3μm以上5μm以下が更に好ましい。上記組成物は単位体積あたりの光学濃度が高いため(遮光性が高いため)、従来の黒色顔料を使用した組成物より膜厚を減らすことも可能である。
 遮光膜のサイズ(センサー受光部周辺に設けられた遮光膜の一辺の長さ)としては、遮光膜がより優れた本発明の効果を有する点で、0.001mm以上10mm以下が好ましく、0.05mm以上7mm以下がより好ましく、0.1mm以上3.5mm以下が更に好ましい。上記組成物は単位体積あたりの光学濃度が高いため、塗布量が減らせるなど、微細加工に有利であり、かつ、解像性及び電極の防食性に優れるため、上記の範囲で特に好ましく用いることができる。
The film thickness of the light shielding film is not particularly limited, but the film thickness after drying is preferably 0.2 μm or more and 50 μm or less, and preferably 0.3 μm or more and 10 μm or less, in that the light shielding film has the effect of the present invention. Is more preferably 0.3 μm or more and 5 μm or less. Since the above composition has a high optical density per unit volume (because of its high light shielding properties), the film thickness can be reduced as compared with a composition using a conventional black pigment.
The size of the light-shielding film (the length of one side of the light-shielding film provided around the sensor light-receiving portion) is preferably 0.001 mm or more and 10 mm or less in that the light-shielding film has more excellent effects of the present invention. 05 mm or more and 7 mm or less are more preferable, and 0.1 mm or more and 3.5 mm or less are still more preferable. Since the above composition has a high optical density per unit volume, it is advantageous for microfabrication, such as being able to reduce the coating amount, and is excellent in resolution and anticorrosion properties of the electrode. Can do.
〔硬化膜の製造方法〕
 次に、上記硬化膜(遮光膜)の製造方法を、ブラックマトリクスを含有するカラーフィルタの製造方法を例として説明する。
 上記ブラックマトリクスを含有するカラーフィルタは、基板上に、上記組成物を用いて得られる硬化膜(ブラックマトリクス)を含有する。
 以下、上記ブラックマトリクスを含有するカラーフィルタの製造方法を工程ごとに詳述する。
[Method for producing cured film]
Next, a method for manufacturing the cured film (light-shielding film) will be described using a method for manufacturing a color filter containing a black matrix as an example.
The color filter containing the black matrix contains a cured film (black matrix) obtained using the composition on the substrate.
Hereinafter, the manufacturing method of the color filter containing the said black matrix is explained in full detail for every process.
 上記ブラックマトリクスを含有するカラーフィルタの製造方法は、以下の組成物層形成工程と、露光工程と、現像工程とを含有する。
組成物層形成工程:基板上に、上記組成物を塗布して組成物層(塗布膜)を形成する工程。
露光工程:上記組成物層を、フォトマスク(以下、単に「マスク」ともいう。)を介して露光する工程。
現像工程:露光後の組成物層を現像してパターン状の硬化膜(遮光膜)を形成する工程。
The manufacturing method of the color filter containing the said black matrix contains the following composition layer formation processes, an exposure process, and a image development process.
Composition layer forming step: a step of applying the above composition onto a substrate to form a composition layer (coating film).
Exposure step: a step of exposing the composition layer through a photomask (hereinafter also simply referred to as “mask”).
Development step: A step of developing the exposed composition layer to form a patterned cured film (light-shielding film).
 具体的には、上記組成物を、直接又は他の層を介して基板上に塗布して、組成物層を形成し(組成物層形成工程)、所定のマスクパターンを介して露光し、光照射された塗布膜部分だけを硬化させ(露光工程)、現像液で現像することによって(現像工程)、上記カラーフィルタを製造することができる。
 以下、上記ブラックマトリクスを含有するカラーフィルタの製造方法における各工程について説明する。
Specifically, the composition is applied on a substrate directly or through another layer to form a composition layer (composition layer forming step), exposed through a predetermined mask pattern, and light. Only the irradiated coating film portion is cured (exposure process) and developed with a developer (development process), whereby the color filter can be produced.
Hereinafter, each process in the manufacturing method of the color filter containing the said black matrix is demonstrated.
<組成物層形成工程>
 組成物層形成工程は、基板上に、上記組成物を塗布して組成物層(塗布膜)を形成する工程である。
 基板としては、例えば、液晶表示装置等に用いられる無アルカリガラス、ソーダガラス、パイレックス(登録商標)ガラス、石英ガラス、及びこれらに透明導電膜を付着させたもの、固体撮像素子等に用いられる光電変換素子基板(例えば、シリコン基板等)、CCD(Charge Coupled Device)基板、並びに、CMOS(Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor)基板等が挙げられる。
 また、これらの基板上には、必要により、上部の層との密着改良、物質の拡散防止或いは基板表面の平坦化のために下塗り層を設けてもよい。
<Composition layer formation step>
The composition layer forming step is a step of forming the composition layer (coating film) by coating the composition on the substrate.
Examples of the substrate include alkali-free glass, soda glass, Pyrex (registered trademark) glass, quartz glass used in liquid crystal display devices and the like, and a transparent conductive film attached to these, photoelectric devices used in solid-state imaging devices, and the like. Examples include a conversion element substrate (for example, a silicon substrate), a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) substrate, and a CMOS (Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor) substrate.
Further, if necessary, an undercoat layer may be provided on these substrates in order to improve adhesion with the upper layer, prevent diffusion of substances, or planarize the substrate surface.
 基板上への上記組成物の塗布方法としては、スリット塗布、インクジェット法、回転塗布、流延塗布、ロール塗布、及びスクリーン印刷法等の各種の塗布方法を適用することができる。 As the coating method of the composition on the substrate, various coating methods such as slit coating, inkjet method, spin coating, cast coating, roll coating, and screen printing can be applied.
 固体撮像素子用のブラックマトリクスを含有するカラーフィルタを製造する際には、組成物の塗布膜厚としては、解像性の観点から、0.35μm以上1.5μm以下が好ましく、0.40μm以上1.0μm以下がより好ましい。 When manufacturing a color filter containing a black matrix for a solid-state imaging device, the coating film thickness of the composition is preferably 0.35 μm or more and 1.5 μm or less, preferably 0.40 μm or more, from the viewpoint of resolution. 1.0 μm or less is more preferable.
 基板上に塗布された組成物は、通常、70℃以上110℃以下で2分間以上4分間以下程度の条件下で乾燥する。これにより、組成物層を形成できる。 The composition coated on the substrate is usually dried at 70 ° C. or higher and 110 ° C. or lower for 2 minutes or more and 4 minutes or less. Thereby, a composition layer can be formed.
<露光工程>
 露光工程は、組成物層形成工程において形成された組成物層(塗布膜)を、マスクを介して露光し、光照射された塗布膜部分だけを硬化させる工程である。
 露光は、活性光線又は放射線の照射により行うことが好ましく、特に、g線、h線、及びi線等の紫外線が好ましく用いられ、高圧水銀灯がより好まれる。照射強度は5~1500mJ/cmが好ましく、10~1000mJ/cmがより好ましい。また、解像性向上の観点から固体撮像素子用の遮光膜形成では、i線ステッパーによる露光が好ましい。
<Exposure process>
The exposure step is a step in which the composition layer (coating film) formed in the composition layer forming step is exposed through a mask and only the coating film portion irradiated with light is cured.
The exposure is preferably performed by irradiation with actinic rays or radiation. In particular, ultraviolet rays such as g-line, h-line, and i-line are preferably used, and a high-pressure mercury lamp is more preferable. The irradiation intensity is preferably 5 ~ 1500mJ / cm 2, more preferably 10 ~ 1000mJ / cm 2. Further, from the viewpoint of improving the resolution, exposure with an i-line stepper is preferable in forming a light-shielding film for a solid-state imaging device.
<現像工程>
 露光工程に次いで、アルカリ現像処理(現像工程)を行い、露光工程における光未照射部分をアルカリ水溶液に溶出させる。これにより、光硬化した部分(光照射された塗布膜部分)だけが残る。
 現像液としては、固体撮像素子用のブラックマトリクスを含有する遮光性カラーフィルタを作製する場合には、下地の回路などにダメージを起さない、有機アルカリ現像液が望ましい。現像温度としては通常20~30℃であり、現像時間は20~90秒である。
<Development process>
Subsequent to the exposure step, an alkali development treatment (development step) is performed, and the light non-irradiated part in the exposure step is eluted in an alkaline aqueous solution. Thereby, only the photocured part (the coating film part irradiated with light) remains.
As the developer, when producing a light-shielding color filter containing a black matrix for a solid-state imaging device, an organic alkali developer that does not cause damage to the underlying circuit or the like is desirable. The development temperature is usually 20 to 30 ° C., and the development time is 20 to 90 seconds.
 アルカリ性の水溶液としては、例えば、無機系現像液及び有機系現像液が挙げられる。無機系現像液としては、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、硅酸ナトリウム、又はメタ硅酸ナトリウムを、濃度が0.001~10質量%、好ましくは0.01~1質量%となるように溶解したアルカリ性水溶液が挙げられる。有機系現像液としては、アンモニア水、エチルアミン、ジエチルアミン、ジメチルエタノールアミン、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン、ピロール、ピペリジン、又は1,8-ジアザビシクロ-[5.4.0]-7-ウンデセン等のアルカリ性化合物を、濃度が0.001~10質量%、好ましくは0.01~1質量%となるように溶解したアルカリ性水溶液が挙げられる。アルカリ性水溶液には、例えばメタノール、及びエタノール等の水溶性有機溶剤及び/又は界面活性剤等を適量添加することもできる。なお、このようなアルカリ性水溶液からなる現像液を使用した場合には、一般に現像後純水で洗浄(リンス)する。 Examples of the alkaline aqueous solution include an inorganic developer and an organic developer. As the inorganic developer, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium oxalate, or sodium metasuccinate having a concentration of 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 1 is used. An alkaline aqueous solution dissolved so as to be in mass% can be mentioned. Examples of organic developers include aqueous ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, or 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0]- Examples thereof include an alkaline aqueous solution in which an alkaline compound such as 7-undecene is dissolved so as to have a concentration of 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass. An appropriate amount of a water-soluble organic solvent such as methanol and ethanol and / or a surfactant can be added to the alkaline aqueous solution. In the case where a developer composed of such an alkaline aqueous solution is used, it is generally washed (rinsed) with pure water after development.
 現像方法としては、例えば、パドル現像方法及びシャワー現像方法などを用いることができる。 As the developing method, for example, a paddle developing method and a shower developing method can be used.
 なお、上記硬化膜(ブラックマトリクス)を含有するカラーフィルタの製造方法は、上記現像工程の後に、硬化膜を加熱及び/又は露光により硬化する硬化工程を含有してもよい。 In addition, the manufacturing method of the color filter containing the said cured film (black matrix) may contain the hardening process which hardens a cured film by a heating and / or exposure after the said image development process.
 上記硬化膜(ブラックマトリクス)を含有するカラーフィルタは、解像性及び電極の防食性に優れる。
 したがって、上記硬化膜(ブラックマトリクス)を含有するカラーフィルタは、CCDイメージセンサ及び/又はCMOSイメージセンサ等の固体撮像素子に好適である。特に100万画素を超えるような高解像度のCCDイメージセンサ及び/又はCMOSイメージセンサ等に好適である。すなわち、上記硬化膜を含有するカラーフィルタは、固体撮像素子に好適である。また、カラーフィルタは、隔壁により例えば格子状に仕切られた空間に、各色画素を形成する硬化膜が埋め込まれた構造を含有してもよい。
 上記硬化膜(ブラックマトリクス)は、例えば、CCDイメージセンサ及び/又はCMOSイメージセンサ等を構成する各画素の受光部と、集光するためのマイクロレンズと、の間に配置される。
The color filter containing the cured film (black matrix) is excellent in resolution and corrosion resistance of the electrode.
Therefore, the color filter containing the said cured film (black matrix) is suitable for solid-state image sensors, such as a CCD image sensor and / or a CMOS image sensor. Particularly, it is suitable for a CCD image sensor and / or a CMOS image sensor having a high resolution exceeding 1 million pixels. That is, the color filter containing the cured film is suitable for a solid-state imaging device. Further, the color filter may include a structure in which a cured film that forms each color pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by a partition, for example, in a lattice shape.
The cured film (black matrix) is disposed, for example, between a light receiving portion of each pixel constituting a CCD image sensor and / or a CMOS image sensor and a microlens for condensing light.
[固体撮像素子]
 上記固体撮像素子は、上記硬化膜(ブラックマトリクス)を含有する。上記固体撮像素子は、ブラックマトリクスを含有し、更に、必要により、他の色(3色あるいは4色)の画素からなるパターン状皮膜とを含有する、カラーフィルタを含有することが好ましい。
 上記固体撮像素子は、上記ブラックマトリクスを含有し、固体撮像素子として機能すれば特に制限されず、例えば、基板上に、固体撮像素子(CCDイメージセンサ、及びCMOSイメージセンサ等)の受光エリアを構成する複数のフォトダイオード及びポリシリコン等からなる受光素子を含有し、基板の受光素子形成面の反対側の面に上記ブラックマトリクスを含有する固体撮像素子が挙げられる。
 また、カラーフィルタは、隔壁により例えば格子状に仕切られた空間に、各色画素を形成する硬化膜が埋め込まれた構造を有していてもよい。この場合の隔壁は各色画素に対して低屈折率であることが好ましい。このような構造を含有する固体撮像素子の例としては、特開2012-227478号公報及び特開2014-179577号公報に記載の固体撮像素子が挙げられる。
[Solid-state imaging device]
The solid-state imaging device contains the cured film (black matrix). The solid-state imaging device preferably contains a color filter that contains a black matrix and, if necessary, a patterned film composed of pixels of other colors (three colors or four colors).
The solid-state imaging device is not particularly limited as long as it contains the black matrix and functions as a solid-state imaging device. For example, a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD image sensor, CMOS image sensor, etc.) is formed on a substrate. And a solid-state imaging device containing the black matrix on the surface opposite to the light-receiving element forming surface of the substrate.
In addition, the color filter may have a structure in which a cured film that forms each color pixel is embedded in a space partitioned by a partition, for example, in a lattice shape. The partition in this case preferably has a low refractive index for each color pixel. Examples of the solid-state imaging device containing such a structure include the solid-state imaging devices described in JP2012-227478A and JP2014-179577A.
[画像表示装置]
 上記硬化膜は、液晶表示装置及び有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置等の、画像表示装置に好適である。
[Image display device]
The said cured film is suitable for image display apparatuses, such as a liquid crystal display device and an organic electroluminescent display apparatus.
 画像表示装置の定義及び各画像表示装置の詳細については、例えば「電子ディスプレイデバイス(佐々木 昭夫著、(株)工業調査会 1990年発行)」、及び「ディスプレイデバイス(伊吹 順章著、産業図書(株)平成元年発行)」などに記載されている。また、液晶表示装置については、例えば「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術(内田 龍男編集、(株)工業調査会 1994年発行)」に記載されている。上記硬化膜は、例えば、上記の「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術」に記載されている方式の液晶表示装置に好適である。 For the definition of image display devices and details of each image display device, refer to, for example, “Electronic Display Device (Akio Sasaki, Kogyo Kenkyukai, 1990)” and “Display Device (Junsho Ibuki, Industrial Books ( (Issued in 1989)). The liquid crystal display device is described, for example, in “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, Industrial Research Co., Ltd., published in 1994)”. The cured film is suitable for, for example, a liquid crystal display device of the method described in the “next generation liquid crystal display technology”.
 上記硬化膜を含有する液晶表示装置の一態様としては、例えば、少なくとも1つが光透過性の1対の基板の間にカラーフィルタ、液晶層及び液晶駆動手段(単純マトリックス駆動方式、及びアクティブマトリックス駆動方式を含有する)を少なくとも含有する液晶表示装置が挙げられる。上記液晶表示装置は、複数の画素群を含有し、この画素群を構成する各画素が、互いに上記硬化膜(ブラックマトリクス)により離画されているカラーフィルタを含有する。 As one mode of the liquid crystal display device containing the cured film, for example, a color filter, a liquid crystal layer, and a liquid crystal driving means (simple matrix driving method and active matrix driving) are provided between a pair of substrates at least one of which is light transmissive. And a liquid crystal display device containing at least a method. The liquid crystal display device includes a plurality of pixel groups, and each pixel constituting the pixel group includes a color filter separated from each other by the cured film (black matrix).
 また、上記液晶表示装置の別の態様としては、少なくとも1つが光透過性の1対の基板の間に、カラーフィルタ、液晶層及び液晶駆動手段を少なくも含有し、液晶駆動手段がアクティブ素子(例えばTFT(Thin Film Transistor))を含有し、かつ各アクティブ素子の間に上記硬化膜(ブラックマトリクス)を含有するカラーフィルタを含有する。 In another aspect of the liquid crystal display device, at least one includes a color filter, a liquid crystal layer, and liquid crystal driving means between a pair of light-transmitting substrates, and the liquid crystal driving means is an active element ( For example, a color filter containing a TFT (Thin Film Transistor) and containing the cured film (black matrix) between the active elements is contained.
 上記硬化膜を含有するカラーフィルタは、カラーTFT(Thin Film Transistor)方式の液晶表示装置に好適である。カラーTFT方式の液晶表示装置については、例えば「カラーTFT液晶ディスプレイ(共立出版(株)1996年発行)」に記載されている。更に、上記カラーフィルタはIPS(In Plane Switching)などの横電界駆動方式;MVA(Multi-domain Vertical Alignment)などの画素分割方式;等の視野角が拡大された液晶表示装置、STN(Super-Twist Nematic)、TN(Twisted Nematic)、VA(Vertical Alignment)、OCS(on-chip spacer)、FFS(fringe field switching)、及び、R-OCB(Reflective Optically Compensated Bend)等にも好適である。 The color filter containing the cured film is suitable for a liquid crystal display device of a color TFT (Thin Film Transistor) type. The color TFT liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Color TFT liquid crystal display (issued in 1996 by Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd.)”. Further, the color filter is a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, such as a lateral electric field driving method such as IPS (In Plane Switching); a pixel division method such as MVA (Multi-domain Vertical Alignment); and STN (Super-Twist). Nematic), TN (Twisted Nematic), VA (Vertical Alignment), OCS (on-chip spacer), FFS (fringe field switching), and R-OCB (Reflective Optics).
 上記カラーフィルタは、明るく高精細なCOA(Color-filter On Array)方式の液晶表示装置に好適である。COA方式の液晶表示装置にあっては、カラーフィルタに対する要求特性は、通常の要求特性に加えて、層間絶縁膜に対する要求特性、すなわち低誘電率及び剥離液耐性が必要とされることがある。上記カラーフィルタを含有するCOA方式の液晶表示装置は、より優れた解像度を有し、又はより優れた耐久性を有する。なお、低誘電率の要求特性を満足するためには、カラーフィルタ層の上に樹脂被膜を更に含有してもよい。 The color filter is suitable for a bright, high-definition COA (Color-filter On Array) type liquid crystal display device. In the COA type liquid crystal display device, the required characteristics for the color filter may require the required characteristics for the interlayer insulating film, that is, the low dielectric constant and the resistance to the peeling solution, in addition to the normal required characteristics. The COA type liquid crystal display device containing the color filter has better resolution or better durability. In order to satisfy the required characteristics of a low dielectric constant, a resin film may be further included on the color filter layer.
 これらの画像表示方式については、例えば、「EL、PDP、LCDディスプレイ-技術と市場の最新動向-(東レリサーチセンター調査研究部門 2001年発行)」の43ページなどに記載されている。なお、上記において、ELとはElectroluminescence、PDPとはPlasma Display Panel、LCDとはliquid crystal displayの略を表す。 These image display methods are described, for example, on page 43 of "EL, PDP, LCD display-latest technology and market trends-(Toray Research Center Research Division, issued in 2001)". In the above, EL stands for Electroluminescence, PDP stands for PlasmaPDisplay Panel, and LCD stands for liquid crystal display.
 上記液晶表示装置は、上記カラーフィルタ以外に、電極基板、偏光フィルム、位相差フィルム、バックライト、スペーサ、及び、視野角保障フィルムなど様々な部材から構成される。上記カラーフィルタは、これらの公知の部材で構成される液晶表示装置に適用することができる。これらの部材については、例えば、「’94液晶ディスプレイ周辺材料・ケミカルズの市場(島 健太郎 (株)シーエムシー 1994年発行)」、及び「2003液晶関連市場の現状と将来展望(下巻)(表良吉(株)富士キメラ総研、2003年発行)」に記載されている。
 バックライトに関しては、SID meeting Digest 1380(2005)(A.Konno et.al)や、月刊ディスプレイ 2005年12月号の18~24ページ(島 康裕)、同25~30ページ(八木隆明)などに記載されている。
In addition to the color filter, the liquid crystal display device includes various members such as an electrode substrate, a polarizing film, a retardation film, a backlight, a spacer, and a viewing angle guarantee film. The color filter can be applied to a liquid crystal display device composed of these known members. Regarding these materials, for example, “'94 Liquid Crystal Display Peripheral Materials / Chemicals Market (Kentaro Shima, CMC 1994)” and “2003 Liquid Crystal Related Markets Current Status and Future Prospects (Volume 2)” "Fuji Chimera Research Institute, Ltd., published in 2003)".
Regarding backlights, SID meeting Digest 1380 (2005) (A. Konno et.al), Monthly Display December 2005, pages 18-24 (Yasuhiro Shima), pages 25-30 (Takaaki Yagi), etc. Are listed.
 また、上記硬化膜は、パーソナルコンピュータ、タブレット、携帯電話、スマートフォン及びデジタルカメラなどのポータブル機器;プリンタ複合機及びスキャナなどのOA(Office Automation)機器;監視カメラ、バーコードリーダ、及び現金自動預け払い機(ATM:automated teller machine)、ハイスピードカメラ及び顔画像認証を使用した本人認証などの産業用機器;車載用カメラ機器;内視鏡、カプセル内視鏡及びカテーテルなどの医療用カメラ機器;生体センサー、バイオセンサー、軍事偵察用カメラ、立体地図用カメラ、気象及び海洋観測カメラ、陸地資源探査カメラ、並びに、宇宙の天文及び深宇宙ターゲット用の探査カメラなどの宇宙用機器などに使用される光学フィルター及びモジュールの遮光部材及び遮光層、更には反射防止部材及び反射防止層に好適である。 The cured film is composed of portable devices such as personal computers, tablets, mobile phones, smartphones and digital cameras; OA (Office Automation) devices such as printer multifunction devices and scanners; surveillance cameras, bar code readers, and automatic cash deposits. Machine (ATM: automated teller 本 machine), high-speed camera and industrial equipment such as personal authentication using facial image authentication; in-vehicle camera equipment; medical camera equipment such as endoscope, capsule endoscope and catheter; Optics used in space equipment such as sensors, biosensors, military reconnaissance cameras, 3D map cameras, meteorological and oceanographic observation cameras, land resource exploration cameras, and exploration cameras for space astronomy and deep space targets. Filter and module shading member and Shielding layer, further is suitable for anti-reflection member and the antireflection layer.
 上記硬化膜は、マイクロLED(Light Emitting Diode)及びマイクロOLED(Organic Light Emitting Diode)などの用途にも用いることができる。上記硬化膜は、マイクロLED及びマイクロOLEDに使用される光学フィルタ及び光学フィルムのほか、遮光機能又は反射防止機能を付与する部材に対して好適である。
 マイクロLED及びマイクロOLEDの例としては、特表2015-500562号及び特表2014-533890に記載されたものが挙げられる。
The cured film can also be used for applications such as micro LED (Light Emitting Diode) and micro OLED (Organic Light Emitting Diode). The cured film is suitable for members that provide a light shielding function or an antireflection function, in addition to optical filters and optical films used in micro LEDs and micro OLEDs.
Examples of the micro LED and the micro OLED include those described in JP-T-2015-500562 and JP-T-2014-533890.
 上記硬化膜は、量子ドットディスプレイに使用される光学及び光学フィルムとして好適である。また、遮光機能及び反射防止機能を付与する部材として好適である。
 量子ドットディスプレイの例としては、米国特許出願公開第2013/0335677号、米国特許出願公開第2014/0036536号、米国特許出願公開第2014/0036203号、及び、米国特許出願公開第2014/0035960号に記載されたものが挙げられる。
The cured film is suitable as an optical and optical film used in quantum dot displays. Moreover, it is suitable as a member which provides a light shielding function and an antireflection function.
Examples of quantum dot displays include US Patent Application Publication No. 2013/0335677, US Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0036536, US Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0036203, and US Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0035960. What has been described.
 以下に実施例に基づいて上記組成物等について更に詳細に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り適宜変更することができる。したがって、本発明の範囲は以下に示す実施例により限定的に解釈されるべきものではない。 Hereinafter, the composition and the like will be described in more detail based on examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, and the like shown in the following examples can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention should not be construed as being limited by the following examples.
[金属窒化物含有粒子P-1の作製]
 以下の方法により金属窒化物含有粒子P-1を作製した。
 まず、遷移金属としてニオブを含有する三津和化学薬品製ニオブ(粉末)<100-325mesh>を原料(以下、「金属原料粉末」ともいう。)として準備した。次にこの金属原料粉末に含まれる不純物の含有量をICP発光分光分析法によって分析した。なお、ICP発光分光分析法には、セイコーインスツルメンツ社製のICP発光分光分析装置「SPS3000」(商品名)を用いた。
[Preparation of metal nitride-containing particles P-1]
Metal nitride-containing particles P-1 were produced by the following method.
First, niobium (powder) <100-325 mesh> manufactured by Mitsuwa Chemicals, which contains niobium as a transition metal, was prepared as a raw material (hereinafter also referred to as “metal raw material powder”). Next, the content of impurities contained in the metal raw material powder was analyzed by ICP emission spectroscopy. For the ICP emission spectroscopic analysis, an ICP emission spectroscopic analyzer “SPS3000” (trade name) manufactured by Seiko Instruments Inc. was used.
 次に、上記金属原料粉末を、Arガス中においてプラズマ処理(処理条件は、下記のプラズマ処理(1)による)することにより、金属微粒子化した。得られた金属微粒子の平均一次粒子径を測定したところ、80nmだった。なお、平均一次粒子径は、以下の方法により求めた。
 試料:分散液(金属微粒子25質量%、下記の分散剤A7.5質量%、PGMEA;プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート溶媒67.5質量%)を後述する[金属窒化物含有粒子分散液の調製]と同様の方法により調製し、得られた分散液をPGMEAで100倍希釈したのち、カーボン箔上に滴下し、乾燥させたもの。
 上記試料を、透過型電子顕微鏡(TEM:Transmission Electron Microscope)を用いて倍率2万倍で観察して像を得た。得られた像の中の金属微粒子の面積を画像処理により算出した。次に、得られた面積を円に換算した場合の直径を算出した。この操作を4視野分、合計400個(各視野に約3000個の金属微粒子が確認された)の金属微粒子について行い、評価した円換算の直径を算術平均して、金属微粒子の平均一次粒子径とした。
Next, the metal raw material powder was subjected to plasma treatment in Ar gas (treatment conditions were as described in the following plasma treatment (1)) to form metal fine particles. It was 80 nm when the average primary particle diameter of the obtained metal fine particle was measured. In addition, the average primary particle diameter was calculated | required with the following method.
Sample: [Preparation of metal nitride-containing particle dispersion] to be described later for a dispersion (25% by mass of fine metal particles, 7.5% by mass of dispersant A described below, PGMEA; 67.5% by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate solvent) A dispersion prepared by the same method, diluted 100 times with PGMEA, dropped onto a carbon foil and dried.
The sample was observed with a transmission electron microscope (TEM) at a magnification of 20,000 to obtain an image. The area of the metal fine particles in the obtained image was calculated by image processing. Next, the diameter when the obtained area was converted into a circle was calculated. This operation is performed on a total of 400 metal fine particles (approximately 3000 metal fine particles are confirmed in each visual field) for four visual fields, and the average diameter of the metal fine particles is calculated by arithmetically averaging the evaluated diameters in terms of circles. It was.
 また、金属微粒子に含まれる不純物を上記の方法により測定したところ不純物は検出されなかった。なお、上記の方法により不純物が検出されないとは、不純物の含有量が金属微粒子の全質量に対して20ppm未満であることを意図する。 Further, when impurities contained in the metal fine particles were measured by the above method, no impurities were detected. In addition, it means that content of an impurity is less than 20 ppm with respect to the total mass of metal microparticles that an impurity is not detected by said method.
<プラズマ処理(1)>
 プラズマ処理(1)は以下の方法により行った。すなわち、国際公開第2010/147098号パンフレットの図1に記載の黒色複合微粒子製造装置に準ずる装置を金属微粒子製造装置として用い、以下の条件によりプラズマ処理(1)した。
・高周波発振用コイルに印加した高周波電圧:周波数、約4MHz、電圧、約80kVA・プラズマガス:アルゴンガス(供給量 100L/min)
・キャリアガス:アルゴンガス(供給量 10L/min)
・チャンバ内雰囲気:アルゴンガス(供給量 1000L/min、チャンバ内流速 5m/sec)
・サイクロン内雰囲気:アルゴンガス、内圧:50kPa
・チャンバからサイクロンへの材料供給速度:10m/s(平均値)
<Plasma treatment (1)>
Plasma treatment (1) was performed by the following method. That is, a plasma treatment (1) was performed under the following conditions using an apparatus according to the black composite fine particle production apparatus shown in FIG. 1 of International Publication No. 2010/147098 as the metal fine particle production apparatus.
・ High-frequency voltage applied to the coil for high-frequency oscillation: Frequency, about 4 MHz, voltage, about 80 kVA ・ Plasma gas: Argon gas (Supply rate: 100 L / min)
Carrier gas: Argon gas (Supply amount: 10 L / min)
-Chamber atmosphere: Argon gas (Supply rate 1000L / min, Chamber flow rate 5m / sec)
・ Cyclone atmosphere: Argon gas, Internal pressure: 50 kPa
・ Material supply speed from chamber to cyclone: 10 m / s (average value)
 次に、原子Aを含有する原料粉末として、Fe粉JFEスチール製JIP 270Mを準備し、上記プラズマ処理(1)の条件によりプラズマ処理を行い、原子Aを微粒子化した。このとき、得られた微粒子に含まれる不純物を上記と同様の方法により測定したところ、不純物は検出されなかった。 Next, as a raw material powder containing atoms A, JIP 270M made of Fe powder JFE steel was prepared, and plasma treatment was performed under the conditions of the plasma treatment (1) to atomize atoms A. At this time, when impurities contained in the obtained fine particles were measured by the same method as described above, no impurities were detected.
 次に、上記により得られた金属微粒子、及び微粒子化した原子Aを混合し、原料金属粉末を得た。この原料金属粉末について、窒素ガス中においてプラズマ処理(処理条件は、下記のプラズマ処理(2)による)することにより、金属窒化物含有粒子を得た。 Next, the metal fine particles obtained above and the atomized atom A were mixed to obtain a raw metal powder. About this raw material metal powder, the metal nitride containing particle | grains were obtained by carrying out plasma processing in nitrogen gas (a processing condition is based on the following plasma processing (2)).
<プラズマ処理(2)>
 プラズマ処理(2)は以下の方法により行った。なお、用いた装置はプラズマ処理(1)と同様である。
・高周波発振用コイルに印加した高周波電圧:周波数、約4MHz、電圧、約80kVA・プラズマガス:アルゴンガス及び窒素ガス(供給量 それぞれ50L/min)
・キャリアガス:窒素ガス(供給量 10L/min)
・チャンバ内雰囲気:窒素ガス(供給量 1000L/min、チャンバ内流速 5m/sec)
・サイクロン内雰囲気:窒素ガス、内圧 50kPa
・チャンバからサイクロンへの材料供給速度:10m/s(平均値)
<Plasma treatment (2)>
Plasma treatment (2) was performed by the following method. The apparatus used is the same as in the plasma treatment (1).
・ High frequency voltage applied to the coil for high frequency oscillation: Frequency, about 4 MHz, voltage, about 80 kVA ・ Plasma gas: Argon gas and nitrogen gas (Supply amount 50 L / min each)
・ Carrier gas: Nitrogen gas (Supply amount: 10L / min)
・ Atmosphere in chamber: Nitrogen gas (amount supplied: 1000 L / min, flow velocity in chamber: 5 m / sec)
・ Cyclone atmosphere: Nitrogen gas, internal pressure 50kPa
・ Material supply speed from chamber to cyclone: 10 m / s (average value)
 プラズマ処理(2)終了後の金属窒化物含有粒子を、Arガスを用いて日本シンテック社製分流型湿度供給装置SRHにより大気中であれば相対湿度95%となる条件で20℃の窒素ガスを導入し、24時間静置した。その後、得られた金属窒化物含有粒子をホソカワミクロン製TTSPセパレータを用いて収率10%となる条件で分級を行い、金属窒化物含有粒子P-1の粉末を得た。なお、セパレータへは窒素ガスを供給した。 When the metal nitride-containing particles after the plasma treatment (2) are finished, the nitrogen gas at 20 ° C. is used under the condition that the relative humidity is 95% in the atmosphere by using a shunt type humidity supply device SRH manufactured by Nippon Shintec Co., Ltd. using Ar gas. It was introduced and allowed to stand for 24 hours. Thereafter, the obtained metal nitride-containing particles were classified using a TTSP separator manufactured by Hosokawa Micron under the conditions of a yield of 10% to obtain metal nitride-containing particles P-1. Nitrogen gas was supplied to the separator.
 金属窒化物含有粒子P-1の平均一次粒子径を測定したところ、12nmであった。また、金属窒化物含有粒子P-1の導電率を測定したところ、180×10S/mであった。
 なお、平均一次粒子径は、上記の方法により測定した平均一次粒子径である。
 なお、上記導電率は、下記の方法により測定した導電率である。
 導電率の測定は、三菱化学アナリテック社製粉体抵抗測定システムMCP-PD51を用いて下記の方法により測定した。
 まず、金属窒化物含有粒子を1g、上記測定装置のφ20mmの測定容器に詰めた後に、加圧を開始して、圧力を0kN、1kN、5kN、10kN、20kNと変化させ粒子の体積抵抗率(ρ)を測定した。その測定結果から、体積抵抗率が圧力に依存しない条件における飽和体積抵抗率を求め、得られた飽和体積抵抗率を用いて導電率(σ)をσ=1/ρの関係式により算出した。なお、上記試験は室温環境下で行った。
The average primary particle diameter of the metal nitride-containing particles P-1 was measured and found to be 12 nm. Further, the conductivity of the metal nitride-containing particle P-1 was measured and found to be 180 × 10 4 S / m.
In addition, an average primary particle diameter is an average primary particle diameter measured by said method.
In addition, the said electrical conductivity is the electrical conductivity measured by the following method.
The conductivity was measured by the following method using a powder resistance measurement system MCP-PD51 manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Analytech.
First, 1 g of metal nitride-containing particles are packed in a measuring container having a diameter of 20 mm of the above measuring apparatus, and then pressurization is started to change the pressure to 0 kN, 1 kN, 5 kN, 10 kN, 20 kN, and the volume resistivity of the particles ( ρ) was measured. From the measurement results, the saturated volume resistivity under the condition that the volume resistivity does not depend on the pressure was obtained, and the conductivity (σ) was calculated by the relational expression of σ = 1 / ρ using the obtained saturated volume resistivity. The above test was conducted in a room temperature environment.
[金属窒化物含有粒子P-2~P-7、P-C1及びP-C5の作製]
 原子Aの含有量を表1に記載したとおりとしたこと以外は、金属窒化物含有粒子P-1と同様にして、金属窒化物含有粒子P-2~P-7、P-C1及びP-C5を作製した。
 なお、上記金属窒化物含有粒子の作製に係る金属微粒子の平均一次粒子径、金属窒化物含有粒子の平均一次粒子径、及び導電率を表1にまとめて示した。
[Production of Metal Nitride-Containing Particles P-2 to P-7, P-C1 and P-C5]
The metal nitride-containing particles P-2 to P-7, P-C1 and P- are the same as the metal nitride-containing particles P-1, except that the content of atoms A is as described in Table 1. C5 was produced.
The average primary particle diameter of the metal fine particles, the average primary particle diameter of the metal nitride-containing particles, and the electrical conductivity related to the production of the metal nitride-containing particles are summarized in Table 1.
[金属窒化物含有粒子P-C2の作製]
 遷移金属原料に原子Aを添加しなかったこと以外は、金属窒化物含有粒子P-1と同様にして金属窒化物含有粒子P-C2を作製した。
 なお、上記金属窒化物含有粒子の作製に係る金属微粒子の平均一次粒子径、金属窒化物含有粒子の平均一次粒子径、及び導電率を表1にまとめて示した。
[Preparation of metal nitride-containing particles PC2]
Metal nitride-containing particles P-C2 were produced in the same manner as the metal nitride-containing particles P-1, except that the atom A was not added to the transition metal raw material.
The average primary particle diameter of the metal fine particles, the average primary particle diameter of the metal nitride-containing particles, and the electrical conductivity related to the production of the metal nitride-containing particles are summarized in Table 1.
[金属窒化物含有粒子P-8~P-15の作製]
 表1に示した遷移金属原料を用い、原子Aの含有量を表1に記載したとおりとしたこと以外は、金属窒化物含有粒子P-1と同様にして、金属窒化物含有粒子P-8~P-15を作製した。
 なお、上記金属窒化物含有粒子の作製に係る金属微粒子の平均一次粒子径、金属窒化物含有粒子の平均一次粒子径、及び導電率を表1にまとめて示した。
[Production of Metal Nitride-Containing Particles P-8 to P-15]
The metal nitride-containing particles P-8 are the same as the metal nitride-containing particles P-1 except that the transition metal raw materials shown in Table 1 are used and the content of atoms A is as described in Table 1. To P-15 were produced.
The average primary particle diameter of the metal fine particles, the average primary particle diameter of the metal nitride-containing particles, and the electrical conductivity related to the production of the metal nitride-containing particles are summarized in Table 1.
[金属窒化物含有粒子P-C3及びP-C4の作製]
 遷移金属原料に代えて、表1に示した各原料を用い、原子Aを添加しなかったこと以外は、金属窒化物含有粒子P-1と同様にして、金属窒化物含有粒子P-C3及びP-C4を作製した。
 なお、上記金属窒化物含有粒子の作製に係る金属微粒子の平均一次粒子径、金属窒化物含有粒子の平均一次粒子径、及び導電率を表1にまとめて示した。
[Production of Metal Nitride-Containing Particles PC3 and PC4]
Instead of the transition metal raw material, the raw materials shown in Table 1 were used, and the metal nitride-containing particles P-C3 and the metal nitride-containing particles P-1 were the same as the metal nitride-containing particles P-1, except that the atoms A were not added. PC4 was prepared.
The average primary particle diameter of the metal fine particles, the average primary particle diameter of the metal nitride-containing particles, and the electrical conductivity related to the production of the metal nitride-containing particles are summarized in Table 1.
 表1における遷移金属原料等及び原子Aの原料に係る各略号は以下のとおりである。 The abbreviations relating to the transition metal raw material and the like and the raw material of atom A in Table 1 are as follows.
・Nb粉 :三津和化学薬品製ニオブ(粉末)<100-325mesh>
・V粉  :太陽鉱工製金属バナジウム粉末VHO
・Zr粉 :和光純薬工業製ジルコニウム粉末
・タンタル Nodular :Global Advanced Metal製タンタルNodular
・Hf粉 :フルウチ化学製ハフニウム粉末
・Y粉  :日本イットリウム製イットリウム粉末
・Cr粉 :光成製脱ガス電解金属クロム粉
・Re粉 :Rhenium Alloys社製レニウム粉末
・W粉  :Eurotungsten製タングステン粉末AW3110
・Al粉 :大和金属粉工業製アルミニウム粉末No.22000
・Si粉 :フルウチ化学製ケイ素粉末
・Fe粉 :Fe粉JFEスチール製JIP 270M
・Ni粉 :Ni粉 東邦チタニウム製300ナノ品
・Ag粉 :Ag粉三井金属製 SPQ03R
Nb powder: Niobium (powder) <100-325 mesh> manufactured by Mitsuwa Chemicals
・ V powder: Metal vanadium powder VHO made by Taiyo Mining
-Zr powder: Zirconium powder made by Wako Pure Chemical Industries-Tantalum Nodal: Tantalum Nodal made by Global Advanced Metal
・ Hf powder: Hafnium powder made by Furuuchi Chemical ・ Y powder: Yttrium powder made in Japan yttrium ・ Cr powder: Degassed electrolytic metal chrome powder made by Kosei ・ Re powder: Rhenium powder made by Rhenium Alloys ・ W powder: Tungsten powder AW3110 made by Eurotungsten
・ Al powder: Aluminum powder No. 22000
・ Si powder: Silicon powder made by Furuuchi Chemical ・ Fe powder: JIP 270M made by Fe powder JFE Steel
・ Ni powder: Ni powder 300 nano product made by Toho Titanium ・ Ag powder: Ag powder made by Mitsui Kinzoku SPQ03R
 なお、以下の表1中における「ppm」は、質量ppmを意図する。
 また、表中、「検出されず」は上記測定方法により測定したところ不純物が検出されなかったことを示し、具体的には、20質量ppm未満を示す。また、「添加せず」は原子Aを添加しなかったことを示し、「測定せず」は上記原子Aを添加しなかったために、測定を行わなかったことを示す。従って、「測定せず」は実質的に20質量ppm未満(計算上は5質量ppm未満)を示す。
In addition, "ppm" in the following Table 1 intends mass ppm.
In the table, “not detected” indicates that no impurity was detected when measured by the above measurement method, specifically, less than 20 ppm by mass. “Not added” indicates that the atom A was not added, and “Not measured” indicates that the measurement was not performed because the atom A was not added. Therefore, “not measured” indicates substantially less than 20 ppm by mass (calculated less than 5 ppm by mass).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000021
<分散剤>
 分散剤として、以下の構造の分散剤A~Cを用いた。分散剤A及びCにおいて、各構造単位に記載の数値は、全構造単位に対する、各構造単位の質量%を意図する。分散剤Bにおいて、各構造単位に記載の文字は、全構造単位に対する、各構造単位のmol%を意図する。
<Dispersant>
Dispersants A to C having the following structures were used as the dispersant. In the dispersants A and C, the numerical value described in each structural unit intends the mass% of each structural unit with respect to the total structural units. In the dispersant B, the letters described in each structural unit intend mol% of each structural unit with respect to all the structural units.
・分散剤A
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
・ Dispersant A
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
・分散剤B
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
・ Dispersant B
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
・分散剤C
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
・ Dispersant C
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
<バインダー樹脂>
 バインダー樹脂としては、以下の樹脂A及び樹脂Bを用いた。以下に樹脂A及び樹脂Bのそれぞれの構造を示す。樹脂A及び樹脂Bにおいて、各構造単位に記載の数字は、全構造単位に対する、各構造単位のmol%を意図する。
<Binder resin>
As the binder resin, the following resin A and resin B were used. The structures of the resin A and the resin B are shown below. In the resin A and the resin B, the numbers described in each structural unit are intended to be mol% of each structural unit with respect to all the structural units.
・樹脂A:アクリキュアRD-F8(商品名、日本触媒社製)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Resin A: ACRYCURE RD-F8 (trade name, manufactured by Nippon Shokubai Co., Ltd.)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
・樹脂B
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
・ Resin B
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
 上記樹脂Bの式中、各略号は以下を示す。
 BzMA:メタクリル酸ベンジル
 MMA:メタクリル酸メチル
 HEMA:2-ヒドロキシエチルメタクリレート
In the formula of the resin B, each abbreviation indicates the following.
BzMA: benzyl methacrylate MMA: methyl methacrylate HEMA: 2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate
<重合性化合物>
・重合性化合物M1:ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート(日本化薬社製、商品名「KAYARAD」、下記式参照)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
<Polymerizable compound>
Polymerizable compound M1: dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., trade name “KAYARAD”, see the following formula)
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000027
・重合性化合物M2:PET-30(ペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート、日本化薬社製) Polymerizable compound M2: PET-30 (pentaerythritol triacrylate, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)
<重合開始剤>
・OXE-02:Irgacure OXE02(商品名、BASFジャパン社製)
<Polymerization initiator>
OXE-02: Irgacure OXE02 (trade name, manufactured by BASF Japan)
<重合禁止剤>
・PMF:p-メトキシフェノール
<Polymerization inhibitor>
・ PMF: p-methoxyphenol
<界面活性剤>
・F-556:メガファックF-556(DIC社製)
<Surfactant>
・ F-556: Megafuck F-556 (manufactured by DIC)
<有機溶剤>
・PGMEA:プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート
・CPN:シクロペンタノン
・酢酸Bu:酢酸ブチル
<Organic solvent>
-PGMEA: Propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate-CPN: Cyclopentanone-Acetic acid Bu: Butyl acetate
[金属窒化物含有粒子分散液の調製]
 まず、金属窒化物含有粒子、分散剤及び有機溶剤を、攪拌機(IKA社製EUROSTAR)によって15分間混合し、上記成分の混合液を得た。次に、得られた混合液に対して、シンマルエンタープライゼス製のNPM-Pilotを使用して下記条件にて分散処理を行い、金属窒化物含有粒子分散液を得た。なお、金属窒化物含有粒子に対する分散剤の質量比(D/P)が表3の実施例及び比較例に示す値になるように添加した。
[Preparation of metal nitride-containing particle dispersion]
First, metal nitride-containing particles, a dispersant and an organic solvent were mixed for 15 minutes with a stirrer (EUROSTAR manufactured by IKA) to obtain a mixed solution of the above components. Next, the obtained mixed solution was subjected to a dispersion treatment using NPM-Pilot made by Shinmaru Enterprises under the following conditions to obtain a metal nitride-containing particle dispersion. In addition, it added so that the mass ratio (D / P) of the dispersing agent with respect to metal nitride containing particle | grains might become the value shown in the Example of Table 3, and a comparative example.
<分散条件>
・ビーズ径:φ0.05mm、(ニッカトー製ジルコニアビーズ、YTZ)
・ビーズ充填率:65体積%
・ミル周速:10m/sec
・セパレータ周速:13m/s
・分散処理する混合液量:15kg
・循環流量(ポンプ供給量):90kg/hour
・処理液温度:19~21℃
・冷却水:水
・処理時間:22時間程度
<Distribution conditions>
・ Bead diameter: 0.05mm, (Nikkato zirconia beads, YTZ)
・ Bead filling rate: 65% by volume
・ Mill peripheral speed: 10m / sec
・ Separator peripheral speed: 13m / s
・ Amount of liquid mixture to be dispersed: 15kg
・ Circulating flow rate (pump supply amount): 90 kg / hour
・ Processing liquid temperature: 19-21 ℃
・ Cooling water: Water ・ Processing time: About 22 hours
[組成物の調製]
 次に、上記金属窒化物含有粒子分散液、バインダー樹脂、重合性化合物、重合開始剤、重合禁止剤、及び界面活性剤を混合、攪拌して、下記表2及び3に示す実施例及び比較例の各組成物を得た。なお、表2における各成分の含有量は、いずれも質量%である。
[Preparation of composition]
Next, the metal nitride-containing particle dispersion, binder resin, polymerizable compound, polymerization initiator, polymerization inhibitor, and surfactant were mixed and stirred, and Examples and Comparative Examples shown in Tables 2 and 3 below. Each composition was obtained. In addition, all content of each component in Table 2 is the mass%.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000028
<組成物中の水分量の測定>
 実施例及び比較例の各組成物の水分量について、カールフィッシャー法を測定原理とするMKV-710(商品名、京都電子工業社製)により測定した。結果を表3に示す。
<Measurement of water content in composition>
The water content of each of the compositions of Examples and Comparative Examples was measured by MKV-710 (trade name, manufactured by Kyoto Electronics Industry Co., Ltd.) using the Karl Fischer method as a measurement principle. The results are shown in Table 3.
[評価試験]
 実施例及び比較例の各組成物について、以下の各評価試験を行った。結果は、表3にまとめて示した。
[Evaluation test]
The following evaluation tests were performed on the compositions of the examples and comparative examples. The results are summarized in Table 3.
〔OD値〕
 厚さ0.7mm、10cm角のガラス板(EagleXG、Corning社製)上に、各組成物を用いて、スピンコートにより塗膜を形成した。この際、各組成物の固形分濃度に応じて、膜厚が1.5μmとなるよう回転数を調整した。形成した塗膜を、ホットプレート上で100℃、2分間の熱処理により乾燥させ、硬化膜を得た。得られた硬化膜を含有する基板について、分光光度計U-4100(日立ハイテクノロジーズ製)によりOD値を測定した。OD値が大きいほど、硬化膜は優れた遮光性を有する。なお、評価は以下基準により行った。実用上「C」以上が好ましい。
 A:OD値が4超
 B:OD値が3超4以下
 C:OD値が2超3以下
 D:OD値が2以下
[OD value]
A coating film was formed by spin coating on each glass composition (Eagle XG, manufactured by Corning) having a thickness of 0.7 mm and a 10 cm square. At this time, the number of revolutions was adjusted so that the film thickness became 1.5 μm according to the solid content concentration of each composition. The formed coating film was dried by heat treatment at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes on a hot plate to obtain a cured film. About the board | substrate containing the obtained cured film, OD value was measured with the spectrophotometer U-4100 (made by Hitachi High-Technologies). The higher the OD value, the better the light-shielding property of the cured film. Evaluation was performed according to the following criteria. Practically “C” or more is preferable.
A: OD value is over 4 B: OD value is over 3 and 4 or less C: OD value is over 2 and 3 or less D: OD value is 2 or less
〔経時安定性〕
 φ50mmで容量100mLの容器に、金属窒化物含有粒子分散液を100mL加えて、室温で9分間静置した。静置後に、上澄み1cm分の金属窒化物含有粒子分散液を抜き取り、その固形分濃度を蒸発乾固により測定した。静置前後の金属窒化物含有粒子分散液の固形分の変化率を下記式により計算し、その値を下記基準により評価した。実用上「C」以上が好ましい。
(式)固形分変化率=(初期固形分濃度)-(上澄み1cm分の固形分濃度)
 A:固形分変化率が3%未満
 B:固形分変化率が3%以上7%未満
 C:固形分変化率が7%以上12%未満
 D:固形分変化率が12%以上
[Stability over time]
100 mL of the metal nitride-containing particle dispersion was added to a container having a diameter of 50 mm and a capacity of 100 mL, and allowed to stand at room temperature for 9 minutes. After standing, the metal nitride-containing particle dispersion for 1 cm of the supernatant was withdrawn, and the solid content concentration was measured by evaporation to dryness. The change rate of the solid content of the metal nitride-containing particle dispersion before and after standing was calculated by the following formula, and the value was evaluated according to the following criteria. Practically “C” or more is preferable.
(Formula) Solid content change rate = (initial solid content concentration)-(solid content concentration of 1 cm of supernatant)
A: Solid content change rate is less than 3% B: Solid content change rate is 3% or more and less than 7% C: Solid content change rate is 7% or more and less than 12% D: Solid content change rate is 12% or more
〔パーティクル数〕
 PGMEAによって上記組成物を500倍に希釈した試料溶液を調製し、この試料溶液10ml中に含まれる10μm以上のサイズの金属窒化物含有粒子の数をフロー式粒子像分析装置(商品名「FPIA」、マルバーン社製)によって測定した。評価は以下の基準により行った。実用上「C」以上が好ましい。
 A:パーティクル数が3個以下
 B:パーティクル数が4~10個
 C:パーティクル数が11~20個
 D:パーティクル数が21個以上
[Number of particles]
A sample solution in which the above composition was diluted 500 times by PGMEA was prepared, and the number of metal nitride-containing particles having a size of 10 μm or more contained in 10 ml of the sample solution was determined by a flow particle image analyzer (trade name “FPIA”). , Manufactured by Malvern). Evaluation was performed according to the following criteria. Practically “C” or more is preferable.
A: Number of particles is 3 or less B: Number of particles is 4 to 10 C: Number of particles is 11 to 20 D: Number of particles is 21 or more
〔解像性〕
 8インチのシリコン基板上に、上記組成物を塗布して塗膜を作製した。塗膜の作製は東京エレクトロン製コーターデベロッパーACT8を用いて行い、各組成物の固形分濃度に対応して、膜厚が1.5μmとなるよう回転数を調整した。得られた塗膜を、プリベーク処理として100℃、2分間の熱処理をホットプレートにて行った。上記プリベーク後の塗膜つき基板に対してi線ステッパー(キヤノン製FPA3000i5+)を用い、10μm幅のアイランドパターンが形成されたフォトマスクを通して、上記塗膜を露光(ネガ)した。露光後の塗膜を、東京エレクトロン製コーターデベロッパーACT8を用いて、現像液としてCD-2060(富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ製)を用いて、30秒間パドル現像をし、現像後は純水によりリンス処理を行った。現像後の塗膜をポストベーク(温度:220℃、時間:10分)した。ポストベーク後の塗膜のパターン形状を測長SEM(Scanning Electron Microscope)により測定した。具体的には、アイランドの幅を測定し、以下の基準により評価した。実用上「C」以上が好ましい。
A:アイランドの幅が9.5μm~10.5μm
B:アイランドの幅が8μm以上9.5μm未満、又は10.5μm超12μm以下
C:アイランドの幅が8μm未満、又は12μm超
D:パターン剥がれた、又は現像不足によりアイランドが形成されなかった。
[Resolution]
The composition was applied onto an 8-inch silicon substrate to prepare a coating film. The coating film was prepared using a coater developer ACT8 manufactured by Tokyo Electron, and the number of revolutions was adjusted so that the film thickness became 1.5 μm corresponding to the solid content concentration of each composition. The obtained coating film was subjected to heat treatment at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes as a pre-bake treatment on a hot plate. The coating film was exposed (negative) through a photomask on which an island pattern with a width of 10 μm was formed using an i-line stepper (Canon FPA3000i5 +) on the substrate with the coating film after the pre-baking. The exposed coating film is subjected to paddle development for 30 seconds using CD-2060 (manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronics Materials) as a developer using a coater developer ACT8 manufactured by Tokyo Electron, and rinsed with pure water after development. Went. The developed coating film was post-baked (temperature: 220 ° C., time: 10 minutes). The pattern shape of the coating film after post-baking was measured with a length measuring SEM (Scanning Electron Microscope). Specifically, the width of the island was measured and evaluated according to the following criteria. Practically “C” or more is preferable.
A: The width of the island is 9.5 μm to 10.5 μm
B: The width of the island is 8 μm or more and less than 9.5 μm, or more than 10.5 μm and 12 μm or less C: The width of the island is less than 8 μm or more than 12 μm D: The island was not formed due to pattern peeling or insufficient development.
〔電極の防食性〕
 組成物を用い、イメージセンサーデバイス基板上にスピンコーターにより塗布膜を形成した。塗布膜をホットプレート上で100℃、2minの条件でプリベーク処理を行った。プリベーク処理後の基板に、i線露光装置(FPA3000i5+、キヤノン製)を用いて、基板上の受光部外周部分にダイシングライン及び電極部以外を被覆する遮光層を形成した。更に、ホットプレートを用いて220℃、5minの加熱処理を行った(ポストベーク工程)。遮光膜形成処理後、基板を130℃、相対湿度90%の条件下7日間暴露したのち、ワイヤーボンディングによって配線を形成した。ワイヤ切れの発生をキヤノンマシナリー製ワイヤーボンディング検査装置により評価した。評価したチップは50個、1チップあたりの配線数は40であった。評価は以下の基準により行った。実用上「C」以上が好ましい。
 A:ワイヤ切れが1個以下
 B:ワイヤ切れが2個以上5個未満
 C:ワイヤ切れが5個以上10個未満
 D:ワイヤ切れが10個以上
[Anti-corrosion of electrode]
Using the composition, a coating film was formed on an image sensor device substrate by a spin coater. The coating film was pre-baked on a hot plate at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes. On the substrate after the pre-baking treatment, an i-line exposure apparatus (FPA3000i5 +, manufactured by Canon) was used to form a light shielding layer covering the outer periphery of the light receiving portion on the substrate except for the dicing line and the electrode portion. Furthermore, heat treatment was performed at 220 ° C. for 5 minutes using a hot plate (post-baking step). After the light shielding film forming treatment, the substrate was exposed for 7 days under conditions of 130 ° C. and 90% relative humidity, and then wiring was formed by wire bonding. The occurrence of wire breakage was evaluated by a wire bonding inspection device manufactured by Canon Machinery. 50 chips were evaluated, and the number of wirings per chip was 40. Evaluation was performed according to the following criteria. Practically “C” or more is preferable.
A: No more than 1 wire break B: 2 or more but less than 5 wire C: 5 or more but less than 10 wire breaks D: 10 or more wire breaks
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
 表3に示した結果から、金属窒化物含有粒子が3~11族の遷移金属のうち、チタンを除く遷移金属であって、かつ、電気陰性度が1.22~2.36である遷移金属の窒化物を含有する実施例1~32の組成物を用いて作製された硬化膜(遮光膜)は、優れた遮光性、優れた解像性、及び優れた電極の防食性を有することがわかった。一方、比較例1~5の組成物を用いて作製された硬化膜(遮光膜)は、所望の効果が得られなかった。
 また、遷移金属が、それぞれニオブ、バナジウム、タンタリウム、イットリウム、クロム、レニウム、又はタンタグステンである実施例3、8、10、12、13、14、及び15の組成物を用いて作製された硬化膜(遮光膜)は、遷移金属がジルコニウム、又はハフニウムである実施例9又は11の組成物を用いて作製された硬化膜(遮光膜)よりもより優れたOD値(遮光性)を有していた。なかでも、遷移金属がそれぞれニオブ、又はバナジウムである実施例3又は8の組成物を用いて作製された硬化膜(遮光膜)は更に優れたOD値を有していた。
 また、固形分が、10~40質量%である、実施例21の組成物は、固形分が40質量%超の実施例22の組成物と比較して、パーティクル数がより少なかった。
 また、水の含有量が、0.1~1質量%である実施例23の組成物は、1質量%超の実施例24の組成物と比較して、パーティクル数がより少なかった。
 また、金属窒化物含有粒子の含有量が組成物の全固形分に対して20~70質量%である、実施例2の組成物は、20質量%未満である実施例29の組成物と比較して、より優れた経時安定性を有していた。また、上記実施例2の組成物は、70質量%超である、実施例28の組成物と比較して、パーティクル数がより少なく、また、得られる硬化膜(遮光膜)がより優れた解像性を有していた。
 また、金属窒化物含有粒子に対する分散剤の質量比が0.05~0.30である、実施例2の組成物は、上記質量比が0.05未満である実施例32の組成物と比較してより優れた経時安定性を有していた。また、実施例2の組成物を用いて作製された硬化膜(遮光膜)は、実施例18の組成物を用いて作製された硬化膜(遮光膜)と比較して、より優れた解像性を有していた。
From the results shown in Table 3, the transition metal in which the metal nitride-containing particles are transition metals excluding titanium among the transition metals of Groups 3 to 11 and the electronegativity is 1.22 to 2.36. Cured films (light-shielding films) produced using the compositions of Examples 1 to 32 containing the nitrides described above have excellent light-shielding properties, excellent resolution, and excellent corrosion resistance of the electrodes. all right. On the other hand, the cured film (light-shielding film) produced using the compositions of Comparative Examples 1 to 5 did not achieve the desired effect.
Also, a cure made using the compositions of Examples 3, 8, 10, 12, 13, 14, and 15 where the transition metal is niobium, vanadium, tantalum, yttrium, chromium, rhenium, or tantagsten, respectively. The film (light-shielding film) has an OD value (light-shielding property) superior to a cured film (light-shielding film) produced using the composition of Example 9 or 11 in which the transition metal is zirconium or hafnium. It was. Especially, the cured film (light shielding film) produced using the composition of Example 3 or 8 whose transition metal is niobium or vanadium, respectively, had a further excellent OD value.
Further, the composition of Example 21 having a solid content of 10 to 40% by mass had a smaller number of particles than the composition of Example 22 having a solid content of more than 40% by mass.
In addition, the composition of Example 23 having a water content of 0.1 to 1% by mass had fewer particles than the composition of Example 24 having a content of more than 1% by mass.
In addition, the composition of Example 2 in which the content of metal nitride-containing particles is 20 to 70% by mass relative to the total solid content of the composition is compared with the composition of Example 29 that is less than 20% by mass. Thus, it had better temporal stability. In addition, the composition of Example 2 is more than 70% by mass, and the number of particles is smaller than that of the composition of Example 28, and the resulting cured film (light-shielding film) is more excellent. It had image properties.
In addition, the composition of Example 2 in which the mass ratio of the dispersant to the metal nitride-containing particles is 0.05 to 0.30 is compared with the composition of Example 32 in which the mass ratio is less than 0.05. Therefore, it had better temporal stability. Moreover, the cured film (light-shielding film) produced using the composition of Example 2 has a better resolution than the cured film (light-shielding film) produced using the composition of Example 18. Had sex.
[金属窒化物含有粒子P-1(A)の作製及び評価]
 上記の方法により作製した金属窒化物含有粒子P-1の表面を水酸化アルミニウムにより被覆した金属窒化物含有粒子P-1(A)を以下の方法により作製した。
 まず、金属窒化物含有粒子P-1を100g計量し、750mLの純水中に添加して、よく分散させてスラリーを得た。次に、酸化アルミニウムとして濃度10質量%の塩化アルミニウム水溶液220g及び尿素160gを水500mLに溶かした溶液に、上記スラリーを加えてよく混合し、混合物を得た。この混合物を90℃で8時間加熱し、室温まで冷却した。冷却後の混合物を濾過し、その後水洗して、110℃で24時間乾燥後、更に600℃で5時間焼成して、金属窒化物含有粒子P-1の表面が水酸化アルミニウムで被覆された金属窒化物含有粒子P-1(A)を得た。上記金属窒化物含有粒子P-1(A)の平均一次粒子径は、13nm、導電率は100S/mであった。
 次に金属窒化物含有粒子P-1(A)を用いて、上記実施例1と同様の方法により、分散液、及び組成物を作製し、OD値、解像性、電極の腐食性、経時安定性、及びパーティクルについて評価を行ったところ、金属窒化物含有粒子P-1を用いた実施例1と同様の結果だった。
[Production and Evaluation of Metal Nitride-Containing Particles P-1 (A)]
Metal nitride-containing particles P-1 (A) in which the surface of metal nitride-containing particles P-1 produced by the above method was coated with aluminum hydroxide were produced by the following method.
First, 100 g of metal nitride-containing particles P-1 were weighed and added to 750 mL of pure water, and well dispersed to obtain a slurry. Next, the above slurry was added to a solution obtained by dissolving 220 g of an aluminum chloride aqueous solution having a concentration of 10% by mass as aluminum oxide and 160 g of urea in 500 mL of water, and mixed well to obtain a mixture. The mixture was heated at 90 ° C. for 8 hours and cooled to room temperature. The cooled mixture is filtered, then washed with water, dried at 110 ° C. for 24 hours, and further calcined at 600 ° C. for 5 hours, so that the surface of the metal nitride-containing particles P-1 is coated with aluminum hydroxide. Nitride-containing particles P-1 (A) were obtained. The metal nitride-containing particles P-1 (A) had an average primary particle size of 13 nm and a conductivity of 100 S / m.
Next, using the metal nitride-containing particles P-1 (A), a dispersion and a composition were prepared in the same manner as in Example 1 above, and the OD value, resolution, corrosiveness of the electrode, When the stability and particles were evaluated, the results were the same as in Example 1 using the metal nitride-containing particles P-1.
[金属窒化物含有粒子P-2(A)~P-15(A)の作製及び評価]
 上記金属窒化物含有粒子P-1(A)と同様の方法で、金属窒化物含有粒子P-2~P-15を用いて、金属窒化物含有粒子P-2(A)~P-15(A)を作製した。それぞれの平均一次粒子径及び導電率を表4に示した。
 次に金属窒化物含有粒子P-2(A)~P-15(A)を用いて、上記実施例2~32と同様の方法により、分散液、及び組成物を作製し、OD値、解像性、電極の腐食性、経時安定性、及びパーティクルについて評価を行ったところ、それぞれ、金属窒化物含有粒子P-2~P-15を用いた実施例2~32と同様の結果だった。
[Production and Evaluation of Metal Nitride-Containing Particles P-2 (A) to P-15 (A)]
Using the metal nitride-containing particles P-2 to P-15 in the same manner as the metal nitride-containing particles P-1 (A), the metal nitride-containing particles P-2 (A) to P-15 ( A) was prepared. Table 4 shows the average primary particle diameter and conductivity of each.
Next, using the metal nitride-containing particles P-2 (A) to P-15 (A), a dispersion and a composition were prepared in the same manner as in Examples 2 to 32, and the OD value, When the image properties, the corrosiveness of the electrodes, the stability with time, and the particles were evaluated, the results were the same as in Examples 2 to 32 using the metal nitride-containing particles P-2 to P-15, respectively.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000030
 実施例1において、重合開始剤をOXE-02からIrgacure OXE03(商品名、BASFジャパン社製)に代えた他は同様にして評価を行ったところ、実施例1と同様の結果が得られることが分かった。さらに、実施例1より、露光量に対するロバストが広く、露光量を減らした場合であっても解像性が維持できた。 In Example 1, the evaluation was performed in the same manner except that the polymerization initiator was changed from OXE-02 to Irgacure OXE03 (trade name, manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd.), and the same result as in Example 1 could be obtained. I understood. Furthermore, compared to Example 1, the robustness with respect to the exposure amount was wide, and the resolution could be maintained even when the exposure amount was reduced.
 実施例1において、重合開始剤をOXE-02からアデカアークルズNCI-831(ADEKA社製)に代えた他は同様にして評価を行ったところ、実施例1と同様の結果が得られることが分かった。さらに、実施例1より、露光量に対するロバストが広く、露光量を減らした場合であっても解像性が維持できた。 Evaluation was conducted in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the polymerization initiator was changed from OXE-02 to Adeka Arcles NCI-831 (manufactured by ADEKA), and the same results as in Example 1 were obtained. I understood. Furthermore, compared to Example 1, the robustness with respect to the exposure amount was wide, and the resolution could be maintained even when the exposure amount was reduced.
 実施例1において、重合性化合物を重合性化合物M1から重合性化合物M2に代えた他は同様にして評価を行ったところ、実施例1と同様の結果が得られることが分かった。 Example 1 In the same manner as in Example 1 except that the polymerizable compound was changed from the polymerizable compound M1 to the polymerizable compound M2, the same results as in Example 1 were obtained.
 実施例1において、重合性化合物を重合性化合物M1から各組成物全体に対する重合性化合物の含有量を代えずに、重合性化合物M1及びM2の混合物(質量比で1:1)に代えた他は同様にして評価を行ったところ、実施例1と同様の結果が得られることが分かった。 In Example 1, the polymerizable compound was changed from the polymerizable compound M1 to a mixture of the polymerizable compounds M1 and M2 (1: 1 by mass ratio) without changing the content of the polymerizable compound with respect to the entire composition. Was evaluated in the same manner, and it was found that the same results as in Example 1 were obtained.
 実施例1において、溶剤CPNに代えてPGMEAを用いた他は同様にして評価を行ったところ、実施例1と同様の結果が得られることが分かった。 Example 1 In the same manner as in Example 1 except that PGMEA was used instead of the solvent CPN, it was found that the same result as in Example 1 was obtained.
 実施例1において、溶剤CPN及び酢酸Buに代えてPGMEAを用いた他は同様にして評価を行ったところ、実施例1と同様の結果が得られることが分かった。 In Example 1, evaluation was performed in the same manner except that PGMEA was used instead of the solvent CPN and Bu acetate, and it was found that the same result as in Example 1 was obtained.
 実施例1において、界面活性剤F-556を用いなかった他は同様にして評価を行った。評価の結果、実施例1と同様の結果が得られることが分かった。 Evaluation was conducted in the same manner as in Example 1 except that the surfactant F-556 was not used. As a result of the evaluation, it was found that the same result as in Example 1 was obtained.
 実施例1において、重合禁止剤PMFを用いなかった他は同様にして評価を行った。評価の結果、実施例1と同様の結果が得られることが分かった。 In Example 1, the evaluation was performed in the same manner except that the polymerization inhibitor PMF was not used. As a result of the evaluation, it was found that the same result as in Example 1 was obtained.
<カーボンブラック分散物(CB分散液)の調製>
 上記の顔料分散物の調製において、金属窒化物含有粒子に代えて、カーボンブラック(商品名「カラーブラック S170」、デグサ社製、平均一次粒子径17nm、BET比表面積200m2/g、ガスブラック方式により製造されたカーボンブラック)を使用した以外は上記と同様の方法により、分散物を作製し、カーボンブラック分散物を得た。
<Preparation of carbon black dispersion (CB dispersion)>
In the preparation of the pigment dispersion, carbon black (trade name “Color Black S170”, manufactured by Degussa, average primary particle size 17 nm, BET specific surface area 200 m 2 / g, gas black method, instead of metal nitride-containing particles, was used. A carbon black dispersion was obtained in the same manner as described above except that carbon black produced by the above method was used.
 実施例1の組成物の調製において、組成物中で金属窒化物含有粒子P-1を21質量%含有するように添加した金属窒化物含有粒子分散液に代えて、金属窒化物含有粒子P-1を含有する金属窒化物含有粒子分散液と上記のCB分散液との混合物[組成物中の金属窒化物含有粒子P-1:組成物のカーボンブラック=5:2(質量比)。組成物中の金属窒化物含有粒子P-1とカーボンブラックとの合計含有量は21質量%である。]を用いた他は同様にして組成物を調製し、これを用いて評価を行った。評価の結果、実施例1と同様のOD値となり、実施例1と同様の遮光性が得られることが分かった。 In the preparation of the composition of Example 1, instead of the metal nitride-containing particle dispersion added to contain 21% by mass of the metal nitride-containing particles P-1 in the composition, the metal nitride-containing particles P- 1 is a mixture of a metal nitride-containing particle dispersion containing 1 and the above CB dispersion [metal nitride-containing particles P-1 in the composition: carbon black of the composition = 5: 2 (mass ratio). The total content of metal nitride-containing particles P-1 and carbon black in the composition is 21% by mass. The composition was prepared in the same manner except that was used, and evaluated using this composition. As a result of the evaluation, it was found that the OD value was the same as in Example 1, and the same light shielding property as in Example 1 was obtained.
<有彩色顔料分散物(PY分散液)の調製>
 上記の金属窒化物含有粒子分散液の調製において、金属窒化物含有粒子に代えて、ピグメントイエロー150(Hangzhou Star-up Pigment Co., Ltd.製、商品名6150顔料黄5GN)を使用した以外は同様の方法により、有彩色顔料分散物(PY分散液)を得た。
<Preparation of chromatic pigment dispersion (PY dispersion)>
In preparation of the above-mentioned metal nitride-containing particle dispersion, Pigment Yellow 150 (manufactured by Hangzhou Star-up Pigment Co., Ltd., trade name 6150 Pigment Yellow 5GN) was used instead of metal nitride-containing particles. A chromatic pigment dispersion (PY dispersion) was obtained by the same method.
 実施例1の組成物の調製において、組成物中で金属窒化物含有粒子P-1を21質量%含有するように添加した金属窒化物含有粒子分散液に代えて、金属窒化物含有粒子P-1を含有する顔料分散液と上記のPY分散液との混合物[組成物中の金属窒化物含有粒子P-1:組成中のピグメントイエロー150=6:1(質量比)。組成物中の金属窒化物含有粒子P-1とピグメントイエロー150との合計含有量は21質量%である。]を用いた他は同様にして組成物を調製し、これを用いて評価を行った。評価の結果、実施例1と同様のOD値となり、実施例1と同様の遮光性が得られ、さらに黒味の濃い膜が得られることが分かった。
 
In the preparation of the composition of Example 1, instead of the metal nitride-containing particle dispersion added to contain 21% by mass of the metal nitride-containing particles P-1 in the composition, the metal nitride-containing particles P- A mixture of a pigment dispersion containing 1 and the above PY dispersion [metal nitride-containing particles P-1 in the composition: Pigment Yellow 150 in the composition = 6: 1 (mass ratio). The total content of metal nitride-containing particles P-1 and Pigment Yellow 150 in the composition is 21% by mass. The composition was prepared in the same manner except that was used, and evaluated using this composition. As a result of the evaluation, it was found that the OD value was the same as in Example 1, the same light shielding property as in Example 1 was obtained, and a darker film was obtained.

Claims (21)

  1.  原子Aを含有する金属窒化物含有粒子を含有する組成物であって、
     前記金属窒化物含有粒子は、3~11族の遷移金属のうち、チタンを除く遷移金属であって、かつ、電気陰性度が1.22~2.36である遷移金属の窒化物を含有し、
     前記原子Aは、前記遷移金属の窒化物を構成する遷移金属とは異なる元素であって、ホウ素、アルミニウム、ケイ素、マンガン、鉄、ニッケル及び銀からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種であり、
     前記金属窒化物含有粒子中における前記原子Aの含有量が、0.00005~10質量%である、組成物。
    A composition containing metal nitride-containing particles containing atoms A,
    The metal nitride-containing particles contain a transition metal nitride that is a transition metal excluding titanium among the transition metals of Group 3 to 11, and has an electronegativity of 1.22 to 2.36. ,
    The atom A is an element different from the transition metal constituting the nitride of the transition metal, and is at least one selected from the group consisting of boron, aluminum, silicon, manganese, iron, nickel, and silver,
    The composition wherein the content of the atom A in the metal nitride-containing particles is 0.00005 to 10% by mass.
  2.  前記金属窒化物含有粒子の導電率が100×10~600×10S/mである、請求項1に記載の組成物。 2. The composition according to claim 1, wherein the conductivity of the metal nitride-containing particles is 100 × 10 4 to 600 × 10 4 S / m.
  3.  前記金属窒化物含有粒子の平均一次粒子径が10~50nmである、請求項1又は2に記載の組成物。 The composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the metal nitride-containing particles have an average primary particle size of 10 to 50 nm.
  4.  更にバインダー樹脂を含有する、請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising a binder resin.
  5.  前記金属窒化物含有粒子に対する前記バインダー樹脂の質量比が0.3以下である、請求項4に記載の組成物。 The composition according to claim 4, wherein a mass ratio of the binder resin to the metal nitride-containing particles is 0.3 or less.
  6.  前記遷移金属が、V、Cr、Y、Zr、Nb、Hf、Ta、W、及びReからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種である、請求項1~5のいずれか一項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the transition metal is at least one selected from the group consisting of V, Cr, Y, Zr, Nb, Hf, Ta, W, and Re. object.
  7.  前記遷移金属が、V、及びNbからなる群から選択される少なくとも1種である、請求項1~6のいずれか一項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the transition metal is at least one selected from the group consisting of V and Nb.
  8.  更に重合性化合物を含有する、請求項1~7のいずれか一項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 7, further comprising a polymerizable compound.
  9.  更に重合開始剤を含有する、請求項1~8のいずれか一項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8, further comprising a polymerization initiator.
  10.  更に溶剤を含有し、固形分が10~40質量%である、請求項1~9のいずれか一項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 9, further comprising a solvent and having a solid content of 10 to 40% by mass.
  11.  前記溶剤が水を含有し、前記水の含有量が、前記組成物の全質量に対して0.1~1質量%である、請求項10に記載の組成物。 The composition according to claim 10, wherein the solvent contains water, and the content of the water is 0.1 to 1% by mass with respect to the total mass of the composition.
  12.  前記金属窒化物含有粒子の含有量が、前記組成物の全固形分に対して20~70質量%である、請求項1~11のいずれか一項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 11, wherein the content of the metal nitride-containing particles is 20 to 70 mass% with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
  13.  更に分散剤を含有し、前記分散剤がポリアクリル酸メチル、ポリメタクリル酸メチル、及び、環状又は鎖状のポリエステルからなる群より選択される少なくとも1種の構造を含有する、請求項1~12のいずれか一項に記載の組成物。 Furthermore, a dispersant is contained, and the dispersant contains at least one structure selected from the group consisting of polymethyl acrylate, polymethyl methacrylate, and cyclic or chain polyester. The composition as described in any one of these.
  14.  前記金属窒化物含有粒子に対する前記分散剤の質量比が、0.05~0.30である、請求項13に記載の組成物。 The composition according to claim 13, wherein a mass ratio of the dispersant to the metal nitride-containing particles is 0.05 to 0.30.
  15.  前記金属窒化物含有粒子が、水酸化アルミニウムを含有する無機化合物で被覆された金属窒化物含有粒子である、請求項1~14のいずれか一項に記載の組成物。 The composition according to any one of claims 1 to 14, wherein the metal nitride-containing particles are metal nitride-containing particles coated with an inorganic compound containing aluminum hydroxide.
  16.  請求項1~15のいずれか一項に記載の組成物の製造方法であって、
     熱プラズマ法によって前記金属窒化物含有粒子を得る工程を含有する、組成物の製造方法。
    A method for producing the composition according to any one of claims 1 to 15,
    A method for producing a composition, comprising a step of obtaining the metal nitride-containing particles by a thermal plasma method.
  17.  請求項1~15のいずれか一項に記載の組成物を用いて得られる、硬化膜。 A cured film obtained using the composition according to any one of claims 1 to 15.
  18.  請求項17に記載の硬化膜を含有する、カラーフィルタ。 A color filter comprising the cured film according to claim 17.
  19.  請求項17に記載の硬化膜を含有する、遮光膜。 A light-shielding film comprising the cured film according to claim 17.
  20.  請求項17に記載の硬化膜を含有する、固体撮像素子。 A solid-state imaging device containing the cured film according to claim 17.
  21.  請求項17に記載の硬化膜を含有する、画像表示装置。
     
    An image display device comprising the cured film according to claim 17.
PCT/JP2017/010256 2016-04-08 2017-03-14 Composition, method for producing composition, cured film, color filter, light-blocking film, solid-state imaging element, and image display device WO2017175550A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2018510284A JP6571275B2 (en) 2016-04-08 2017-03-14 Composition, method for producing composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
KR1020187028416A KR102210003B1 (en) 2016-04-08 2017-03-14 Composition, manufacturing method of composition, cured film, color filter, light shielding film, solid-state image sensor, and image display device
KR1020217002285A KR20210011080A (en) 2016-04-08 2017-03-14 Composition, method for producing composition, cured film, color filter, light-blocking film, solid-state imaging element, and image display device

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2016078032 2016-04-08
JP2016-078032 2016-04-08

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2017175550A1 true WO2017175550A1 (en) 2017-10-12

Family

ID=60001079

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2017/010256 WO2017175550A1 (en) 2016-04-08 2017-03-14 Composition, method for producing composition, cured film, color filter, light-blocking film, solid-state imaging element, and image display device

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6571275B2 (en)
KR (2) KR102210003B1 (en)
TW (1) TWI726075B (en)
WO (1) WO2017175550A1 (en)

Cited By (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2020017184A1 (en) * 2018-07-20 2020-01-23 富士フイルム株式会社 Light blocking resin composition, cured film, color filter, light blocking film, solid-state image sensor, and image display device
CN111253782A (en) * 2020-02-12 2020-06-09 首钢集团有限公司 Modified anticorrosive hydrotalcite, water-based intelligent anticorrosive paint, preparation method and coating
CN112400124A (en) * 2018-09-11 2021-02-23 富士胶片株式会社 Light-shielding composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
US11194250B2 (en) * 2016-10-26 2021-12-07 Dongwoo Fine-Chem Co., Ltd. Metal oxide photosensitive resin composition, and color filter and image display device manufactured using same

Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS62102827A (en) * 1985-10-29 1987-05-13 Natl Res Inst For Metals Production of metallic or ceramic fine grain
JPH0578107A (en) * 1991-09-19 1993-03-30 Yoshikiyo Ogino Nitride powder
JP2007162133A (en) * 2006-11-28 2007-06-28 Seiko Epson Corp Method and apparatus for forming microsphere
WO2010147098A1 (en) * 2009-06-15 2010-12-23 東レ株式会社 Black composite particle, black resin composition, color filter substrate and liquid crystal display
JP2011050829A (en) * 2009-08-31 2011-03-17 Teijin Ltd Method and apparatus for manufacturing particulate
JP2011091215A (en) * 2009-10-22 2011-05-06 Toda Kogyo Corp Ferromagnetic particle powder and manufacturing method thereof, and anisotropic magnet and bonded magnet
JP2012096945A (en) * 2010-10-29 2012-05-24 Mitsubishi Materials Corp Blue color-shielding black powder, method for producing the same and use of the same
JP2012515803A (en) * 2009-01-26 2012-07-12 シャープ株式会社 Nanoparticles
JP2012149326A (en) * 2011-01-21 2012-08-09 Toda Kogyo Corp Ferromagnetic granular powder and method for manufacturing the same, as well as anisotropic magnet, bonded magnet, and pressed-powder magnet

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH08100201A (en) * 1994-09-30 1996-04-16 Takeshi Masumoto Composite superfine particles and their production
JP5010071B2 (en) * 2000-07-18 2012-08-29 株式会社東芝 Cold storage material, manufacturing method thereof, and refrigerator using the cold storage material
JP2010111570A (en) * 2008-10-10 2010-05-20 Neturen Co Ltd Y2o3 composite bead
JP5864959B2 (en) * 2011-08-31 2016-02-17 富士フイルム株式会社 Gray composition

Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS62102827A (en) * 1985-10-29 1987-05-13 Natl Res Inst For Metals Production of metallic or ceramic fine grain
JPH0578107A (en) * 1991-09-19 1993-03-30 Yoshikiyo Ogino Nitride powder
JP2007162133A (en) * 2006-11-28 2007-06-28 Seiko Epson Corp Method and apparatus for forming microsphere
JP2012515803A (en) * 2009-01-26 2012-07-12 シャープ株式会社 Nanoparticles
WO2010147098A1 (en) * 2009-06-15 2010-12-23 東レ株式会社 Black composite particle, black resin composition, color filter substrate and liquid crystal display
JP2011050829A (en) * 2009-08-31 2011-03-17 Teijin Ltd Method and apparatus for manufacturing particulate
JP2011091215A (en) * 2009-10-22 2011-05-06 Toda Kogyo Corp Ferromagnetic particle powder and manufacturing method thereof, and anisotropic magnet and bonded magnet
JP2012096945A (en) * 2010-10-29 2012-05-24 Mitsubishi Materials Corp Blue color-shielding black powder, method for producing the same and use of the same
JP2012149326A (en) * 2011-01-21 2012-08-09 Toda Kogyo Corp Ferromagnetic granular powder and method for manufacturing the same, as well as anisotropic magnet, bonded magnet, and pressed-powder magnet

Cited By (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11194250B2 (en) * 2016-10-26 2021-12-07 Dongwoo Fine-Chem Co., Ltd. Metal oxide photosensitive resin composition, and color filter and image display device manufactured using same
WO2020017184A1 (en) * 2018-07-20 2020-01-23 富士フイルム株式会社 Light blocking resin composition, cured film, color filter, light blocking film, solid-state image sensor, and image display device
CN112189168A (en) * 2018-07-20 2021-01-05 富士胶片株式会社 Light-shielding resin composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
JPWO2020017184A1 (en) * 2018-07-20 2021-08-02 富士フイルム株式会社 Light-shielding resin composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state image sensor, image display device
JP7027545B2 (en) 2018-07-20 2022-03-01 富士フイルム株式会社 Light-shielding resin composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state image sensor, image display device
CN112400124A (en) * 2018-09-11 2021-02-23 富士胶片株式会社 Light-shielding composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
CN112400124B (en) * 2018-09-11 2022-08-12 富士胶片株式会社 Light-shielding composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
US11624001B2 (en) 2018-09-11 2023-04-11 Fujifilm Corporation Light-shielding composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging element, and image display device
CN111253782A (en) * 2020-02-12 2020-06-09 首钢集团有限公司 Modified anticorrosive hydrotalcite, water-based intelligent anticorrosive paint, preparation method and coating

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2017175550A1 (en) 2019-03-14
JP6571275B2 (en) 2019-09-04
TWI726075B (en) 2021-05-01
KR20180115331A (en) 2018-10-22
TW201806850A (en) 2018-03-01
KR20210011080A (en) 2021-01-29
KR102210003B1 (en) 2021-02-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102208741B1 (en) Curable composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and method for producing cured film
JP6745869B2 (en) Composition, method for producing composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
KR102197489B1 (en) Curable composition, cured film, color filter, light-blocking film, solid-state imaging element, image display device, method for producing cured film, and polyfunctional thiol compound
JP7109624B2 (en) Composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP6698820B2 (en) Composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state image sensor and image display device
JP6571275B2 (en) Composition, method for producing composition, cured film, color filter, light-shielding film, solid-state imaging device, and image display device
JP6727344B2 (en) Curable composition, compound, cured film, method for producing cured film, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, infrared sensor
WO2019069609A1 (en) Method for producing cured film, method for producing solid-state imaging element, and method for producing image display device
WO2018173692A1 (en) Curable composition, cured film, light shielding film, solid state imaging element, solid state imaging device and method for manufacturing cured film
WO2017150069A1 (en) Resin composition, resin film, color filter, light shielding film, solid-state imaging device, and image display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20187028416

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2018510284

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 17778929

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 17778929

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1